L010987 XPanel Designer Users Manual

User Manual: L010987 - XPanel Designer Users Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 752

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

CIMON-Xpanel
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Note:
To change the product logo for your own print manual or
PDF, click "Tools > Manual Designer" and modify the
print manual template.

Title page 1
Use this page to introduce the product
by KDT SYSTEMS Co.,LTD.

This is "Title Page 1" - you may use this page to
introduce your product, show title, author, copyright,
company logos, etc.
This page intentionally starts on an odd page, so that it
is on the right half of an open book from the readers
point of view. This is the reason why the previous page
was blank (the previous page is the back side of the
cover)

CIMON-Xpanel
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic,
or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems without the written permission of the publisher.
Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of the
respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks.
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author
assume no responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information
contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event
shall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or
alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document.
Printed: 8월 2012 in (whereever you are located)

Publisher
...enter name...
Managing Editor
...enter name...
Technical Editors
...enter name...
...enter name...
Cover Designer
...enter name...
Team Coordinator
...enter name...
Production
...enter name...

Special thanks to:
All the people who contributed to this document, to mum and
dad and grandpa, to my sisters and brothers and mothers in
law, to our secretary Kathrin, to the graphic artist who created
this great product logo on the cover page (sorry, don't
remember your name at the moment but you did a great work),
to the pizza service down the street (your daily Capricciosas
saved our lives), to the copy shop where this document will be
duplicated, and and and...
Last not least, we want to thank EC Software who wrote this
great help tool called HELP & MANUAL which printed this
document.

CIMON-Xpanel

Table of Contents
Foreword

Part I Welcome to CIMON-Xpanel

Part II XPanelDesigner Update : V2.23

Part III Ethernet Loader

...................................................................................................................................
1 How to use Ethernet Loader

...................................................................................................................................
2 How to update Ethernet Loader

..........................................................................................................................................................
V2.10

Part IV Installation Guide
...................................................................................................................................
1 Essential Safaty Precautions

...................................................................................................................................
2 General Safety Precautions

...................................................................................................................................
3 Package Contents

...................................................................................................................................
4 Specification

...................................................................................................................................
5 Installation / Dimensions

...................................................................................................................................
6 Interfaces

...................................................................................................................................
7 Wiring

...................................................................................................................................
8 Developing Environment Setup

Part V SYSTEM Overview
...................................................................................................................................
1 Peripherals

...................................................................................................................................
2 Network

...................................................................................................................................
3 Xpanel Designer

...................................................................................................................................
4 Xpanel Unit

Part VI Configuration Tools
...................................................................................................................................
1 System Log : System Activity Log

...................................................................................................................................
2 Comm. Monitor : Communication Frame Monitor

...................................................................................................................................
3 Comm. Config : Communication Port Configruation

...................................................................................................................................
4 Misc. Config : Miscellaneous Configurations

...................................................................................................................................
5 Touch Calibrate : Touch Panel Calibration

...................................................................................................................................
6 Screen Capture : Make a Screen Snapshot

...................................................................................................................................
7 Date/Time : Adjust the System Clock

...................................................................................................................................
8 SW Keyboard : Pops-Up the Software Keyboard

...................................................................................................................................
9 Printer : Printer Setup

...................................................................................................................................
10 System Shutdown

Contents
...................................................................................................................................
11 Exit

Part VII Xpanel Designer

5
74

...................................................................................................................................
1 How to download project data

...................................................................................................................................
2 Xpanel Designer Installing and Running

...................................................................................................................................
3 Xpanel Designer menu

...................................................................................................................................
4 Project setup and download

Part VIII TAG Database

...................................................................................................................................
1 Overview

...................................................................................................................................
2 Database Window

...................................................................................................................................
3 How to use Database

...................................................................................................................................
4 Group TAG

103

...................................................................................................................................
5 Digital TAG

104

...................................................................................................................................
6 Analog TAG

104

...................................................................................................................................
7 String TAG

107

...................................................................................................................................
8 Database edit using EXCEL

108

Part IX I/O Device

113

...................................................................................................................................
1 I/O Device Basic

113

...................................................................................................................................
2 I/O Device Ethernet

114

...................................................................................................................................
3 I/O Device Serial

117

Part X Alarm

122

...................................................................................................................................
1 Alarm Group

122

...................................................................................................................................
2 Alarm Configuration

123

...................................................................................................................................
3 Alarm Summary

128

Part XI Graphic Page Editor

134

...................................................................................................................................
1 Page Properties

135

...................................................................................................................................
2 Frame Editor

139

...................................................................................................................................
3 Library

143

144
155

...................................................................................................................................
4 Object Properties

158

160
161
162
162
163
164
165
167

167
169
171
172

185

Part XII Keypad Page
...................................................................................................................................
1 Make Keypad Page

185

189

Part XIII Key Input Window
...................................................................................................................................
1 Key Input Setting

189

193

Part XIV Data Logging
...................................................................................................................................
1 Data Logging Configuration

193

...................................................................................................................................
2 Using Data Logging

197

200

Part XV Data Bridge
...................................................................................................................................
1 Edit Data Bridge Model

200

206

Part XVI Modbus Slave
...................................................................................................................................
1 Modbus Slave Setting

207

212

Part XVII Recipe
...................................................................................................................................
1 Model Configuration

213

...................................................................................................................................
2 Recipe Operator Interface

217

221

Part XVIII System Memory
...................................................................................................................................
1 Using System Memory Tag

221

...................................................................................................................................
2 Example of using system memory about opened page log.

223

...................................................................................................................................
3 Editing recipe data using system memory

230

238

Part XIX Trend
...................................................................................................................................
1 YT Trend

238

...................................................................................................................................
2 Scope Trend

245

...................................................................................................................................
3 SPC Trend

251

...................................................................................................................................
4 ST Trend

258

...................................................................................................................................
5 LOG Trend

265

...................................................................................................................................
6 XY Trend

271

280

Part XX String Editor
...................................................................................................................................
1 String Construction

280

287

Part XXI Using Multiple Language
...................................................................................................................................
1 Multiple Language setup

287

Contents

...................................................................................................................................
2 Multiple language string display

290

3 Using Multiple Language (Change the displayed language by
...................................................................................................................................
using multiple language table)

292

Part XXII Network Data Server

299

...................................................................................................................................
1 Data Definition in Xpanel

299

...................................................................................................................................
2 The Configuration of CIMON SCADA

300

Part XXIII Security

306

...................................................................................................................................
1 User Registration

306

...................................................................................................................................
2 Access Privilege

308

...................................................................................................................................
3 User LogOn / LogOff

310

Part XXIV Script

313

...................................................................................................................................
1 Structure of Program

313

...................................................................................................................................
2 Operator

317

...................................................................................................................................
3 Scripts for command and condition

319

...................................................................................................................................
4 Statements

321

322
322
323
323
324
324
325
326

...................................................................................................................................
5 Internal Functions

326

..........................................................................................................................................................
PageOpen(S1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
FrameOpen(S1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
StringTable(R1, R2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
GetTime(R1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
TimeStr(R1, S2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
RunApp(S1, S2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
MakeCsv(S1, R2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
MakeCsvUsb(S1, R2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
MakeLogCsv(S1,R2,R3)
..........................................................................................................................................................
DataLog(S1, R2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
RcpDownload(R1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
RcpUpload(R1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
RcpStop(S1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
RcpFileStore(S1, R2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
RcpFileRead(S1, R2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
RcpMemDown(S1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
RcpMemUp(S1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
RcpCsvRd(S1, S2, R3)
..........................................................................................................................................................
RcpCsvWr(S1, S2, R3)
..........................................................................................................................................................
RcpConfig()
..........................................................................................................................................................
TrendCsvWr(S1, R2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
ScrCapture(S1, R2)

331
331
332
332
333
333
334
335
335
336
337
337
338
338
339
339
339
340
341
342
343
344

CIMON-Xpanel
..........................................................................................................................................................
Sleep(R1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
HardCopy()
..........................................................................................................................................................
OpenPort(R1, R2, R3, R4, R5)
..........................................................................................................................................................
ClosePort(R1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
SendByte(R1, R2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
SendString(R1, S2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
ReceiveByte(R1, R2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
StrToNum(S1, R2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
NumToStr(R1 , R2 , S3)
..........................................................................................................................................................
LogOn(S1, S2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
LogOff()
..........................................................................................................................................................
LogOnWin()
..........................................................................................................................................................
GetSecurity()
..........................................................................................................................................................
OpenConfigWin()
..........................................................................................................................................................
SoftKeyboard(R1,R2,R3)
..........................................................................................................................................................
AlarmPrint(R1,R2,R3,R4,R5)
..........................................................................................................................................................
AlarmCsvWr(R1,S2,R3,R4,R5)
..........................................................................................................................................................
TouchCalib()
..........................................................................................................................................................
ClearAlarmLog(R1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
AddMessage(R1, S2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
RemoveMessage(R1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
RcpGetSysMem(S1, R2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
RcpSetSysMem(S1, R2)
..........................................................................................................................................................
GetSysMem(R1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
SysMemMove (R1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
SysMemFill(R1,R2,R3)
..........................................................................................................................................................
LcdBrightUp()
..........................................................................................................................................................
LcdBrightDown()
..........................................................................................................................................................
LcdBacklight(R1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
StaticBeepCtrl(R1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
SetSpeed(R1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
SetDate(R1,R2,R3)
..........................................................................................................................................................
SetTime(R1)

345
345
345
346
347
347
348
349
350
351
352
352
353
353
354
355
356
357
358
358
359
359
360
361
362
363
363
363
364
364
365
365
365

368

Part XXV Scroll Message
...................................................................................................................................
1 Scroll Message Configuration

369

...................................................................................................................................
2 Apply Scroll Message

370

375

Part XXVI Indirect Address
...................................................................................................................................
1 Using Indirect Tag

376

382

Part XXVII Communication Driver
...................................................................................................................................
1 ASIC Protocol

383

...................................................................................................................................
2 Barcode Scanner

389

...................................................................................................................................
3 Danfoss VLT Automation Drive FC300

394

...................................................................................................................................
4 DELTA TAU PMAC

406

...................................................................................................................................
5 FATEK PLC(Serial)

412

...................................................................................................................................
6 FATEK PLC(Ethernet)

419

...................................................................................................................................
7 HITACHI Inverter SJ300/L300P

428

Contents

...................................................................................................................................
8 KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI (RS232C/RS422A)

437

...................................................................................................................................
9 KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC Loader (RS232C/RS422A)

445

...................................................................................................................................
10 KDT Systems Xpanel Master

453

...................................................................................................................................
11 Keyence KV Mode

459

...................................................................................................................................
12 KOYO DirectNet

464

...................................................................................................................................
13 LSIS GLOFA Cnet

469

...................................................................................................................................
14 LSIS GLOFA Enet

477

...................................................................................................................................
15 LSIS GLOFA Loader

484

...................................................................................................................................
16 LSIS XGT Cnet

489

...................................................................................................................................
17 LSIS XGT Enet

497

...................................................................................................................................
18 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Loader

504

...................................................................................................................................
19 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Cnet

509

...................................................................................................................................
20 LSIS Master-K H Series PLC Cnet

515

...................................................................................................................................
21 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Enet

521

...................................................................................................................................
22 LSIS Inverter Starvert

529

...................................................................................................................................
23 MITSUBISHI Inverter FR-E500

533

...................................................................................................................................
24 MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU)

536

...................................................................................................................................
25 MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E(Q/QnA)

546

...................................................................................................................................
26 MITSUBISHI Melsec 1E

551

...................................................................................................................................
27 MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E ASCII

557

...................................................................................................................................
28 MITSUBISHI Melsec A Series (Programming Port)

563

...................................................................................................................................
29 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series

568

...................................................................................................................................
30 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series (Programming Port)

573

...................................................................................................................................
31 MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Series (Programming Port)

578

...................................................................................................................................
32 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX2N-10/20GM(Programming Port)

586

...................................................................................................................................
33 MODBUS RTU protocl

591

...................................................................................................................................
34 MODBUS TCP protocl

596

...................................................................................................................................
35 NAIS PLC FP Series (MEWTOCOL-COM)

601

...................................................................................................................................
36 OMRON HostLink

606

...................................................................................................................................
37 OMRON FINS Ethernet

612

...................................................................................................................................
38 PGuard(Serial)

627

...................................................................................................................................
39 SAIA S-BUS

631

...................................................................................................................................
40 SICK RFID Reader Enet

639

...................................................................................................................................
41 SIEMENS RK512/3964R

648

...................................................................................................................................
42 SIEMENS S7 Ethernet

654

...................................................................................................................................
43 SIEMENS S7 MPI

659

...................................................................................................................................
44 SIEMENS S7 PPI Direct

665

...................................................................................................................................
45 YOKOGAWA Personal Computer Link

672

...................................................................................................................................
46 Fuji Micrex SX Ethernet

680

CIMON-Xpanel
...................................................................................................................................
47 ALLENBRADLEY DF1

688

...................................................................................................................................
48 METRONIX APD

694

...................................................................................................................................
49 FARA N70/700 PLUS

703

...................................................................................................................................
50 Samsung BRAIN SPC Series

707

714

Part XXVIII FAQ
...................................................................................................................................
1 Xpanel Page Update and Speed

714

...................................................................................................................................
2 Xpanel IP Setting

719

...................................................................................................................................
3 How to use Xpanel Printer

724

4 How can I connect Xpanel and XpanelDesigner via USB port
...................................................................................................................................
under Windows Vista?

729

5 How can I display the engineering value from the raw value in my
...................................................................................................................................
device?

730

6 How can I export/import the Xpanel's TAG DB to/from Microsoft
...................................................................................................................................
Excel or other 3rd vender program?

732

...................................................................................................................................
7 Corrective Actions when font file delete is failed during download

734

...................................................................................................................................
8 When Ethernet Loader is not operated

737

Index

747

Foreword

This is just another title page
placed between table of
contents and topics

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

Welcome to CIMON-Xpanel

CIMON-Xpanel

Windows CE based New Touch

· Embedding-High

perfomance

mobile CPU (PXA255 400MHz)
· High color graphic display
(65536 colors)
· Various external data
interfaces (USB, SD memory)
· The best HMI panel for various
industrial automation
applications
· Powerful device
communication : 1 Ethernet, 2
RS232/RS422/RS485
· Sufficient internal memory for
large scale HMI system
· High resolution 4wire resistive
touch screen

Xpanel Designer

Easy and powerful design tool

· Fast data downloading by USB
· Supports high color graphic image(up to 16 bits)
· Supports animation GIF format
· Frame function provides easy solution for simultaneous displaying multiple monitoring pages
· Tag database can be exported (imported) to (from) MS EXCEL
· Alarm function supports acknowledge mechanism and historical reviewing of designated group
· Provides various graphic wizard object which make easy to link TAG and graphic object
· Logged data by data-logger function can be visualized by trend object
· Provides C-style script language and various embedded sub-routines for flexible design
See :
· Installation Guide

· Data Logger

· Network Data Server

· SYSTEM Overview

· Recipe

· Security

CIMON-Xpanel

· Configuration Tools

· System Memory

· Script

· Xpanel Designer

· Trend

· Communication Driver

· TAG Database

· String Editor

· FAQ

· Graphic Page Editor

· Using Multiple Language

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

CIMON-Xpanel

XPanelDesigner Update : V2.23
XpanelDesigner v2.23 has updated functionsas following.
Recipe Function upgraded
n “Group”editing functionin “Recipe Config”window is added
n “Item name”editing functionin “Recipe Config”window is added
n “GetRcpDnGrout()” script which can bring Data group name that downloaded last is
added
n Even if Recipe starting tag is not Float type, decimal point can be written in Xpanel
Designer.
Data logging function upgraded
n String tag logging function is added.
n Block is made continuouslyand automaticallyin case of that ‘Start Type’is ‘Enable Tag’
n Data Log object indicates current block number.
n Page Up and Page Down buttons are added in Data Log object.
CSV file name of Log Trend is modified.
New Xpanel(XT04CD, XT07CD, XT10CD, XT12CD, XT15CD) Dimming Time Control
function is added
Communication driver is added.
n OMRON CS/CJ Series FINS Ethernet Comm. Driver is added.
Time for Loading project becomes short.

•

•
•
•
•
•

[Recipe]

•

It is available to change Group name without downloading project again to Xpanel if you touch
“Group”at Recipe config window.

< Recipe Config window >

XPanelDesigner Update : V2.23

< Group name edit >

< Group name changed >

•

If you want to change Item name without downloading project file to Xpanel, double touch
item name.

CIMON-Xpanel

< Item name edit >

< Write the name >

XPanelDesigner Update : V2.23

< Item Name changed >

•

“GetRcpDnGrout()” script is used to bring Data group name of Recipe model which is
downloaded last.

< Instruction: Tag which will receive string value = GetRcpDnGroup(“Recipe model name”); >

CIMON-Xpanel

< If you click No.1, Group name which is downloaded last will be displayed at No.2>

•

Even if “RecipeArea Starting Position”is not “Float type”, decimal point can be written in Data
area.

[Data Logging]

•

Data Logging supports string tag collection. When you register tag in Data Logging, select

XPanelDesigner Update : V2.23

string tag. M
“akeLogCsv()” script is used to print out Text file format from collected string tag
value.

•
•

•

* String is displayed as (“-“) at Scope Trand and Data Logging object. If you convert it
to excel file, you can see string value as above picture column E, F and G.
Block is made continuouslyand automatically if ‘Start Type’is ‘Enable Tag’and block data is
full already.
Current data block number is displayed in Data Logging object as below picture.

< Data logging object>
In order to control Data Logging object,“Page Up”and “Page Down”are added.
n Page Up : to previous page
n Page Down : Move to next page

[LogTrend]

•

The CSV file name from Log Trend is modified. The CSV file name is generated as format
like “Year, Month, Date, Hour, Minute and Second.CSV”
.

CIMON-Xpanel

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

III

CIMON-Xpanel

Ethernet Loader
Ethernet loder is an embedded program in xpanel to up/download
the project update with an USB.

3.1

projects via enthernet and support

How to use Ethernet Loader
Ethernet loder is an embedded program in xpanel to up/download
the project update with an USB.

projects via enthernet and support

Xpanel IP Setting

Touch the new setting parts of (1).

Delete contents by the key ‘BS’of (2) and
input others to change using number key.

Click the [Apply this new setting] of (3).

Project Update

Click - [Online] -> [Copy Project To
Removable Memory]
(Refer to the manual "How to download the
project")

Connect this USB to Xpanel.

Click - [Update project from removable
storage] .
"Project Update" is displayed.

Ethernet Loader

Click - [Refresh]

Project list is displayed to (4).

Click the Project of (4) and [Project update]
of (3).

Project Update content is displayed to (5).
The massage [All file update: OK] is displayed
as it completes.

Close the page [Project update] by clicking
‘X’

Remove the USB and practice the Project
update into the Xpanel.

Watchdog
It is a function to automatically reset the software when project data is failure.
It is supported the enthernet loader 1.4 version. Download the xpaneldesigner v2.10 version or late.

Click the [Confige] to Ethernet Loader.

Check-mark the [Watchdog Time(Sec)]
checkbox.

When you change the set time, choose (3)
and change it using the buttons ‘Up’and ‘Down’of
(4). Its range is from 10 to 65535.

Click the [OK] to Confige.

3.2

CIMON-Xpanel

How to update Ethernet Loader
Ethernet loder is an embedded program in xpanel to up/download
the project update with an USB.

3.2.1

projects via enthernet and support

V2.10

Only in online ( USB, Ethernet)
1. Practice the XpanelDesigner V2.10.
2. Open a project or make a new project.
3. Click - [Online] -> [Setup Link]

4. Click - [Online] -> [UpgradeXPANEL Application Program]
5. Move to Xpanel as it completes
6. Close the project on the page ‘Xpanel Config’if it is running.

Ethernet Loader

7. Close the Ethernet Loader.
8. Two touch the [My Device]of this screen.

9. Two touch the [Xpanel]
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

CIMON-Xpanel

10. Two touch the [Bin]file.

11. Touch the [Eldr.exe]file. [Edit] -> [Copy].

Ethernet Loader

12. Move to the 'Xpanel' by

CIMON-Xpanel

13. [ E d i t ] -> [Paste]. Touch the "Yes" in the [ConfirmFile Replace].

14. Practice Ethernet loader.
15. Check its version for a normal update.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

CIMON-Xpanel

Installation Guide
Read the manual before you operate the Xpanel.
Xpanel Installation Guide
· Essential Safaty Precautions
· General Safety Precautions
· Package Contents
· Specification
· Installation / Dimensions
· Interfaces
· Wiring
· Developing Environment Setup

4.1

Essential Safaty Precautions

WARNING

System Design
· Do not create Xpanel graphic objects that could possibly endanger the safety of equipment and personnel.
Damaged Xpanel provides signal output ON or OFF continuously, can cause an major accident. We
recommend you to design the monitoring circuits by limit
switch to detect incorrect device movement.
· Do not create the Xpanel graphic objects to control the safe operation of device (Such as an emergency
stop).
The switches to control the safe operation of device should be installed separately.
· Design your system properly to remove communication function error between the Xpanel and the
controller of a device.
· Do not use the Xpanel as a warning device for critical alarms that can cause serious operator injury,
machine damage or production stoppage.
· Xpanel is not appropriate to use in places require extremely high stability and reliability such as aircraft

Installation Guide

control device, aerospace equipments, central trunk data transmission (communication) devices, unclear
power control devices, or medical life support equipment.
· Proper stability and reliability are especially required for medical usages and that system should be
designed to alternate or replacement except transportation vehicles (trains, cars and ships), diaster and
crime prevention devices, various type of safety equipment, non-life support related medical devices, etc.
· Even if the backlight of the Xpanel burns out, the Xpanel is still operating in device. If operator touched the
front panel without this concern, the device meght be failure and cause malfunction. For this reason, we do
not recommend the use of Xpanel graphic objects to control device such as emergency stop switches for
prohibiting the accident or device damage.
· Whe LCD backlight suddenly turns off, please follow the procedure to confirm whether the backlight was
burned out.
Step1. Check the "standby Mode On" set and screen for images.
Step2. LCD touch available on the screen against set "standby Mode On" running.

Installation
· Please do not disassemble Xpanel. An electric shock can happen when the high-voltage goes through
inside.
· Please do not modify the Xpanel unit, It cause fire or electric shock.
· Do not use the Xpanel at place flammable gases, It causes explosion.

Wiring
· To prevent an electric shock, confirm that the power certainly turned-off from Xpanel for connecting
others.
· Do not use power beyond the specified voltage range of the Xpanel. Doing so may cause a fire or an
electric shock.

Maintenance
· The Xpanel uses a lithium battery to back up the internal clock data. If the battery is incorrectly built-in,
then the battery exploded.
To prevent this, please do not replace the battery by yourself. When the battery needs to be replaced,
please contact your local service center.

CAUTIONS

CIMON-Xpanel

Installation
· Be sure to securely connect all cable connectors to the Xpanel. A loose connection may cause incorrect
input or output.

Wiring
· Ground the FG line of the Xpanel separately from FG lines of other units. Putting these FG lines too
close may cause an electric shock or unit malfunction.
Be sure to use a grounding resistance of 100Ω or less and ㎟
a 2or thicker wire, or applicable standard
of your country.
· Correctly wire the Xpanel, be sure that the rated voltage and terminal layout are within the designated
range. If the voltage supplied differs
from the rated voltage, or incorrect wiring or grounding is performed, it may cause a fire or unit
malfunction.
· Use only the designated torque to tighten terminal block screws of the Xpanel.
If these screws are not tightened firmly, it may cause a short circuit, fire or Xpanel malfunction.
· Be careful that the metal filings and wiring debris do not fall into the Xpanel, since they can cause a fire,
Xpanel malfunction or incorrect operation.

Maintenance
· The LCD contains a powerful irritant and if for any reason the panel is damaged and this liquid contacts
any part of your body, be sure to wash
that area with running water for 15 minutes. If any of this liquid enters your eye, flush your eye for 15
minutes with running water and contact a physician.

Unit Disposal
· When this unit is disposed of, it should be done so according to your country’s regulation for similar
types of industrial waste.

4.2

General Safety Precautions
1.

Do not strike the touch panel with a hard or pointed object, or press on the touch panel with too much
force,
since it may damage the touch panel or the display.

Installation Guide

Do not install the Xpanel where the ambient temperature can exceed the allowed range.
Doing so may cause the Xpanel to malfunction or shorten its operation life.

Do not restrict or limit naturally occurring rear-face ventilation of the Xpanel, or storing or using the Xpanel
in an
environment that is too hot.

Do not use the Xpanel in areas where large, sudden temperature changes can occur.
These changes can cause condensation to form inside the unit, possibly causing the unit to malfunction.

Do not allow water, liquids, metal or charged particles to enter inside the Xpanel, since they can cause
either a Xpanel malfunction
or an electrical shock. The allowable pollution degree is 2.

Do not store or use the Xpanel in direct sunlight, or in excessively dusty or dirty environments.

Do not store or use the Xpanel where strong jolting or excessive vibration can occur.

Do not store or use the Xpanel where chemicals (such as organic solvents, etc.) and acids can evaporate,
or where chemicals and acids are present in the air.

Do not use paint thinner or organic solvents to clean the Xpanel.

10. Do not store or operate the LCD display in areas receiving direct sunlight, since the sun's UV rays may cause
the LCD display’
s
quality to deteriorate.

11. If you store the Xpanel in areas where the temperature is lower than allowed level, the liquid of the LCD will
congeal and the LCD can
be damage. Conversely, if the storage area’
s temperature becomes higher than the allowed level, the liquid
of the LCD will become
isotropic, causing irreversible damage to the LCD. Therefore, be sure to store the panel only in areas where
temperatures are within
those specified in this manual.

12. After turning the Xpanel OFF, be sure to wait a few seconds before turning it ON again. If the Xpanel started
too soon,

CIMON-Xpanel

it may not start up correctly.
13. Due to the possibility of unexpected accidents, you must back up the project data of the Xpanel regularly.

4.3

Package Contents
The following items are contained in the package of the Xpanel.
Before using the Xpanel, please confirm that all items listed here are present.

· Xpanel Unit

· Fastener: 8 ea

· 5P Connector (XT05,XT06,XT10,XT12)

· Installation Guide

· CD

· Power Plug (XT04 & XT07)

v This unit has been carefully packed, with special attention to quality.
However, should you find anything damaged or missing, please contact your local Xpanel distributor
immediately.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Installation Guide

4.4

Specification
[XT12CB / XT10CB / XT07CB / XT06CB / XT05SB / XT05MB / XT04CA ]

Model

CM-XT12CB-A CM-XT10CB-A

CM-XT10CBD

CM-XT07CB-D

CM-XT06CB-A

CM-XT06CBD

LCD SIZE

12.1 inch

10.1 inch

7 inch Wide

6.5 inch

LCD TYPE

TFT Color

Colors

262K Colors

16.7M Colors

65,536 Colors

Resolution

SVGA 800×600

WVGA 800×480

VGA 640×480

Backlight

CCFL

LED

CCFL

Luminance

400 cd / ㎡

350 cd / ㎡

400 cd / ㎡

Touch Panel

4 wire registive

Memory

128MB SDRAM

64MB SDRAM

storage

1 GB

32MB Flash

COM1

RS-232/422/485

RS-232

COM2

RS-232

RS-422/485

Ethernet

10/100 Base-T

USB Host

1 Port

Tool port

None

1 USB Device

SD CARD

1 Solt

None

Rated Voltage

AC100~240V

Power
Consumption

20W

19W

Windows CE 5.0

Dimension(mm)

330×250×83

280×220×47

185×127×50

206×156×61

Panel Cut(mm)

319×239

267×207

177×119

192×142

CM-XT05SB-A
Model
CM-XT05SB-D
LCD SIZE

AC100~240V

CM-XT05MBA
CM-XT05MBD

5.7 Inch

DC24V

AC100~240V

CM-XT04CA-D+LAN

CM-XT04CA-D

4.3 inch wide

LCD TYPE

Color STN

Mono

TFT Color

Colors

256 Colors

16 shaded

16.7M colors

Resolution

QVGA 320 × 240

WQVGA 480 × 272

Backlight

LED

LCD

Luminance
Touch Panel

350 cd / ㎡

200 cd / ㎡

4 wire registive

DC24V

300 cd / ㎡
4 wire registive

4.5

CIMON-Xpanel

Memory

64MB SDRAM

storage

32MB Flash

COM1

RS-232

COM2

RS-422/485

Ethernet

10/100 Base-T

USB Host

1 Port

Tool port

1 USB device

SD CARD

None

Rated Voltage

-A : AC100~240V / -D: DC24V

DC24V

Power
Consumption

Windows CE 5.0

Dimension(mm)

206×156×61

128×102×50

Panel Cut(mm)

192×142

120×94

10/100 Base-T

None

Installation / Dimensions
[XT12CB / XT10CB / XT07CB / XT06CB / XT05SB / XT05MB / XT04CA ]

Installation Guide

CIMON-Xpanel

Installation Guide

4.6

Interfaces

XT10/ XT12 - COM1 : RS-232C

This interface is used to connect the Xpanel to the host (PLC), via an RS-232C cable.
When you use COM1 RS-232C port, you must not use COM1 RS-485/422 port.

Connector

XT10/XT12 -

Pin No

Name

Description

DCD

Data Carrier Detect

Receive Data

Transmit Data

DTR

Data Terminal Ready

Signal Ground

DSR

Data Set Ready

RTS

Request To Send

CTS

Clear To Send

Ring Indicator

COM1 : RS-422/485

This interface is used to connect the Xpanel to the host (PLC), via an RS-422/485 cable.
When you use COM1 RS-422/485 port, you must not use COM1 RS-232C port.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

CIMON-Xpanel

Connector

Pin No

Name

Description

RDB

Receive Data B

RDA

Receive Data A

GND

Ground

SDB

Send Data B

SDA

Send Data A

If you connect the Xpanel to the host via an RS-485 cable (2wire), you must connect SDA and SDB lines.
The RS-485 of the Xpanel runs under auto toggle mode. To reduce the risk of damaging the RS-422 circuit,
be sure to connect the SG terminal.

XT10/XT12 - COM2 : RS-232C
XT10A and XT12A series units have this interface.
This interface is used to connect the Xpanel to the host (PLC), via an RS-232C cable. You can use pin 2, 3,
5 of this interface.

Connector

Pin No

Name

Description

Receive Data

Transmit Data

Signal Ground

4
5
6
7
8
9
The serial port of the Xpanel is not isolated. When the host(PLC) unit is also not isolated.
Inside the Xpanel unit, the SG (Signal Ground) and FG (Frame Ground) terminals are connected to each
other.
When connecting an external device to the Xpanel with the SG terminal, ensure that no short-circuit loop is
created when you setup the system.

XT04/ XT07 COM1 : RS-232C / COM2 : RS-422/485
This interface is used to connect the xpanel to the host (PLC), via an RS-232C or RS-422/485 cable. COM1
and COM2 shares pins of one 9 DSUB connector.

Installation Guide

· If you connect the Xpanel to the host via an RS-485 cable (2wire) you must connect SDA and SDB lines.
· The RS-485 of the Xpanel runs under auto toggle mode.
· To reduce the risk of damaging the RS-422 circuit, be sure to connect the SG terminal.

Ethernet

This interface complies with the IEEE802.3 for Ethernet (10BaseT/100BaseTX).

RJ45 Connector

RJ45 Jack

Direct Cable: Host <-> HUB
Cable

Color

Orange/W

Orange

Green/W

Blue

Blue/W

Green

Brown/W

Brown

Cable

CIMON-Xpanel

Crossover Cable: Host <-> Host
Cable

4.7

Color

Orange/W

Green/W

Orange

Green

Green/W

Orange/W

Blue

Blue/W

Green

Orange

Brown/W

Brown

Cable

Wiring
WARNINGS
· To avoid an electric shock, when connecting the Xpanel power cord terminals to the power terminal
block,
confirm that the Xpanel power supply is completely turned OFF, via a breaker, or similar unit.
· Since there is no power switch on the Xpanel unit, be sure to attach a breaker-type switch to its power
cord.

Point
· To avoid a short caused by loose ring terminals, be sure to use ring terminals with an
insulating sleeve.
· When the FG terminal is connected, be sure the wire is grounded.
Not grounding the Xpanel unit will result in excess noise and vibration.

Connecting the Xpanel Power Cord
When connecting the power cord, be sure to follow the procedures given below.
· Confirm that the Power Cord is unplugged from the power supply.
· Unscrew the screws from the middle three (3) terminals, align the Ring Terminals and re-attach the
screws.

Point
· Confirm that the ring terminal wires are connected correctly.
· The torque required to tighten these screws is 0.5 to 0.6 N·m.

Installation Guide

Power Supply Caution
Please pay special attention to the following instructions when connecting the power cord terminals to the
Xpanel unit.
· If the power supply voltage exceeds the GP's specified range, connect a voltage transformer.
· Between the line and the ground, be sure to use a low noise power supply. If there is still an excessive
amount of noise, connect a noise reducing transformer.
· The power supply cord should not be bundled with or kept close to main circuit lines (high voltage,
high current), or input/output signal lines.
· Connect a surge absorber to handle power surges.
· To reduce noise, make the power cord as short as possible.

Grounding Caution
· When grounding to the rear face FG terminal of the Xpanel, (on the Power Input Terminal Block), be sure
to create an exclusive ground.
· Inside the Xpanel unit, the SG (Signal Ground) and FG (Frame Ground) terminals are connected to each
other.
· When connecting an external device to the Xpanel with the SG terminal, ensure that no short-circuit loop
is created when you setup the system.

4.8

Developing Environment Setup

Install XpanelDesigner

Following procedure assumes that the XPanelDesigner was installed first.
You can find the setup program of XPanelDesigner in CD or internet web page
http://www.kdtsys.com/
(
)

ActiveSync Setup

Install ActiveSync using afforded CD when you purchased Xpanel. If you lost afforded CD, you can
download it by internet.
You can do installation as the following figure.

CIMON-Xpanel

If you could see the dialog box above, then select “Next”.

Click the check box as the above figure, then select “Next”.

Installation Guide

Input User Name and Organization in the blank and then select “Next”.

Select ‘Destination Folder’in your hard disc, and then select “Next”.

CIMON-Xpanel

If you could see the dialog box above, then select “Finish” and then restart your computer.

Install the Device Driver

Connect the XPanel unit and PC with USB cable after installation of ActiveSync. And then, you have to
reboot the Xpanel.
If it was the first time connecting with Xpanel then your PC requires device driver configuration as shown in
the following dialog box.

Installation Guide

Select Check button as the above figure then “Next”.

Insert CD provided with XPanel unit, and then select “Next”.
If you don’t have CD, then you can choose the location of device driver manually as shown in the following
dialog box.
This assumes that XPanelDesigner was installed in your PC already.

CIMON-Xpanel

Give the location as shown in the above dialog box. Typically, the device driver can be found in “C:
\Program

Files\XPanel\XPanel_Driver” folder.

If the device was searched successfully, then the above dialog box would be shown. Click the “Finish”
button.

Connect the Xpanel unit and PC with USB cable

Whenever your computer or XPanel was restarted, you would see the following dialog box.

Installation Guide

Select check button as above the figure and then select “Next”.
Then you can see as the following figure it means ActiveSync installation success.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

SYSTEM Overview

SYSTEM Overview
· Xpanel supports various kinds of peripherals.
· Xpanel supports not only 1:1 network but also multi-drop topology.
· Xpanel Designer is a free software. It can be run on the standard Microsoft Windows platform such as
Windows XP.
· Xpanel unit always searches a project files for execution at start up.

System Overview
· Peripherals
· Network
· Xpanel Designer
· Xpanel Unit

5.1

Peripherals

Xpanel supports various kinds of peripherals. For those peripheral connection, Xpanel provides following
interfaces :

USB Client

This interface is used for Xpanel Designer interface. By using this port, all configuration
data files including the
screen drawings can be up and downloaded. Xpanel Designer software is a free software.

CIMON-Xpanel

It is provided by CD
and can be downloaded through the internet. (http://www.kdtsys.com)
Xpanel Designer is a Microsoft Windows based software. And for connection with Xpanel, it
uses another software on
PC, the Microsoft ActiveSync. The ActiveSync is provided by CD, but also can be
downloaded from Microsoft web sites.

USB Host

This interface can be used for many kinds of peripherals such as printers, memory sticks,
barcode scanners and
keyboards. For connection of multiple of them, the USB hub can be utilized.

SD/MMC

SD/MMC memory slot can be used for storage expansion and/or upgrading project files.

Memory Slot

The Xpanel provides standard 8MB internal flash memory. If this storage was not enough
for storing all project data
files, external SD/MMC or USB memory can be used.
Xpanel detects SD/MMC or USB memory automatically. And if there are required folder and
files in external memory,
Xpanel will load the project files from that external memory at startup. In this case, the
project files of internal flash
memory will be ignored.

5.2

Network

Xpanel supports not only 1:1 network but also multi-drop topology.
And more, Xpanel can communicate with several different devices and networks on the same time.

SYSTEM Overview

Ethernet
Communication
Port

Ethernet communication facility of Xpanel is used in various purposes.
The main usage of Ethernet port is for communicating with devices. Many different kinds
of devices can be linked with
Xpanel in the same network at the same time.Other usage of Ethernet is network with
SCADA system. Xpanel can be
a data server for SCADA on Ethernet. The OPC server will be provided free. And one
more usage of Ethernet is file
sharing with PCs which are located in the same network. Xpanel supports the MS
Windows network.
That means the Xpanel can access the shared files of PCs on Windows network. This
functionality is very useful when
exporting the CSV formatted file from Xpanel.

5.3

RS232C
(RS422/485)
Communication
Port

Xpanel provides a standard RS232C/RS422/485 communication port.

Additional
RS232C
Communication
Port

Xpanel provides additional one RS232C port. This port supports null modem connection.

And the mode (RS232C or RS422/485) of port is switched by only software configuration.
This port supports full signal lines for standard modem connection.

Xpanel Designer
Xpanel Designer is a free software.
It can be run on the standard Microsoft Windows platform such as Windows XP.
By using Xpanel Designer, following works can be carried out :

Device
Configuration

According to the connected devices, all the communication parameters can be configured
such as communication
media, port, baudrate, station number etc. Every configured devices on network are given
it’s own name, and this
name will be used in TAG database configuration.

TAG Database

The TAG is the basic unit of data processing in Xpanel. Three types of TAGs are provided
according to the data type.
The first type of TAG is the digital TAG. Digital TAG represents two different states and
can be used for general 1 bit
input or output point of the device. The second type of TAG is the analog TAG. This type
of TAG represents a number.
A number can be a binary word, BCD or floating point value and some additional data
processing can be accomplished on this type of TAG such as scaling.
Any type of TAG could be assigned a physical address of device. This kind if TAG is
called as 'Real TAG' and Xpanel unit polls the value of this TAG from device by
communication, when it is needed. A TAG which is not assigned the physical address of

CIMON-Xpanel

device is called as 'Virtual TAG'. Virtual TAG is used for internal data calculation, script
programming and string data manipulation.
Screen Editor

Xpanel Designer provides it’s own graphic editor. It is an object based graphic editor.
Each graphic object can be configured with some animation controls. There are many
kinds of animation controls
supported such as blinking, visualizing, coloring, moving, rotating, digitizing, zooming and
more.
These all animations are triggered by the value of designated TAG in Xpanel unit.
The Xpanel provides abundant graphic libraries and supports true type fonts, also.

Script
Programming

Xpanel provides ‘C’style script language of it’s own.
This script language supports inherent ‘C’language keywords such as ‘switch-case’
statement.
And more, Xpanel unit provides priority controlled multi-threading environment for that
script program.
This script language can be used not only for data processing but also for device control.

Xpanel
Unit Upgrade

Every Xpanel Designer releases have it’s own version of binary files for Xpanel unit. And
when connected first time
with Xpanel unit, the Xpanel Designer detects the version of Xpanel unit, and if needed,
upgrade the binary files in
Xpanel unit automatically.
Xpanel Designer provides a tool for making memory image of SD/MMC or USB. This
image includes project folders
and files for Xpanel unit. On start-up, Xpanel unit searches this image in external memory.
If it was found, Xpanel unit
uses this image as a project data, and the one in internal flash memory will be ignored.
This is useful when a user do
not want to use a PC or notebook for project data update. The user can change the
configuration or the design of
screen with a memory card only.

Configure
Other
Functions

Xpanel provides many special functions for Xpanel application such as data logger, alarm,
trend, recipe and
network service. All these functions can be configured in Xpanel Designer.

5.4

Xpanel Unit
Xpanel unit always searches a project files for execution at start up.
Following diagram shows the order of that search. If the project files are found at one of three locations, Xpanel
unit load those project files to execute.

SYSTEM Overview

After the loading of project files, all configured tasks are executed concurrently.
The task execution in an Xpanel unit is performed by time-sharing and multi-threading with priority.
Graphic processing and file manipulation in Xpanel are processed by time sharing. But, almost other tasks
are executed by means of multi-threading.
The priority based multi-threading makes it possible to process real-time data. Communication and script are
good examples for priority based multi-threaded task.
On the other hand, Xpanel provides some tools for maintenance during runtime. These tools can be
visualized by three step touch screen operations.
Following picture shows these operations of touch screen.

After these touch operations, a dialog box will be appeared on screen and you can see the following
services for maintenance.

System Log

An Xpanel logs the system activities in memory during its runtime.
This service makes you can see those logged messages.

Comm.

Communication frames between the Xpanel and devices can be visualized with this

Monitor

service.

Comm.

Communication parameters can be configured by this service.

Port

IP address, baudrate and other parameters of communication port are listed on the

Configuration

dialog box, and can be
changed by common control interfaces of Windows.

CIMON-Xpanel

Misc.

LCD backlight and beep sound can be configured by this service.

Configurations
Touch

This service provides a chance to calibrate touch panel of Xpanel.

Calibration
Clock Setting

The real time clock can be adjusted by this service.

Software

The Xpanel has a software keyboard interface. This service visualizes or hides the

Keyboard

software keyboard on screen.

Xpanel

This service shutdowns the Xpanel program on Xpanel unit.

Shutdown
Suspend

This service shutdowns the operating system of Xpanel unit.
When the IP address is changed, this service must be activated. After the system
shutdown, the system
will not be restarted automatically. The external power must be turned off and on again
for system restart.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

CIMON-Xpanel

Configuration Tools
Xpanel provides several online configuration tools.
The configuration tools can be visualized by pressing three corners of touch area as shown in left picture.

After pressing each corner one by one, the following dialog box is popped up. All the configuration tools are
shown in this dialog box.

· System Log
· Comm Monitor
· Comm. Config
· Misc. Config
· Touch Calibrate
· Screen Capture
· Date/Time
· SW Keyboard
· Printer
· System Shoutdown
· Exit

6.1

System Log : System Activity Log
The Xpanel logs the system activities in memory during its runtime. This service makes you can see those
logged messages.

Configuration Tools

6.2

Comm. Monitor : Communication Frame Monitor
Communication frames between the Xpanel and devices can be monitored with this service.

Start / Pause

Starts or pauses the communication frame logging job.
The frame marked as ‘[ T X ]’is the frame transmitted from Xpanel.
And the frame marked as ‘[ R X ]’is the frame received from a device.

Clear

Clears all logged frame from the list.

ASCII / BIN

Sets the data coding format of the frame. When the ‘ASCII’format is chosen, only the data
between 20h to 7Fh
are displayed correctly. Other data will be seen as broken character. And when the ‘BIN’

CIMON-Xpanel

format is chosen,
all the data is displayed in hexa-decimal number.
Resize

Changes the window size. Xpanel provides two differently sized windows.
One is full-window sized and the other is small sized window.
(The small sized window is the best fitting size for 5.6 inch LCD)

6.3

Comm. Config : Communication Port Configruation
Communication parameters can be configured by this service.
IP address, baudrate and other parameters of communication port are listed on the dialog box, and can be
changed by common control
interfaces of Windows. When the ‘Comm. Config’tool is activated, following dialog box is popped up.

First of all, the communication port to be configured must be selected. As shown in the above picture, the
operator can select one of ports being used.
The port combo-box lists the names of device which are registered in current project.

Serial Port (COM1 / COM2)

When a serial device is chosen for port configuration, following parameters can be configured.
All the parameter modifications are applied immediately to the current running project.

Configuration Tools

Xpanel’s COM1 port can be used for three kinds of network type. Available network types are RS232C,
RS422A and RS485.
One of them can be chosen by using this tool as shown in right-hand picture of above.
The actual terminal block for COM1 is decided according to this configuration.
The modem parameters are prepared for special purpose application. It is dependent on the
communication driver used.
Following pictures shows the parameters for dial-up modem application.

Ethernet Port

When an Ethernet device is chosen for port configuration, following parameters can be configured.
All the parameter modifications are applied immediately to the current running project.

CIMON-Xpanel

"System Shutdown" is needed. Refer to the ‘section
But for storing the new configuration permanently,
11’of this chapter.

Another Method for Ethernet Configuration

The standard WinCE operating system provides another way to configure Ethernet. It can be done in
desktop window.
The desktop window can be accessed only when the Xpanel program is closed.
For closing the Xpanel program, use the ‘Exit’ button. (The ‘Exit’button is described in the ‘section 12’of
this chapter)

1. First of all, execute and put a software keyboard on the desktop window.
This keyboard will be used during the network configuration. For doing this, make the task bar visible
as shown in the following picture.

Configuration Tools

2. Execute the software keyboard by touching the

icon at the right corner of the task bar, and select

LargeKB ’menu.
‘
The software keyboard will be popped up as shown in following picture.

3. The next step is executing the LAN configuration tool. Follow the icons listed below, started from the
desktop window.

The setting dialog box of above can be accessed by the software keyboard which is prepared at the
previous step.

CIMON-Xpanel

4. For storing the network settings permanently, it is needed to ‘suspend’the operating system.
This can be done by theSuspend
‘
’menu of ‘Start’tool as shown in the following picture.

6.4

Misc. Config : Miscellaneous Configurations

LCD backlight

It provides a sleeping function for LCD backlight.

OFF

The time span is based on the unit of minute. If there is no touch operation during this
time span,
the backlight of LCD is turned off automatically. The backlight will be turned on when there
is any touch operation.

Mouse cursor

Mouse cursor display is dependent on this option. This option is effective only on the

enable

following version of OS and XpanelDesigner.
· OS : V1.15
· XpanelDesigner ; V1.30

LCD Brightness

Operator can control the LCD brightness by this function. Up to 32 brightness levels are
provided by hardware. This function is supported by following version of OS.
· OS : V1.17

Configuration Tools

6.5

Touch Calibrate : Touch Panel Calibration

Touch

This service provides a chance to calibrate touch panel of Xpanel.

Calilbrate

Follow the instruction message shown at the top of the screen.

Point
For storing the new calibration data permanently, ‘System Shutdown’is needed. Refer to the ‘section 11’of
this chapter.
If the ‘System Shutdown’was not executed, the new calibration data will be discarded and the previous one
will be restored
when the system is restarted.

6.6

CIMON-Xpanel

Screen Capture : Make a Screen Snapshot

Screen Capture

This service makes a screen capture file of current display. Generated file has bitmap
" \ X p a n e" l \folder. File name is given automatically,
(BMP) formatted file and located in the
and has following format which is derived
from clock.

6.7

Date/Time : Adjust the System Clock

Date / Time

The real time clock can be adjusted by this service.

Configuration Tools

6.8

SW Keyboard : Pops-Up the Software Keyboard

Date / Time

The Xpanel has a software keyboard interface.
This button visualizes or hides the software keyboard on screen. Following picture shows
the software keyboard.

For removing the software keyboard from screen, use the ‘SW Keyboard’ button again.

6.9

Printer : Printer Setup

Printer

Xpanel supports the PCL. The laser or inkjet type printers supporting PCL can be
connected with Xpanel through the USB or network.

CIMON-Xpanel

Point
For storing the setup permanently, ‘System Shutdown’is needed after this setup procedure.
Refer to the
‘section 11’of this chapter.
If the ‘System Shutdown’was not executed, the setup data will be discarded and the previous one will be
restored when the system is restarted.

Print Configuration Dialog Box

Following picture shows the print configuration dialog box.

Printer

Select the type of connected printer. The type can be onePCL
of ‘Inkjet ’or P
‘CL Laser ’.

Port

Select a port where the printer is connected.
· USB Printer : If a printer is connected to the Xpanel though the USB host port,
select the LPT1:"
"
The LPT1 port is automatically detected and displayed only when
the printer is connected.
· Network Printer : If a printer can be reached through the network,
select the Network
"
". In this case, the ‘Net Path’field must be configured as
following example.
Format

\\PC_name\Printer_name

Example

\\kim40\canonir2

The software keyboard would be needed for setting the network path.
The software keyboard can be shown by ‘SW Keyboard’service. Please refer to the
previous section
(section 11 : SW Keyboard) of this chapter.

Configuration Tools

Network Printer Logon

If the ‘Port’is chosen asNetwork
‘
’, the Xpanel tries to connect the PC through network and pops-up
following logon dialog box.

Enter the authorized user name and password to the logon dialog box above, and then push thebutton
in title bar.
Xpanel will pop up following dialog box.

If ‘Yes’is chosen, the password entered will be stored in disk permanently.
Otherwise (in case of ‘No’), the Xpanel will ask the password whenever try to use the network printer.

How to print a screen?

Xpanel provides the HardCopy()’
‘
function for printing the screen image. The HardCopy() function is
explained in the ‘Script’ chapter.

CIMON-Xpanel

An example which prints a screen image by a touch operation is provided in this section.
For printing a screen, a touch object should be declared in the graphic page.
This touch object must have the property of ‘Command Expression’style and
HardCopy()
'
' function has to
be declared in its ‘Command’ input field.
Previous picture shows the situation of configuration with the Xpanel Designer.
Following picture is a snapshot of the Xpanel online screen. Assume that this screen is configured as
described above.

When the operator touches the ‘Screen Print’ object, the Xpanel prints current displaying screen out.
The operator will be notified the successful printing by following pop-up dialog box, some seconds after.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Configuration Tools

6.10

System Shutdown

System

This service shutdowns the operating system of Xpanel unit.

shutdown

The system shutdown must be done when there is a change in one of following items.
· Ethernet Port Configurations (IP address, Subnet Mask and/or Gateway)
· Touch Calibration
· Printer Setup
After the system shutdown, the system will not be restarted automatically. The external power must be turned
off and on again for system restart.

Point

CIMON-Xpanel

This has the same effect with the ‘Suspend’ function of ‘Start’menu in desktop
window.

6.11

Exit

This service exits the Xpanel program and return to the desktop window as shown in
following picture.

In this desktop window, following jobs can be performed.
· File system manipulation with explorer
· Some system configurations with control panel (clock, network etc.)
· System status checking. (disk and memory status etc.)

To execute the Xpanel again, double touch the

icon of desktop.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

VII

CIMON-Xpanel

Xpanel Designer
For details on Xpanel Designer, refer to the following manual
Xpanel Designer
· How to download the project data
· Xpanel Designer Installing and Running
· Xpanel Designer menu
· Project setup and download

7.1

How to download project data
IN THIS TOPIC :
Using USB port

Using Ethernet port Using removable memory

This manual explains download method for Xpanel project to Xpanel from Xpanel Designer. Xpanel supports
three ways for download project.
There are three different methods to download the Xpanel project data as summarized here:
· Using USB port (supported model : XT04CA, XT05MB, XT05SB, XT06CB, XT07CB)
· Using Ethernet port(supported model : Products that Ethernet port is supported in products of OS Version
2.00 or late)
· Using removable storage (supported model : Products that USB Host and SD slot are supported in
products of OS Version 2.00 or late)

Using USB port
This method downloads project using Xpanel’s USB Tool port.
Before download project, you must install Xpanel device driver and ActiveSync.

Install the
ActiveSync

Xpanel provides ActiveSync in the including CD but you can also download latest version from
Microsoft homepage www.microsoft.com
(
). After Installation, you need to restart your PC.

After rebooting, connect the Xpanel with PC by USB cable.
Install the
Xpanel Device
Dirver

Xpanel Designer

Select as like the following figure and click [Next] at the Hardware update wizard.

CIMON-Xpanel

Insert provided CD and click [Next].

Xpanel Designer

< XT05MA, XT05SA, XT06CA, XT10CA, XT12CA Driver setup screen>

< XT04CA/B, XT07CA/B Driver setup screen>
Click [finish]when the device was searched.
Installed normally, popup will be activated regardless of partnership.
Next time, it will recognize Xpanel automatically.

When the ‘Hardware Update Wizard’is not automatically displayed .
It happens sometime even though connected normally because of windows configurations.
In this case solve the problem with following directions. You may see “Invalid Device”in the
device manager.
Select ‘Invalid Device’and click mouse right button and choose [Update driver].

Select the tab as follows. [Changea

setting]->[System]->[Hardware]

CIMON-Xpanel

Select as like above the figure, then click [Next].

Xpanel Designer

Driver file path will be different according to the OS
version.
- If Xpanel models are XT04CA, XT05MB, XT05SB, XT06CB, XT07CB, this models are
select following path.
“Xpanel_Driver\
XT04_Sync_Drv” in the XpanelDesigner installed folder.
(Ex : C:\Program Files\Xpanel\Xpanel_Driver)
- If OS version is below 1.19, it will direct the path folder “Xpanel_Driver” in the
XpanelDesigner installed folder.
(Ex : C:\Program Files\Xpanel\Xpanel_Driver)
-

If OS version is above 1.19, it will direct the path folder “Drivers” in the ActiveSync

installed folder.
(Ex : C:\Program Files\Microsoft ActiveSync\Drivers)
[Windows CE USB device] will be registered in the Device Manager with the massage as setup
is complete.

Setup Link

Run XpanelDesigner. Load the project that will be downloaded. Select

[Online]->[Connection].

You can execute ‘Project download’ or ‘Project upload’ from ‘online’ menu of the
XpanelDesigner.
* Although you have several USB port in your PC, you can download project via only one of
them.

Using Ethernet port
If Xpanel is connected with PC by the Ethernet, you can download the project through Ethernet
without USB cable.
Connect PC with Xpanel to download the project using Ethernet port and configureIP address.

CIMON-Xpanel

* For using this method, it needs OS version above 2.00 and XpanelDesigner version 1.37 or

late.
Co Select [Start]->[Run] on the PC.
nfi
rm
the
IP
of
the
PC

Input “cmd”at the RUN window.

Input “ipconfig”
at the Command window.

Xpanel Designer

Ensure the Ethernet IP configurationin your PC.
Next, set Xpanel’s IP adaptable with PC.
Go to the Ethernet Loader.(If Xpanel is running, click the [Exit] button at the “Xpanel config” for
closing Xpanel project.) Confirm the Xpanel’s IP.

Touch the new setting
parts.

Delete contents by the key
‘BS’and input others to change
using number key.

Click the [Apply this new
setting].

CAUTION

* Directions for the configuration
- Subnet Mask and Gateway must be same with PC’s configuration.
- If Subnet Mask is configured (255.255.0.0),then IP Address must be inputted as like 172.16.
xxx.xxx and it doesn’t duplicated with other equipments.
- xxx means the number between 0-255.
For application the changed configurations, select the button [Apply the new setting].

If you want to confirm again click the button “x” or else click “OK” then it will go on.
Et Execute the XapnelDesigner. Open the project that will be downloaded and select [Setup Link] at
he
the on line menu.
rn
et
po

CIMON-Xpanel

rt
co
nfi
gu
rat
ion
at
the
Xp
an
el Select [Ethernet]and then click the button [Xpanel].
De
sig
ne
r

The list of Xpanel found is displayed.
Select Xpanel which will be downloadedthe project and then click [OK].

The information of selected Xpanel is expressed at the popup window.
To download project, select [Downloadto Xpanel (PC -> Xpanel)]in the online menu.

Using removable memory

Xpanel Designer

Xpanel supports the download function for removable memory.
If you use this function,you can update the Xpanel’s project without connectingit directly by using
like USB memory that is a kind of portable disc drive.
* This function is required Xpanel model that supports USB Host or SD card slot. You need also

OS version above 2.00 and XpanelDesigner
version 1.37 or late.
Copy project
to memory
card

Insert memory card to your PC.
Select [Copy Project To Removable Memory] in the Online menu of
XpanelDesigner.

Select or Input the path to download project.
Download path must be indicated root of disc. If you check the “Download the
Editing project”,it includes the data for upload.

If it is done, complete message box will be popped up.

Update
project from
removable
storage
to Xpanel.

Insert removable storage to Xpanel which has been downloaded project.

CIMON-Xpanel

Click project update button at the Ethernet Loader as shown up.
Then ‘Project Update’window is popped up and it will display updatable projects
after search.

If you want to search list again, click [Refresh] button.
Select the project will be downloaded at the list and click [Project Update] button.
* When project is updated, it will remove previous project first of all. Please attention.
When the project is downloading, [Project Update] button is not executed.
After it is completed download project, you can see the message “All file update : OK”
and [Project Update] button is executed again. Be careful, if you touch it while working,
it would be canceled.

7.2

Xpanel Designer Installing and Running
1. You can download XpanelDesigner v2.10 from internet homepage (http://www.kdtsys.com/
).

Xpanel Designer Suggestion

Xpanel Designer

If the past version of ‘Xpanel Designer’is installed, please remove it by ‘Program add/delete’.

7.3

Select window[Start] -> [Xpanel] -> [Xpanel Designer]

Xpanel Designer menu
File

Edit

Draw

IN THIS TOPIC :
View Online

File

button

descriptions

New Page

New Page is displayed.

Open

Open the file of Xpanel Designer.

Close the present page.

Arrange

Tools

CIMON-Xpanel

Close All Page

Close the present all page.

New Project

New Project is displayed.

Open Project

Open the presentProject.

Close Project

Close the presentProject.

Copy Project

Copy the presentProject.

Save

Save the present page.

Save As.

Save As. the present page.

Convert to Runtime Project

Convert to Runtime Project.

Frame Editor

Frame Editor is displayed.

Preview

Preview before it prints.

Print is displayed.

Edit

button

descriptions

Undo

It returns before working of the edit.

Redo

It cancel before working of the edit.

Cut

Cut the object selected.

Copy

The object selected is copied with the clipboard.

Paste

Paste the object copied.

Paste Special

Paste contents of clipboard.

Delate

Delate the object selected.

Select All

Select All object of page.

Find

Find text of page or project.

Replace

Replace text of page or picture, project.

Graphic File Paste

Graphic File Paste.

Insert Animation Bitmap

Insert Animation Bitmap.

Draw

button
Line

descriptions
Draw Line.

Xpanel Designer

Rectange

Draw Rectange.

Ellipse

Draw Ellipse.

Arc

Draw Arc.

Sector

Draw Sector.

Chord

Draw Chord.

Poly Line

Draw Poly Line. It is closed to draw by double clicking.

Polygon

Draw Polygon. It is closed to draw by double clicking.

Text

Insert Text.

Dynamic Tag

Insert Dynamic Tag.

Date Time

Insert Date Time.

String Value

Insert String Value.

Multi String

Insert Multi String.

Trend Graph

Insert Trend Graph.

DataLog

Insert Trend Graph.

Key Input Window

Insert Key Input Window.

Alarm Summary

Insert Alarm Summary.

Library

Library is displayed.

View

button

descriptions

Redraw

Redraw page.

Current Page Position To
Runtime

Current Page Position To Runtime.

Main Tool

Main Tool is displayed.

Status Tool

Status Tool is displayed.

Drawing Tool

Drawing Tool is displayed.

Color Tool

Color Tool is displayed.

Arrange Tool

Arrange Tool is displayed.

Font Tool

Font Tool is displayed.

Zoom In/Out

Zoom In/Outpage.

Online

CIMON-Xpanel

button

descriptions

Setup Link

You can select USB or Ethernet.

Download to Xpanel(PC>Xpanel)

Download project to Xpanel.

Upload From Xpanel
(Xpanel→ PC)

Upload project From Xpanel.

Make Executing Removable
Memory

Make Executing Removable Memory.

Copy Project To Removable
Memory

Copy Project To Removable Memory.

Stop Xpanel Application
Program

Stop Xpanel Application Program.

Run Xpanel Application
Program

Run Xpanel Application Program.

Upgrade Xpanel Application
Program

Upgrade Xpanel Application Program like a Xpanel Designer.

Arrange

button

descriptions

Group

Make a Group by the objects selected.

UnGroup

UnGroup.

ReGroup

ReGroup.

Bring To Front

Bring To Front.

Send To Back

Send To Back.

Arrange

Arrange the objects selected.

Rotate

Rotate the objects selected.

Flip

Flip the objects selected.

Point Change

Change shape of Point.

Enable Snap

Enable Snap is displayed.

Grid Config

Grid Configis displayed.

Make Symbol

Make Symbol the object selected.

Break Symbol

Break Symbol.

Tools

Xpanel Designer

button
Page Setup

Page Setup is displayed.

User Library Edit

Edit User Library.

Bitmap Edit

Edit the Bitmap selected.

Run Simulator

Run Simulator from project edited.

Run Simulator With Active
Page.

Run Simulator and open present page.

Project

Project windowis displayed.

Database

Database windowis displayed.

CIMON-Xpanel

7.4

descriptions

Setup

Setup page and frame of CIMON-Xpanel.

I/O Devices

I/O Devices are displayed.

Alarms

Alarms are displayed.

Security

Security is displayed.

Data Logging

Data Loggingis displayed.

Scripts

Scripts are displayed.

String Editor

String Editor is displayed.

Data Server

Data Server is displayed.

Recipe

Recipe is displayed.

Data Bridge

Data Bridge is displayed.

Animation Editor

Animation Editoris displayed.

Project setup and download
1. Select [File] -> [New Project]
2. Input "Project Name" and click - [Next>]

CIMON-Xpanel

3. Select "Type" of Xpanel andclick -[Ok] The
.
page suitable for Xpanel’
s resolution is made.

4. Check the condition of the page setup by double click.(or "Tools - page setup")

[Page Property]

Description

When the page is opened by pop up, the description is displayed on the page.

Popup Page

The position of the popup page in frame should be set of ‘None’.

Fixed BackGround

For a quick screen update, set unchangeable pictures as background.

Using 256 Bitmap

Using 256 Bitmap when it Convert to Runtime Project.

Xpanel Designer

Draw Changed
Object Only
Display Touch Area

The relationship of the object can be changed by the update order.
If you touch the object, the touch area is displayed.

Enable Multi Touch
Action
Sec. Level
Background

As the objects with the touch function are coincided, all touch actions are operated.
As numbers are higher and higher, Sec. Level is higher. The page higher than the
Sec. Level can’t be opened.
Change the Background of page.

[Page Position]

Edit Position

It is position and size of the present Designer.

Run Position

If it is designated as a pop-up page, the action will be available.

=> Copy

The run position is changed to the edit position.

Position In Frame

The position in frame should be set of ‘None’.

[Action]

CIMON-Xpanel

On Opening Page

Input the Action on opening page.

On Closing Page

Input the Action on closing page.

[Project Download]

1. Click - [Online] -> [Setup Link] Select the link type
Xpanel.
of
2. Click - [Online] ->
Download
[
to Xpanel(PC->Xpanel)
]
3. "Download to Xpanel(PC->Xpanel)"
is displayed.

4. Click the "Download The Editing Project" when you want to download.
The download is impossible when you download it without clicking.
5. Click the "Download The Font File" when you want to download font.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Xpanel Designer

When you download it without clicking, basic Font are Kor. Xpanel : 굴 림 and Eng. Xpanel : Tahoma.
6. Click - [Ok]

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

VIII

TAG Database

TAG Database
This manual explains TAG database, refer to the following manual.

See :
· Overview
· Database Window
· How to use Database
· Group TAG
· Digital Tag
· Analog Tag
· String Tag
· Database edit using EXCEL

8.1

Overview
The data processing of XPanel is based on the TAG database. It should be registered with the tag shown to
the monitor.
There are three TAG types : analog, digital and string. And XPanel also provides the group TAG.

Xpanel is repeatedly getting tags’value used in the monitor from the machinery. User can save tag's value
provided to the information of tags in the database.
So if the data is changed, the value of each tag will also be changed. When users handle buttons and input
values, following the setting information, it demands to write values in the job machinery. Additionally, as the
process to write values completes, the tag’s values are changed by reading the values from the machinery.

TAG

CIMON-Xpanel

Tag is a unit to save values in the database.
There are a ‘Real TAG’and a ‘Virtual TAG’.To read and write the values of real job machinery, the real tag
should be registered and the data of the real tag also should be changed.
All tags are divided into Digital tag, Analog tag and String TAG.
For the operation to handle its values and functions, tags should be registered and set the connection
between tags and values of the machinery.

Xpanel Project and Database

Database is edited by database edit program in Xpanel Designer.
There is no tag in database in new project, so you should add tags to the database.
After Saving edited database and sending the project with database to Xpanel, Xpanel makes the operation
based on the database.
In order to change the database, edit the database of Xpanel project properly and sent the changed project to
the Xpanel.

Xpanel Database Features

• Supported data types : Digital / Analog / String
• Supports virtual TAG.
• Provides the TAG group function. (Hierarchical TAG manipulation structure)
• Easy database exporting and importing.
• Provides the last value keeping option during power off. (virtual TAG)
• Analog TAG provides data scaling option.
8.2

Database Window
Following manual is Database Window.

TAG Database

Tree screen (1)

This is a tree screen to quickly find the position of tags like window search.
Registered tags are popped up to the tag screen. It gives users different Tag icon
referred to its types for a quick discernment and offers the scrollbar to let users know

Tag screen (2)

easily the all information of each tag.
It can choose different tags with “Ctrl” key and click first tag and last tag by Shift that
you want to choose all tags.

Database Toolbar
It makes users to quickly add and edit the tags by Mouse.

Point
User can move a division line between tree screen and tag screen by clicking the line, but there is a
minimum area of the tree screen and the tag screen, it is ignored to make smaller window than the
minimum window.

8.3

How to use Database

How to start
Database

· Click

[File] -> [Open Project] of Xpanel Designer menu.

· Click

[Tools] -> [Database] of Xpanel Designer menu.

· Click -Database icon
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

of Xpanel Designer Toolbar.

100

CIMON-Xpanel

· Click

[Edit] -> [New Tag] of Xpanel Designer menu.

· Click -New Tag icon

How to register
Tag

of Database Toolbar.

· Click Key.
· Double click the Database page or click the right button of mouse- > "New
Tag".
Insert - New Tag Name. -> Click - [Next].
· Select the Tag and Click

[Edit] -> [Edit Tag] of Xpanel Designer menu.

· Select the Tag and Click -Edit Tag icon

How to edit Tag

of Database Toolbar.

· Double click the Tag or click the right button of mouse on the tag - > "Edit
Tag".
Edit Tag -> Click - [Next].
· Select the Tag and Click

How to delete Tag

[Edit] -> [Delete] or [Cut] of Xpanel Designer menu.

· Select the Tag and Click -Cut icon

of Toolbar.

· Select the Tag and Click Key.
· Click the right button of mouse on the tag - > "Delete" or "Cut".

CAUTION - Name of TAG

There are some limitations and rules on giving a name of TAG as follows :

•

A TAG name should not be duplicated with one of already defined TAGs.

•

There is no difference between capital and small characters.
(Ex) ‘tagname’and ‘TAGNAME’ represent the same TAG.

•

Almost every symbol characters cannot be used in a TAG name. (only the under line character
can be used in a TAG name)
(Ex) (space) (tab) @ * / + - ! ~ “‘# $ % ^ & ( ) = | \{ } [ ] ; : ? > < . ,

•

Number character (0..9) cannot be used as the first character of TAG name.
(Ex) 123tagname (x), tagname123 (o)

•

The names of all script functions, keywords, predefined constants and user defined functions
cannot be used as a TAG name.
(Ex) PageOpen, Sleep, LogOn, goto, switch, return ....

•

If a TAG is located in a group, the final name of this TAG includes the group name. Each group
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

TAG Database

101

name should be separated by dot (.)
character from other group or TAG name.

(Ex) “Gr1.Gr2.Gr3.pointname”

Virtual vs. Real TAG

When the ‘Virtual Tag’radio button was chosen as following the first dialog box, the TAG does not need
the ‘I/O Device’and ‘I/O Address’
configuration items anymore. That means, the actual value of a virtual TAG is not acquired by
communication polling but initialized and
manipulated by the internal functions of XPanel such as script.
The initial value of a virtual TAG can be defined at the ‘Advance’ configuration tab as shown in the
second dialog box of following picture.
When the XPanel is powered and starts its operation, the defined value is applied to the TAG’s initial
value. Other configuration
items in ‘Advance’configurationtab have no meanings in case of virtual TAG.

102

CIMON-Xpanel

The initial value configurationis ignored in case of a real TAG. As described in previous topic,
XPanel polls the data
o f real TAG through communication.XPanel provides several functions for manipulating data
from device. As shown in the
above second dialog box, analog data scaling is one of those functions.The functions provided
are described more
precisely in the following sections.

Basic TAG Configuration

Digital, analog and string TAGs have same basic configuration items. Those items are configured in
‘General’tab as shown in
the following picture. The items in ‘Advanced’ configurationtab are different between each TAG type.
Those items are explained in the following sections describing each TAG type. In this section, the
configuration items common
to all TAG types are explained.

Choose one of two TAG types. As
Real Tag described in the previous section, the real
TAG has an actual address of device and
/
its value is updated via communication.
Virtual
The virtual TAG has no address, and its
Tag
value is calculated and updated by
internal functions such as script.

I/O
Device

Give the name of external device and
station to which the TAG belongs. The
device name and station name should be
distinguished by a dot (.) character as
following format.

DeviceName.

TAG Database

103

StationName
Notice that this field has meaning only if
TAG type is a real TAG.

I/O
Address

Give the real point address of the TAG.
The address format is dependent on the
device type. Refer to the device driver
manual of connected device for more
information such as supported address
range, notation and data type etc.
Notice that this field has meaning only if
TAG type is a real TAG.

Option :
Save
Last
Status
When
Closing

This option makes the XPanel keep the
last value in flash memory when powered
off. When the power is supplied again,
XPanel restores the last value in flash
memory.
Notice that this field has meaning only if
TAG type is a virtual TAG.

a TAG
Name of a TAG

8.4

Group TAG
When users input lots of tags at one screen, it is inefficient under its operation.
So, use a group tag to manage relative tags to make the tree structure similar with the directory in computer.
There is the purpose to make a group of various tags for better management of the project.

Basic Setup

104

8.5

CIMON-Xpanel

Name

Insert a Name of Tag. (Referto the "CAUTION - Name of Tag".)

Type

Select - Type of Tag
- > "Group"

Des.

Input - Reference matter.

Digital TAG
XPanel provides the digital TAG type which represents a bit signal (1 or 0). All non-zerovalues are treated
as 1 in digital TAG.

Initial Value

Give the initial value of virtual TAG. When the XPanel is started up, the virtual TAG is initialized with
designated value.
Notice that this field has meaning only if TAG type virtual
is a TAG. The real TAG ignores initial value
setting.

8.6

Analog TAG
XPanel accepts various data types from devices as an analog TAG.
All those device data types are converted to the 64 bits floating point values in XPanel.

TAG Database

105

Initial Value

Give the initial value of virtual TAG. When the XPanel is started up, the virtual TAG is initialized with
designated value.
Notice that this field has meaning only if TAG type is a virtual TAG. The real TAG ignores initial value
setting.

Data Type

Choose one of following data types.
Type

Description

Value Range

INT8

Signed 8 bits integer

128 - 127

INT16

Signed 16 bits integer

32768 - 32767

INT32

Signed 32 bits integer

-2147483648 - 2147483647

UINT8

Unsigned 8 bits integer

0 - 255

UINT16

Unsigned 16 bits integer

0 - 65535

UINT32

Unsigned 32 bits integer

0 - 4294967295

BCD8

Signed 8 bits BCD

79 - 79

BCD16

Signed 16 bits BCD

7999 - 7999

BCD32

Signed 32 bits BCD

79999999 - 79999999

UBCD8

Unsigned 8 bits BCD

0 - 99

UBCD16

Unsigned 16 bits BCD

0 - 9999

UBCD32

Unsigned 32 bits BCD

0- 99999999

Float

32 bits real data

-3.40282e+038 - 3.40282e+038

This configuration represents the data type of device memory designated by the address defined in
‘General’ configurationtab
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

106

CIMON-Xpanel

and is effective only on the real TAG. The virtual TAG ignores this configurationand manipulates all TAG
data as a 64 bit real number.

Scale / Range of Engineering Data (Veng) / Range of Raw Data (Vraw)

XPanel provides two different methods to calculate a scaled engineering data. If this option is checked,
XPanel performs ‘Scale/Offset’
method.
[ Scale / Offset Method ]
The ‘Scale/Offset’
method uses following formula for calculating the engineering value.

Veng = Vraw x Scale + Offset

•V
•V

raw

: Read data from device. Not processed, raw value from device.

eng

: Engineering data. (The data which will be displayed in XPanel’s screen)

(Example 1)
If an analog TAG was configuredas following picture, and the Vraw from device is 32768,

then, Veng = (32768 x 0.1)

3276.8 = 3276.8

3276.8 = 0

As shown in above example, the engineering data configurations(Min Value and Max Value) do not
affect the raw value processing. But, in case of proportional method (if the ‘Scale’option was
not checked),The engineering data Min/Max value configurationsare important factors.
[ Proportional Method ]

The ‘ProportionalMethod’process the raw value twice by using following formulas :

TAG Database

Scale = (Veng_max Veng_min ) / (Vraw_max
Offset = Veng_min Vraw_min

107

Vraw_min )

Veng = Vraw x Scale + Offset
u
u
u
u

Vraw : Read data from device. Not processed,raw value from device.
Veng : Engineering data. (The data which will be displayed in XPanel’s screen)
Veng_max , Veng_min : Engineering data range configurations
Vraw_max , Vraw_min : Raw data range configurations

First, it calculates the scale and offset values from min/max configurations.
The calculated scale and offset values are applied to the same formula as ‘Scale/Offset Method’for
acquiring the final engineering value.

(Example 2)
If an analog TAG was configuredas following picture, and the Vraw from device is 32768,

then,
Scale = (3276.7- (-3276.8))/ (65535

0) = 0.1

Offset = (-3276.8) 0 = -3276.8
Veng = (32768 x 0.1)

3276.8 = 3276.8

3276.8 = 0

Note that above two examples gave the same result.

8.7

String TAG
The string TAG hold a string data. The maximum string length the string TAG can hold is 80 characters. In
order to use as a real TAG,
please refer to the manual of device driver. Most device drivers do not support real string TAG type.

108

CIMON-Xpanel

Length of String

Give the maximum possible length of string. It can be up to 80 characters.
This configurationhas meaning only on real TAG.
The device driver polls this size of continuous buffer at every period for reading a string data.

Initial Value

Give the initial value of virtual TAG. The maximum length of initial string is restricted to 22 characters.
When the XPanel is started up, the virtual TAG is initialized with designated value.
Notice that this field has meaning only if TAG type is a virtual TAG. The real TAG ignores initial value
setting.

8.8

Database edit using EXCEL
This manual provides the function for easy edit via copy/paste as lots of tags are edited.

Paste (Database - > EXCEL)

Choose the area for copy at the database.

TAG Database

109

Click - [Edit]->[Copy], or copyit to the clipboard by .
Open- "EXCEL" file. Click - [Edit]
->[paste], orpaste it to the clipboard by .

EXCEL Edit

Referring to the table, edit the rows and columns opposed to the characters.
Columns
Number

Digital tag

Analog tag
Name of Tag

String TAG

Name of Tag

Type of Tag(1) Type of Tag(2)

Type of Tag(3)

Des.

Real/Virtual
TAG

Real/Virtual TAG

I/O Device

I/O Address

initial value

None

Explanation

Name of Tag

Real TAG = 1, Virtual TAG = 0

110

CIMON-Xpanel

None

Type of data
0 : INT8
1 : INT16
2 : INT32
3 : UINT8
4 : UINT16
5 : UINT32
6 : BCD8
7 : BCD16
8 : BCD32
9 : UBCD8
10 : UBCD16
11 : UBCD32
12 : Float

None

Scale application

None

Internal data-Min

None

Internal data-Max

None

Real data-Min

None

Scale application- >Scale value

None

Real data-Max

None

Scale application- >Offset value

String length

Scale/Offset=1,Max/Min = 0

Paste (EXCEL - > Database)

Choose the area for copy at the EXCEL.

Click - [Edit] -> [Copy], or copy it to the clipboard by

Open- "Database" file. Click - [Edit] -> [paste], or paste it to the clipboard by .

TAG Database

111

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

I/O Device

113

I/O Device
Xpanel provides he
t I / O device to communicate with serial communication(RS232/422/485) and Ethernet
communication(TCP/UDP).
For details on I/O Device setting, refer to the following manual
See :
· I/O Device Basic
· I/O Device Ethernet
· I/O Device Serial

9.1

I/O Device Basic
I/O Device Configuration

For creating a new device, use the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’
Following picture shows the first step of
creating a new device.

Edit

New Device

Select the existing device by clicking the button,the dialog box of the device type is
displayed.
Select the new device. "I / O device type selection" dialog box is displayed.

Delete

Delete the existing devices.

Close the dialog box.

114

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Type Selection

Device Name

Input the name of the device is able to distinguish.

Device Type

Select the Device Type.

Cancel

9.2

Register the new device. "Ethernet / Serial Device Communication Settings" dialog box
is displayed.
Cancel the dialog box.

I/O Device Ethernet
Communication Port Setup

The setting method forthe communication parameters of the system (Xpanel)

I/O Device

Device Type

Select the I / O device Type.

Protocol

Select from the UDP and TCP.

Time Out

Set the Time Out.

Retry No.

Specify the Retry No. when communication error occurs

Dual line

Set the network dual line

Station Setup

The setting method forthe communication parameters of the I / O Device (PLC)

115

116

CIMON-Xpanel

Add Station

I/O Device

Station Name

Input the name of the station is able to distinguish.

Station Type

select the CPU type of PLC.

Network ID

It is used as parameters to distinguish by the I / O devices.

IP Address

Input the basic IP address of PLC.

Socket Port No.

Input the Socket Port No.of PLC

16Bit Data Swap

This field has no meaning in this driver.

32Bit Data Swap

This field has no meaning in this driver.

117

Comm, Error Message
PopUp
FixedXPANELSocket
Port

XPANELSocketPortNo.

When Communication error occurs, the message window is displayed.
If you select this option, XPanel use only one port to connect PLC defined by
‘Xpanel Socket Port No.’If it is not, Xpanel will change the port no. when it
occurs communication error.
If you want to use"Fixed XPANEL Socket Port No.Input XPANEL Socket Port
No.

9.3

I/O Device Serial
Communication Port Setup

The setting method forthe communication parameters of the system(Xpanel)

118

CIMON-Xpanel

Device Type

Select the I / O device Type.

Protocol

Select from theCOM1and COM2.

Baud Rate

Select the data baud rate
.

Parity

Select the Type ofParity Bit

Data Bits

Select the Data Bit.

Stop Bit(S)

Select the Stop Bit.

RTS/CTS

Select the control method of RTS / CTS

Comm. Type

Select the RS232C/422/485 communication type.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

I/O Device

Using
Transmission

Set "Using Transmission Delay" when you want to send the frame later.

Delay

Station Setup

The setting method forthe communication parameters of the I / O Device (PLC)

119

120

CIMON-Xpanel

Add Station

The new station is registered. Click- Add Station.
The [s tation] is displayed.

Station Name

Input the name of the station is able to distinguish.

Station Type

Select the CPU type of PLC.

Network ID

It is used as parameters to distinguish by the I / O devices.

Station No.

Input the basic IP address of PLC.

16Bit Data Swap

This field has no meaning in this driver.

32Bit Data Swap

This field has no meaning in this driver.

Using
CheckSum

Using CheckSum of the protocol

Comm, Error
Message Pop Up

When Communication error occurs, the message window is displayed.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

122

CIMON-Xpanel

Alarm
In case the value of a specific tag is over a set value, an alarm is used to inform the event.
To use this function, a tag should be set up as an alarm tag among optional functions when it is
registered to a database.
There are various kinds of events registered to Alarm Item.
· Alarm Occur Event : It is operated one time when tag’s value is reaching the alarm
condition
· Alarm Release Event : It is operated one time when tag’s value is canceled from the
warning condition.
· Stamp Event : Without the warning, users register it via the alarm summary voluntarily.
· Alarm Ack. : It changes the characters of events by the Ack. and the display color of the
alarm summery event that isn’t registered to another event.

See :
· Alarm Group
· Alarm Configuration
· Alarm Summary

10.1

Alarm Group
In the area of the registered alarm, there are ten groups ready that have no relationship between groups.
If there is an Event(Alarm On/Off) at the registered alarm, it is saved to the Alarm List.
Alarm List can save maximum 200 and check it at the Alarm Summery Object in the page.
The Alarm Summery expresses only the Alarm List of specified group, so register the Alarms to the same
group for the easy checking.

Alarm

< Alarm Action >

10.2

Alarm Configuration
Set or Edit - "Alarm"
Click - [Tools] -> [Alarms] of Xpanel Designer or Alarms iconof Xpanel Designer Toolbar.

123

124

CIMON-Xpanel

Alarm Group

Select - > Alarm Group.

Group Desc.

Input description of selected group.

Using String Table Using string table in the Alarm Configuration.It can specify a index of string table by
checking.
String Group No.

It can specify by checking of "Using string table".

Save Alarm

When Xpanel power On/Off, alarm items are saved. Max.200 items are saved.

Add

Select a Alarm Group. Click->

Edit

Select a Alarm. Click-> Edit]
[

Delete

Select a Alarm. Click-> Delete]
[

Move Up

Move Down

[Add]

Selected Alarm is moved up. Select a Alarm. Click
-> Move
[
Up]
The alarm action and registered order are completely unrelated.
Selected Alarm is moved down. Select a Alarm. Click
-> Move
[
Down]
The alarm action and registered order are completely unrelated.

Alarm Add, Edit

1. Select a Alarm Group.
2. Click -> [Add]

Alarm

3. Input - Tag Name, or click the Tag in the Database list by

125

4. Select a Condition( >, =, <).
> : Tag’s value is more than competitive Value.
= : Tag’s value is equal to competitive Value.
< : Tag’s value is Less than competitive Value.
5. Input

a competitive Value connected with Alarm condition.

6. Input - Alarm description It is displayed in the Alarm Summary Description.
·

When "Using string table" is checked in Alarm Group, "Using string table" is also displayed in the Alarm
Configuration. It can specify a index of string table by checking.

It can specify a index of string table by checking "Using string table".

7. Select - Alarm On Action . Alarm On career is saved only by checking .

126

CIMON-Xpanel

Alarm On Action

Open Page
The designated page is opened by the Command when the Alarm On.
Input - Name of page in Action Parameter, or click

and choose a page only.

If you want to choose several pages, choose the Command and use - PageOpen("Name of page").

When warning is registered in the way above, it would be in the condition of the Alarm On when the value
of TEST_ANA00(T ag) is over 0.
At first, register the Alarm On event to the alarm list and then open the page file(PAGE1) on the monitor.
In the Alarm On, if tag’s value is less than or equal to 0, register the alarm release event to the alarm list
and release the condition of the Alarm On.

Alarm

127

Command
Set up the designated action by the Command when Alarm On.
Input - Command in Action Parameter, refer to Script for the content of the command.

When warning is registered in the way above, it would be in the condition of the Alarm On when the value
of TEST_ANA00(Tag) is 0.
At first, register the Alarm On event to the alarm list and then practice the specified command.
Change the value of TEST_ANA140(Tag) to 0. And increase the value of TEST_ANA130(Tag) as 1 and
open the page file("PAGE1") on the monitor.

Alarm Off Action
At the alarm release, practice a command registered to the alarm release action.
If there is no input content, no action will happen.

Alarm Ack. Action
At the alarm summary, practice a command registered to the alarm ack. action.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

128

CIMON-Xpanel

If there is no input content, no action will happen.

Apply Scroll Message
Register/Remove the alarm content at the automatic scroll massage window when the Alarm On.
It should be check the "Using Scroll Messages" of

[Tools]->[CIMON-XPANEL Setup].

Refer to Scroll Message of help manual.

10.3

Alarm Summary
Alarm Summary is an object to display the alarm occur/release list to the page.

Click - [Draw] -> [Alarm Summary] of Xpanel Designer or Alarm Summary iconof Xpanel Designer
Toolbar.
Click - Page for Alarm Summary

Alarm

Alarm Group

Select - Alarm Group

Background

Select - Background of Alarm Summary

Ack

Select - Color of Alarm Ack

Occur

Select - Color of Alarm Occur

Release

Select - Color of Alarm Release

129

Select - Type of alarm event in Alarm Summary

Alarm Status

· Occur : Alarm Occur Event isdisplayed.
· Release : Alarm Release Event isdisplayed.
· Acked : Acked Alarm Event isdisplayed.
· Display Active Alarm Only : Selected Alarm Occur Event only
is
displayed.
Select - Display Items of Alarm Summary
· Buttons : Control Buttons is
displayed on the monitor.
· Time : Time of Alarm Occur isdisplayed on the monitor.

Display Items

· Device Name : Device Name of Alarm Occur displayed
is
on the monitor.
· Value : Value of Alarm Occur isdisplayed on the monitor.
· Alarm Status : Alarm Status isdisplayed on the monitor.
· Alarm Description : Alarm Description ofregistered tagis displayed.
· Column Header : Column Header of Alarm Summary displayed.
is

Numbers
Action

Setup the event numbersto Alarm Summary.
· Run Specified Active On Double Click : it can calls to run 'Alarm Ack Action' by
double clicking alarm career of alarm summary screen.

Alarm Summary Screen

130

CIMON-Xpanel

Stop
Stamp
Ack

Setup
Config

A real-time update of the Alarm summary is stopped.The update career of the alarm
summary is only stopped.
Register an unrelated Stamp event with the state of alarm in the alarm career.
Change the chosen events into the condition of the Alarm Ack. There is a change of
the Alarm Ack Color.
"Alarm Summary" is displayed on the monitor.it can change the type of alarm event
and alarm group.
"Xpanel Configuration" isdisplayed on the monitor.

Font Changing of Alarm Summary
· Select - Object of Alarm Summary to change Font
· Click - [View] -> [Font Tool] of Xpanel Designer

· Change - Font Size or Display Type in Font Tool.

Make a Control Button of Alarm List Using Key Type.
· Select - Object to use by Button
· Double click - Object."Object Config" is displayed.
· Click - [Touch] -> [Key Input] of Action

Alarm

131

· Select - Key Type. Click - [Ok]
· Refer to the Key Type.

Button Action

Key Type

Stop/Run

Tab

Stamp

Insert

Ack

Space

Setup

Home

Move Up

Move Down

Down

Remove selection list

Delete

Initialization of List

End

CAUTION
* When two more alarm summaries are registered or the trend monitoring, the data logger, and the key
input window object are registered together, it is possible that the object you don’
t want is

operated, so touch and choose the object to control before handling.
* In case of the Alarm Group setting to save to the file, even if you delete the list via 'selection list
Delete'/'initialization of List', the Alarm List is restored when inputting the power.

Print out the alarm list
Print out the alarm list using AlarmPrint()

[Ex] AlarmPrint(1,0,0,20,_ALMPRT_ALL_);

The most recent alarm list of group 1 will be printed with font size 10. Refer to the Script manual.

Print out the alarm list as CSV file
Print out the alarm list usingAlarmCSVWr()

[Ex] AlarmCSVWr( 1, ”AlarmLog”, 0, _ALMPRT_ALL_, 0);
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

132

CIMON-Xpanel

The most recent alarm list of group 1 will be printed with
AlarmLog_XXXXXXXXXXX.CSV File . Refer to the
Script manual.

Clear Alarm List

ClearAlarmLog()
Clear Alarm List in the designated alarm group using
In case of the Alarm Group setting to save to the file, the Alarm List is restored when inputting the power.
The content of the warning summery page is updated if the page is opened again.

[Ex] ClearAlarmLog(1);

All alarm list of alarm group 1 will be cleared. Refer to the
Script manual.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

134

CIMON-Xpanel

Graphic Page Editor
The graphic page editor of XpanelDesigner provides easy and simple screen editing environment as followings.
· Provides easy and simple object based editing environment
· Provides various wizard library objects : ready to use button, lamp and switch objects
· Object window makes it possible to explore all the graphic objects with a tree view list.
· Provides the graphic page security system.
· Provides various trend functions.
· Various graphic processing speed optimization options.

The screen size of graphic page can be induced from the model code. The table below lists the screen size of
each model.

Model

Screen Size

Color Specification

XT04C

480 x 272

TFT, 160,000 Colors

XT05M

320 x 240

Mono STN, Black and White, 16 Grays

XT05S

320 x 240

CSTN, 256 Colors

XT06C

640 x 480

TFT, 65,535 Colors

XT07C

800 x 480

TFT, 65,535 Colors

XT10C

800 x 600

TFT, 65,535 Colors

XT12C

800 x 600

TFT, 65,535 Colors

When a new project is created, one of the model codes above should be specified via following dialog box.
According to this configuration,
the XpanelDesigner decides the page size when a new page file is created.

Graphic Page Editor

135

데이터베이스 설명
· Page Properties
· Frame Editor
· Library
· Object Properties

11.1

Page Properties
Every graphic page has its properties such as background color, position in screen and so on.
Those properties are configured via ‘
Page Properties’dialog box.
This dialog box can be opened by clicking the right button and “Page Setup”menu as shown in following picture.

Page Property

136

CIMON-Xpanel

Description

Fill in the description of current graphic page.
If this option was checked, the page will be opened in front of previous screen page at

Popup Page

runtime. Otherwise, without this option checking, the previous opened page will be
replaced with this page.
This option provides faster graphic processing speed by maintaining another copy of
background image in display memory. All the control-less objects are included in this
background image, and only the controlled objects will be redrawn at every data
updates in run time. If this option was not checked, all the objects would be redrawn at

Fixed
Background

every new data updates in runtime. This will give a big burden to Xpanel performance if
there are many graphic objects in page.
However, this option has a side-effect. All objects in Xpanel graphic page have their
depth level. Which object will be drawn first at runtime is decided by the depth level.
But, this option can change the depth levels between the objects with and without
control. This phenomenon can be easily shown at run time, especially for the
overlapped objects.
Xpanel supports 64K colored bitmap objects. But, these objects consume so much

Using 256

memory and disk space. This option converts the 64K colored bitmap to 256 colored

Bitmap

automatically. It is very useful when there is not enough disk space or memory. And
also it can be helpful to increase the graphic processing speed at run time.
This option can be used when there is need to get faster graphic processing speed at

Draw Changed

run time. When this option was checked, only the object whose value or status was

Object Only

changed will be redrawn.
However, this option has a side-effect too. When a controlled object was redrawn, the

Graphic Page Editor

137

depth level of the object will be ignored. The controlled object whose status was
changed will be the top most depth and other overlapping objects will not be redrawn.
This phenomenon can be easily shown at run time, especially between the overlapped
controlled objects.
Display Touch
Area

This option can be used to show touch area. When this option was checked, draw
rectangle on touch area at screen touch.

Enable
This option can be used when there is need to run many touch action at one time.
Multi Touch When this option was checked, all touch actions that was wrapt over will be run at
screen touch.
Action
A graphic page can be assigned a security level between 0 and 10. Only the user who
Sec. Level

has the same or higher security level can open and see the graphic page. (zero is the
lowest security level) Please refer to the section of ‘
Security’for more information about
security system.

Background

Designate a background color of this page.

NOTE
To avoid the side effects of “Fixed Background”and “Draw Changed Object Only” options, please
follow the recommendations listed below.
· Do not overlap two or more animated objects.
· Put the animated object to the up-most position in the list of objects, if possible.
· When the “Draw Changed Object Only”option was checked, it is strongly recommended to check the
“Fixed Background”option together.

Page Position

138

CIMON-Xpanel

'Edit Position'

The new position and screen size can be specified via these fields. After fill in each

Group

position and size of ‘
Edit Position’group, the ‘
Copy’button applies the new settings to
the actual position.

'Run Position'

This group presents the current screen position and size.

Group

The ‘
Copy’button will change these values to the new configuration as specified in ‘
Edit
Position’group.

Position In

If current editing page is a element of a frame, specify the actual position in frame.

Frame

One of four possible positions can be chosen. The frame will be described more
precisely in next section.

Action

Graphic Page Editor

On Open Page This option can be used when there is need to run one action at page open.
On
Page

11.2

Closing This option can be used when there is need to run one action at page Close.

Frame Editor

139

140

CIMON-Xpanel

The frame function is a means to display multiple pages at the same time in a screen.
This function removes repeated and boring tasks from the graphic page designing. The frame editor is
activated through the menu ‘
File’
-‘
Frame Editor’
.
XPanelDesigner provides 12 styles of predefined multiple page layouts as shown in the above picture.
In this dialog box, the frame can be created, modified and deleted from current project. A frame includes
several pages for its layout elements.
The size and initial pages for each layout element are configured in this dialog box.
Note that the ‘
Position in Frame’property of each initial page should be matched with the assigned page
number (Page1 .. Page4).

Frame as a starting page

The frame file (.FRX) can be chosen as a starting page as shown in the above picture.

Open a new frame with touch

Following example picture shows the situation of giving a touch operation to a graphic object.
According to this example, touch action is given as “Open Page”and the frame name is given as a ‘
Page
Name’
. This example will work without any problem.
The touch operation processor can distinguish the name of page and frame.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Graphic Page Editor

141

Open a new frame with command expression

The “FrameOpen()”function is provided for opening a new frame. Refer to the ‘
Script’section for more
information about ‘
FrameOpen()’function.

142

CIMON-Xpanel

Replace a page in frame

When a frame is opened, the pages opened with the frame are replaced by ”PageOpen()”function.
Refer to the ‘
Script’section for more information about the ‘
PageOpen()’function.

Every page is given a ‘
Position in Frame’property as shown in the above configuration dialog box. When a

Graphic Page Editor

143

page is
opened by ‘
PageOpen()’function or other ways, this property decides the page which will be replaced by the
new one.
The page which has the same position number with the new page designated in ‘
PageOpen()’function is
replaced.
However, if the new page has no position number (set as ‘
None’
), the entire frame will be closed and only
the new page
will be opened and displayed in the screen.

Frame closing conditions

A frame is closed at following conditions.

1) When a page without position number is opened.
FrameOpen()’
.
2) When other new frame is opened by touch operation or function such as ‘

11.3

Library
In XpanelDesigner, there are two different types of library objects.
One is called ‘
Wizard Object’and the other is ‘
Library Object’
. The difference between these two types of
objects is whether the object properties are given or not.
The wizard objects are marked with “(w)”string in front of their names as shown in the following picture.

144

CIMON-Xpanel

SEE :
· Wizard Object
· User Library

11.3.1 Wizard Object
Each wizard object has its own configuration dialog box. In this section, all the configuration dialog boxes of
wizards are explained.

IN THIS TOPIC :
BitLamp

BitSwitch2

Command

Color

TagWrite

HoriSize

TagVal

DataEntry

VertSize

BitSwitch1

MomentWrite

Keyinput

KeyInput2
OpenPage
ClosePage

BitLamp

Graphic Page Editor

145

The BitLamp wizard object
shows two different shapes at
runtime according to the state
of assigned digital TAG. The
texts and their colors are
configurable.

Color

The ‘
Color’wizard object provides
two different display colors
according to the value of a
specified TAG. The TAG can be an
analog TAG as well as a digital
TAG.

TagVal

146

CIMON-Xpanel

The ‘
TagVal’wizard object
displays the value of specified
TAG. The colors of background
and value text are kept as
option. One of six available
formats can be chosen as display
format. All the available formats
are explained in the following
table.

Format

Description
Display format will be automatically decided according to the data type of TAG.

????

If the data type of TAG is ‘
Float’
, then ‘
####.0000’format will be applied automatically.
Otherwise, ‘
# # # #’format is applied.

####

Decimal integer value display format or string tag value.

####.0

Floating point value display format with 1 significant digit.

####.00

Floating point value display format with 2 significant digits.

####.000

Floating point value display format with 3 significant digits.

####.0000

Floating point value display format with 4 significant digits.

BitSwitch1

Graphic Page Editor

147

The BitSwitch1 wizard object
shows two different shapes at
runtime according to the state of
assigned digital TAG. And also,
this object provides touch
operation controlling function.
When this object is touched at
runtime, the state specified
digital TAG will be changed via
one of three control types (set,
reset or toggle).
If the ‘
Enable Condition’check
box is checked, a conditional
expression can be declared. The
evaluated value of this
expression enables or disables
the controlling function. If the
evaluated value is false, then the
controlling function will be
disabled. For more information
about conditional expression,
refer to the section of ‘
Script’
.

BitSwitch2

The BitSwitch2 wizard object shows two different shapes at runtime according to the state of assigned
digital TAG.
And also, this object provides touch operation controlling function. When this object is touched at runtime,
the state specified digital TAG will be toggled.
There are two differences between BitSwitch1 and BitSwitch2 wizard object. The BitSwitch2 object provides
text configuration function,
but it allows only one type of TAG control, toggling.

148

CIMON-Xpanel

If the ‘
Enable Condition’
check box is checked, a
conditional expression can be
declared. The evaluated value of
this expression enables or
disables the controlling function.
If the evaluated value is false,
then the controlling function will
be disabled. For more
information about conditional
expression, refer to the section
of ‘
Script’
.

TagWrite

Graphic Page Editor

149

The ‘
TagWrite’wizard object
provides the function of writing a
predefined value to a TAG. When
the object is touched by operator,
the predefined value will be written
to the specified TAG. If the
Condition’check box was checked
‘
and a conditional expression was
given, this function will be
controlled by this expression. If the
evaluated logic is false, then the
TAG writing function will not work
even if this object is touched by
operator. For more information
about conditional expression, refer
to the section of ‘
Script’
.

DataEntry

150

CIMON-Xpanel

The ‘
DataEntry’wizard object
provides a touch button
function which gets number
input from operator. Input
number will be applied to the
specified TAG. And also, input
range checking function
applicable to the input value.

Following three sample pictures show the available keypad window style. The size of keypad window is
different between each window style.

Window Style 1

Window Style 2

Window Style 3

Graphic Page Editor

151

MomentWrite

The ‘
MomentWrite’wizard object
provides a momentary push button
function. When the button is
pushed, a value specified as ‘
When
Pushed’is written to the device
memory. And next, when the
button is released, another value
specified as ‘
When Released’is
written to the device memory
again.
This object can be controlled by a
logical value from conditional
expression, by checking the
Enable Condition’check box. If the
‘
calculated logic of conditional
expression is false, this object does
not issue the control values even if
it was touched by operator. Refer
to the section of ‘
Script’for more
information about the conditional
expression.

Command

152

CIMON-Xpanel

The ‘
Command’wizard runs the programmed
command script when it was touched by operator.
This function can be filtered by the conditional
expression. The conditional expression can be
declared by checking the ‘
Enable Condition’
check box. If the evaluated value of this
conditional expression is false, then the command
script will not be executed. For more information
about the command script and conditional
expression, refer to the section of ‘
Script’
.

HoriSize

The ‘
HoriSize’wizard object
provides a variable sized bar
function (bar graph). This object
is a horizontal bar styled graph,
and one of three origin (base)
position can be chosen (leftmost,
middle, rightmost).

VertSize

Graphic Page Editor

153

The ‘
VertSize’wizard object
provides a variable sized bar
function (bar graph). This object
is a vertical bar styled graph, and
one of three origin (base)
position can be chosen (bottom
side, middle, top side).

KeyInput

The ‘
KeyInput’wizard object emulates
keyboard input when the object is
touched by operator. It is useful when
KeyInput’wizard object accompanies
‘
other objects which need keyboard
inputs, such as ‘
Trend Graph’
,‘
DataLog’
,
Alarm Summary’and ‘
Key Input
‘
Window’
.
This object can be controlled by a logical
value from conditional expression, by
checking the ‘
Enable Condition’check
box. If the calculated logic of conditional
expression is false, this object does not
issue the keyboard input code even if it
was touched by operator. Refer to the
section of ‘
Script’for more information
about the conditional expression.

154

CIMON-Xpanel

KeyInput2

The ‘
KeyInput2’wizard object emulates
keyboard input when the object is
touched by operator. This object is an
enhanced version of ‘
KeyInput’wizard
object. ‘
KeyInput2’wizard object displays
the symbol character of specified key
code and provides the selectable color
option. It is useful when ‘
KeyInput2’
wizard object accompanies other objects
which need keyboard inputs, such as
Trend Graph’
,‘
DataLog’
,‘
Alarm
‘
Summary’and ‘
Key Input Window’
.
This object can be controlled by a logical
value from conditional expression, by
checking the ‘
Enable Condition’check
box. If the calculated logic of conditional
expression is false, this object does not
issue the keyboard input code even if it
was touched by operator. Refer to the
section of ‘
Script’for more information
about the conditional expression.

OpenPage

The ‘
OpenPage’wizard object provides the opening function of a screen page when it is touched by
operator.
The name of page to be opened by this object should be specified.

Graphic Page Editor

155

If the ‘
Condition’check box is
checked, a conditional expression
can be declared. The evaluated logic
of this expression at runtime enables
or disables the function of this
object. If the evaluated logic is false,
then page opening function will not
work even if this object is touched by
operator. For more information about
conditional expression, refer to the
section of ‘
Script’
.

ClosePage

The ‘
ClosePage’wizard object
provides the screen page closing
function when it is touched by
operator. The name of page to be
closed by this object should be
specified.
If the ‘
Condition’check box is
checked, a conditional expression
can be declared. The evaluated value
of this expression at runtime enables
or disables the function of this
object. If the evaluated value is false,
then page closing function will not
work even if this object is touched by
operator. For more information about
conditional expression, refer to the
section of ‘
Script’
.

11.3.2 User Library
Besides the provided library objects, user created graphic objects can be registered in the library.

156

CIMON-Xpanel

Add a New Object to Library

1. Create a graphic object. And make the object as selected state as shown in the example below.

Tools’
-‘
User Library Edit’
.
2. Open the library manipulating window. Follow the menu ‘

3.Give a group name and object name of created object. If the group name is not registered before, a new
group with given name will be created automatically.
If the object name is the same name with existing object in library, this library object will
be replaced with the new one.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Graphic Page Editor

Add’button of above dialog box will register the new object to library.
4. The ‘
Open the library window and check the result as shown in the following picture.

Delete an Object from Library

157

158

CIMON-Xpanel

Tools’
-‘
User Library Edit’menu)
1. Open the library manipulating window without any object selection. (‘
Then, the library manipulating window will be shown with ‘
Delete’button as shown in the following
example.

Group Name’and ‘
Object Name’combo box.
2. The object to be deleted can be found by using the ‘
If the object was found, press the ‘
Delete’button to remove the object from library.

11.4

Object Properties
XPanel page is a dynamic screen based on graphic objects. Every graphic object in page has its own properties.
Some of properties are static properties such as color, line style, line width and so on.
And some other properties are dynamic properties such as animation style, control type etc.
XPanelDesigner provides a integrated configuration window for setting up such kind of various properties of
graphic objects.
A configuration window example is presented below.

Graphic Page Editor

See
Style

V-Move

Visble

H-Move

Blink

Color

V-Size

Touch

H-Size

Entry Data

159

160

CIMON-Xpanel

11.4.1 Style

All the static graphic properties can be configured in this page. Object’
s position, size, color, fill pattern, fill color
etc. are the configurable properties.
Note that the upper-left corner of screen and object are the origin of position coordinate.

Graphic Page Editor

11.4.2 Visible

The ‘
Visible’property makes the object visible or not, according to the specified TAG’
s value.
Typically a digital TAG is used to control the visibility of the object.

161

162

CIMON-Xpanel

11.4.3 Blink

The ‘
Blink’property makes the object to blink when the TAG value is the given state.
The blinking speed is adjustable in the unit of 100mSec.

11.4.4 V-Size

Graphic Page Editor

163

The ‘
V-Size’property varies the height of the object depending on the value of specified TAG.
If TAG value is equal to the designated minimum value, the height of object will be 0.
And if TAG value is equal to the designated maximum value, then the height of object will be original height.
(Original height is the drawn height.)

11.4.5 H-Size

164

CIMON-Xpanel

The ‘
H-Size’property varies the width of the object depending on the value of specified TAG.
If TAG value is equal to the designated minimum value, the width of object will be 0.
And if TAG value is equal to the designated maximum value, then the width of object will be original width.
(Original width is the drawn width.)

11.4.6 V-Move

Graphic Page Editor

165

The ‘
V-Move’property moves the object depending on the value of specified TAG.
If TAG value is equal to the designated minimum value, the position of the object will be originally drawn
position.
And if TAG value is equal to the designated maximum value, then the position will be moved with the amount
of pixel value assigned to
the ‘
Move’field. If the ‘
Bottom’was checked as the base position, the movement direction will be upward.
Otherwise (‘
Top’
), the movement direction will be downward.

11.4.7 H-Move

166

CIMON-Xpanel

The ‘
H-Move’property moves the object depending on the value of specified TAG.
If TAG value is equal to the designated minimum value, the position of the object will be originally drawn
position.
And if TAG value is equal to the designated maximum value, then the position will be moved with the amount
of pixel value assigned to
the ‘
Move’field. If the ‘
Left’was checked as the base position, the movement direction will be right.
Otherwise (‘
Right’
), the movement direction will be left.

Graphic Page Editor

11.4.8 Color

The ‘
Color’property changes the fill color of object depending on the value of specified TAG.
Maximum 8 different color boundary values can be declared.
This means that there can be maximum 9 different colors including the original color of object.

11.4.9 Rotate

167

168

CIMON-Xpanel

The ‘
Rotate’property rotates the object depending on the value of specified TAG.
The rotate direction and angle and center position are configurable parameters.
The center point can be easily calculated with the coordinate information in ‘
Style’properties (static properties)
.
For example, assume a following object’
s coordinate data in ‘
Style’property page.

This object’
s center point is :

Xcent = X + Width / 2 =
141 + 312 / 2 = 297
Ycent = Y + Height / 2 =
30 + 33 / 2 = 46.5 = 46

Graphic Page Editor

169

11.4.10Touch

The ‘
Touch’property creates an operator touch zone. Following table shows the list of available actions with
the ‘
Touch’property.

Action

Description

Open Page

Open a new page specified in below.

Close Page

Close the specified page

Write Tag Value

Write the specified value to the specified
TAG.

Configuration Items

170

CIMON-Xpanel

Write Digital Value

Control the digital TAG with one of three
available control types.

Write Momentary

Write two different values in series to the
specified TAG. One value at touch down
and the other value at touch release.

Command Expression

Execute the programmed command
expression. Refer to the ‘
Script’section for
more information about the command
expression.

Key Input

Issue the specified key code at touch. This
action emulates the keyboard input.

If the ‘
Condition’check box above is checked, a conditional expression can be declared.
The evaluated value of this expression at runtime enables or disables the function of this property.
If the evaluated value is false, then the defined action will not work even if the touch zone is touched by
operator.
For more information about conditional expression, refer to the section of ‘
Script’
.
Furthermore, the touch zone has its own security level.
The specified action is executed only when the object is touched by the operator who has higher level of
privilege level
than the specified security level. For more information about the security system of XPanel, refer to the
Security’section.
‘

Graphic Page Editor

171

11.4.11EntryData

[ Number Enrty Data ]

[ String Enrty Data ]

The ‘EntryData’property creates an
operator touch area which pops up one
of three different sized number or
string pad. Input data from operator will
be applied to the specified TAG. And
also, input range checking function
applicable to the input value. Following
three sample pictures show the
available number or string pad window
style. The size of number or string pad
window is different between each
window style. (‘Window style 3’number
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

172

CIMON-Xpanel

pad fits small sized screen well, such
as 320x240 resolution)
[ Position Offset ]

Number Window Style 1

Number Window Style 2

Number Window Style 3

11.4.12Switch/Lamp
1. Overview
This function can express Switch/Lamp object on the monitor, practice the designated action or check the
condition of tag.
Each function of switch and lamp registered in the page can be used independently or two functions can be used
together by registering same tag.

Graphic Page Editor

173

2. Switch Function

Object Name

It is a name of pertinent Switch/Lamp object.

Shape Select

"State Image Select" of Switch/Lamp is displayed.
Switch/lamp will be displayed on the page as a transparent state like the area(size) of

Shape nil

switch/lamp.
A pertinent area is displayed in the dotted line.

The operation point of the function registered in a pertinent switch can be confirmed.
Touch - Down / Touch
- Up
It is possible to add the new function and delete an existing function.
Function Selection
Tab
Switch Function
Selection Buttons

Select - Switch / Switch Common / Lamp / Label Function
Select - Switch according to each function. The screen above is a Bit Switch selection
screen.

1) Bit Switch

174

CIMON-Xpanel

Tag Name

Input - Tag Name to the Bit Switch
Select - Function of Bit Switch
· Set : The specified tag enters the state of turning on if the switch is pushed. The
state is maintained.

Function

· Reset : The specified tag enters the state of turning off if the switch is pushed. The
state is maintained.
· Toggle : The specified tag changes into the state of ON/OFF if the switch is
pushed.

Momentary

This function is registered to the Special Function Switch.

2) Word Switch

Graphic Page Editor

175

Select - Switch Function of Word Switch
- Write Analog Value : The value that the user set to the specified tag can be input.
Switch Function

- Tag OperationWhen
:
acting switch, the Operation action to the specified tag can
be specified.
Operation that can be specified : +, -, AND, OR, XOR
You can input the value of the tag registered in analogue switch and it is supported

Value

with the data input of two shapes of 10/16 essence. Only if the switch action is the tag
Operation, the tag can be used.

Hexa

The form of the input value can be specified. If it is not a check, it will basically
recognize it by the value of the decimal number.
When Tag Operation is selected in the Switch Function, Operation Function can be

Operator

used.
Operation that can be specified : +, -, AND, OR, XOR

176

CIMON-Xpanel

3) Page

Page Type

Select - Page Type when Page Function is used
- Normal Page / Keypad Page only one page can be registered in a pertinent switch.

Page Name

Input - Page Name

Tag Name

Input - Tag Name

HORIZ. / VER.

Input - Size of Page

Max. / Min. Value

Setup a Max. / Min. Value of Tag

4) Special Function

Graphic Page Editor

177

Command : Command that can be used with Xpanel Designer can be input.
Switch Action

Key Input : Set the Keyboard Input Function to Switch.
Write the Value of Momentary : It is a Momentary input function.

Key Value

Select - Key Value. The same input as the input with a general keyboard is possible.

Down - Input Value

When acting switch, set the Input Value in the condition that Switch Downs.

Up - Input Value

When acting switch, set the Input Value in the condition that Switch Ups.

3. Switch Common

178

CIMON-Xpanel

Use Touch
Touch Condition
Setting

Set the Touch Condition. When the relative terms are satisfied, the touch action of
switch is possible.
Input - Touch Condition

Use Security Function Check - Use Security Function

Security Setting

Set the Security Level. The highest level is ten for the security level.

4. Lamp

Graphic Page Editor

Use Lamp

Tag Type

179

Set - "Use Lamp".
Set - "Tag Type" of Lamp .
The string tag cannot be selected.
Ranges of the number of states are different because of the kind of pertinent tag and
the union of the state conversion condition.

State

At each Bit condition
conversion
With Data condition
conversion

Tag Registration

Digital Tag

Analog Tag

2-5

2-17

2-16

2-256

Because the activated State is changed by the number of each State, register tags
after setting the number of the State.

5. Label
- The pertinent label could be expressed to each switch / lamp object.
- Label can express the registered string to the "direct input" and the "string table".
- "Font Set" can be set to each label.

180

CIMON-Xpanel

Sate Select

The "Sate Select" is activated based on the number of states set to the lamp.

Input Type

Select - "Direct Input" or "String Table".

Direct Input

The user can make the content directly by being activated when the "Direct Input" is
selected.

String Table Set

When the string table is selected, a pertinent string can be set.

Font Set

"Font Set" can set the size, the color, and the alignment of the displayed string.

6. Image Setting of Switch/Lamp

Graphic Page Editor

1) Click - [Shape Select]

Part Palette

The image library registered now is displayed.

181

182

CIMON-Xpanel

Pattern

There is a pattern in each image registered in each palette. The corresponding pattern
can be selected.

Part No.

The part images registered in a present palette can be selected.

New Palette

Set - The name and the storage point of a new palette

Create

Call - 'Part Registration' that selects images to register in the New Palette.

Delete

Delete - The part image registered in the palette

Double Click - "State" Image or Select a state and Click the "Open" button to register image.
As you check the transparent state, the background picture without the shape of the object from the image
becomes transparent (the image expressed to the page has no background picture).

Graphic Page Editor

183

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

XII

Keypad Page

185

Keypad Page
By using the function, you can use the page designed by the operator as the keypad for the data input.
See :
· Make Keypad Page

12.1

Make Keypad Page
Make Keypad Page

Make Keypad
Page

Following picture shows how to create "Keypad Page".
*The keypad page should satisfy the following condition.
● Select - "Keypad Page" in Page Properties
●

It should include ‘Keypad input window’one more and be smaller than the picture’s

size in the setup.
Create - New Page and Set - "Keypad Page" in Page Properties

Change - The size of page in Page Position and Click [->Copy]
-

186

CIMON-Xpanel

• In the registration of the keypad input window, the designated tag is ignored when it is
operated by the keypad. Instead of it, ‘Command On Input’is normally handled.

• When it is operated by the keypad, all key input windows registered to the page hand the
input figure to the tag registered to ‘Open the keypad page’lastly called. If registered tag
is the number (analogue, digital) tag and the inputted content in the key input window is
not able to express numerically, the writing action will be ignored.
Register - "Key Input" button to input the value in "Key Input Window"

Keypad Page

187

Save the Page.
Using Keypad
Page

Following picture shows how to use "Keypad Page".
Open - Page to call "Keypad Page" and "Object Config" to use by button.
Select - "Touch" function and Set - "Keypad Page Open" in the Print Page of Action

Register - "Tag Name" to input the value from the keypad page
Input - HORIZ. and VER. for position of keypad page
If Maximum/Minimum Value of input are applied, set up the range of Maximum/Minimum
Value.
Register - Keypad Page to "Page Name"

• If the registered page is normal and popup page, 'Action' will be "Open Page".
• As the keypad page is already opened, the page is moved to the designated position.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

XIII

Key Input Window

Key Input Window
The Keyboard-Input is expressed to the monitor and stored with a designated tag.
It utilizes to manage a bar code input and to compose the screen of a password log-in.

See :
· Key Input Setting

13.1

Key Input Setting
Click - [Draw] -> [Key Input Window] of Xpanel Designer

189

190

CIMON-Xpanel

End-Code

Save inputted contents after inputting the value of a designated key at the tag.

Input Tag Name

Select - String Tag to save the input contents.
Input - "Command"
The Command inputted here is operated after obtaining the input complete code
and storing the input content to the designated tag.

Command On

[Ex.] [When the input value is 1234, the "Main" page is opened.] Write the following

Input

command.
IF(BARCODE_00 == “1234”)
PageOpen(“Main”);

Max. Input

Set the length of the Max. String expressed to the key input window.

Key Input Window

Characters
Max. / Min Value

191

Not to express the String over the designated length on the input window.
If Analog Tag is selected, Set - "Max. / Min. Value". This setting is disregarded in
the string tag.

Min. Value

Set - Input Min. Value

Max. Value

Set - Input Max. Value

Clear Window At

If this setting is checked, remove the last content and then express the new

Overflow

content.

End-Code Process The state of the key input widow is changed referring to the setting of "End-Code".
Remove Input
Focus
Move Focus To

Remove Input Focus of key input widow. The string is not input any more.
Other key input windows are automatically selected. The selection of key input

Next Input Window window that input completes is canceled.
Clear - Content of key input window
After checking and obtaining the input complete code, save the tag’s value and
Clear Window

remove the content expressed to the present key input window.
If the check is canceled, the tag’s value will be saved and the last input content is
displayed before obtaining next key input.

Password Type

The string is displayed in the key input window by “***" form if checked.

Show Keyboard

Show Keyboard On Double Click 'Key Input Window'

On Double Click

It will disappear when a soft keyboard is displayed.

CAUTION
If two more key input windows are registered in the one screen, the key input is applied to only the one
window that is activated.
So, in case of using the key input with other Objects, the control of the key input of other Objects are not
handled normally.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

XIV

Data Logging

193

Data Logging
This function is used to save the tag value for logging in file type.
The tags for logging are analog and digital tag. Only the tags selected for data logging when tags are registered
to a database are available.
For logging tag values, a data-logging model should be set up and be registered to a project.
According to selected model, the data of a corresponding tag are logged and saved in file type.
The logged tag data is used as the data for a trend.

· The function to save a logged data in file is provided.
· Data are logged according to regular interval or in case that a value is changed.
· Files that are classified according to file size and logging term are saved.
· Back-up function, which is used to save logged data file to other location automatically, is provided.
· A specific data saved in a file can be read through Script language.
· Logged data can be displayed on a trend window through Historical Trend.
See :
· Data Logging Configuration
· Using Data Logging

14.1

Data Logging Configuration
Click - [Tools] -> [Data Logging] of Xpanel Designer

194

CIMON-Xpanel

Description of Control Button

If you press the Add button after you configure data logging, a new model will be
added. If a same logging model name exists, an Error dialogue box will appear.

Add

This is used to register a corresponding data-logging model. If you press this button,

Apply

Delete

a registered model will be displayed in the data logging model list on the left.

This is used to delete a created model.
If you press the Delete button after you select the model deleted in a data
logging model list, a Warning dialogue box will appear. If you want to delete,
select “Yes”. Otherwise, select “No”
.

Data Logging

195

This is used to close a Data Logging Configuration.
If you change or add a data-loggingmodel, the dialogue box to ask whether
a model is registered will appear.

Configuration of Data Logging

This is used to enter the name of the data-logging model created.
The limited conditions
1. It is available to enter in the combination of English, Korean, numeral and
specific characters.
2. There is no limitation on the number of the characters entered.

Logging
Name

Model If you do not enter it, an Error dialog box will appear as follows.

Xpanel provides 5 different start types. Each of these is based on period,
command, tag and time.
Start Type

Whenever a new log task is started, a new block file will be created and the old
task will be stopped and closed automatically.
The name of a block file is automatically generated based on the started time.

196

CIMON-Xpanel

Periodic
A log task is started periodically. The period of task invoking is configured in the unit
of minute. During one day, log task is started on every multiple of designated
minute. For example, if the ‘
Base Time’was configured as 1H 30M, the log task
will be invoked on 00:00, 01:30, 03:00, 04:30, ..., 22:30.
This example assumes that ‘
Time Offset’is configured as ‘
0’
. The ‘
time offset’is a
delay of start. If it is assigned as 10, the log task of previous example will be invoked
on 00:10, 01:40 and so on.

Called (by command)
This type of invoking is triggered by a command. A command can be issued by touch
operation or script program. The command has a following format :

DataLog("ModelName", 1)

Trigger TAG
The log task is triggered by the state change of a TAG. When the value of a TAG
changes from zero to non-zero, the log task will be invoked. The value change from
non-zero to zero does not affect to the log task. Designate the name of TAG in ‘
Tag
Name’field.

Enable TAG
The log task is triggered by the state change of a TAG. When the value of a TAG
changes from zero to non-zero, the log task will be invoked. And when the value
changes from non-zero to zero, the log task will be terminated. That is, the log task
keeps logging only while the value of TAG is non-zero. Designate the name of TAG
in ‘
Tag Name’field.

On Time
The log task is invoked only once in a day. Set the time of log in ‘
Base Time’field.
(1) Periodic
Log Type

Tag values are logged at "Periodic".
In case of logging at "Periodic", input a logging Period by the second.

Data Logging

197

(2) Tag Value
If the value of tag is changed, data is logged.
In case of logging at "Tag Value", input a Name of Tag.
The setting of tag is possible only the tag registered in [Tools] ->
[Database] of Xpanel Designer.
Maximum Log No.
Per Block

Setup - Maximum Log No. Per Block
The setting range is 1~2048, and the Data Logging of the block is closed when
the setting maximum number is exceeded.
Setup - Maximum Block No.

Maximum Block

The setting range is 1~32.

No.

[CAUTION] When the setting Maximum Log No. is exceeded, data is covered
to the data block that became the oldest.
Register - Log Data
The tag that can be registered is digital tag and analog tag.

Tags

The selecting of tag is possible only the tag registered in [Tools] -> [Database]
of Xpanel Designer.

14.2

Using Data Logging
How to Save Logging File

Because the Data Logging file is saved by the XXXX type, the user is not seen.
Therefore, it is necessary to change to the CSV format for which the user can utilize this data. The following
two functions are offered in Xpanel for this.

MakeCsv(S1, R2)
MakeCsvUsb(S1, R2)

For details on Internal Function, refer to the Script manual.

On Screen Display

Click - [Draw] -> [Data Log] of Xpanel Designer

198

CIMON-Xpanel

Log Model Name

Select - Log Model Name to display on screen.
Only the model registered by the process of two can be selected.

Text Color,Line
Color,Line Type

Setup - Table type of the
Log Model
Setup - Shape of the table
Column first displays 'Date' and 'Time' of "Display" and the name of tag registered in
the Data Log Model is sequentially displayed.
Row displays theLog Data that corresponds to each tag and when 'Maximum

Column No., Row

Value', 'Minimum Value', 'Average Value', and 'Summation Value' of "display" are

No.

selected, the selected display item is displayed by reverse order in the Row of the
end of table.
t isi possible to see by moving the
When the setting Maximum Log No. is exceeded,
data of table via [Draw] -> [Key Input Window] of Xpanel Designer. Refer to the
"Keypad Page" manual

Date Type
Display

Setup - Date Type when 'Date' is selected in "display".
Date Type provides 'YY/MM/DD', 'DD/MM/YY', 'MM/DD', and 'DD/MM'.
Display - Necessary item in six-kind item like 'Date' and 'Time' etc.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

200

CIMON-Xpanel

Data Bridge
Data bridge of Xpanel makes data synchronization between the communication measures possible.
Data bridge by the designated event sends the data of Source Device to the designated area of Destination
Device.

< Data Bridge data flowchart >

See :
· Edit Data Bridge Model

15.1

Edit Data Bridge Model
Click - [Tools] -> [Data Bridge] of Xpanel Designer

Data Bridge

Icon Description

Icon

Description
Add Data Bridge Model
Edit Data Bridge Model
Delete Data Bridge Model
Add Data Bridge Tag
Edit Data Bridge Tag
Delete Data Bridge Tag

Basic Setup

201

202

CIMON-Xpanel

Model Name

Input - Data Bridge Model Name. Model Name
should be entered but should not be
duplicated.

Model Type

Tag Base :
If "Tag Base" is checked in the model type, the model will have Source tags and
Destination tags.
If the event happens by the designated Sync. Type, the operation of the data
synchronization starts and the value of the Source tag is sent to the Destination tag in a
registered order. In case of it, if the communication of one side is not operated or the
value of each tag is same, the operation of the synchronization will be canceled and
next tag will start.
Under the operation of the synchronization, if the synchronization events happen, the
letter event will be ignored.
Block Base :
If "Block Base" is checked in the model type, block information area of the model editor
is activated.
If the event happens by the designated Sync. Type, by reading the address area of the
tag designated to the 'Source Block Start Tag', data as same as the block size is sent to
the address area of the 'Destination Block Start Tag'. In case of it, if the communication
of one side is not operated, the operation of the synchronization will be canceled and
there are no data comparison to pertinent areas before the operation of the
synchronization.
Under the operation of the synchronization, if the synchronization events happen, the
letter event will be ignored.

Sync. Type

Immediately :
It is possible to select "Immediately" when
"Tag Base" is checked in the model type.
The value of theSource tag is always compared with the value of the
Destination tag
and if the wrong value, the value of the
Source tag is sent to theDestination tag.
Trigger : Sync. Event happens w
hen the value of the specified Trigger tag is changed
from 0 to none 0.
Periodic : .Sync. Event happens by the time designated in "Sync. Period"

Trigger Tag

It is activated when Trigger"
"
is checked in the Sync. Type and Sync. Event happens by
the value of the designated tag.

Sync. Period

It is activated when "Periodic" is checked in the Sync. Type and Sync. Event happens by
the periodic value of the designated tag.

Block

Setup - Synchronization Parameters of Block unit model. It activated
is
when "Block

Information

Base" is checked in the model type.
· Block Size : Setup -Block Size for the data synchronization

Data Bridge

203

The data of the registered number
sent
is to theDestination Block.
· Source Block Start : Register - Source Block Start Tag
Real Tag of the device with a consecutive address should
be registered .
· Source Handshake : The value of the tag registered before reading the data of the
Source Block is made as 1,
the value is initialized by 0 after work is completed. It is
used to confirm the Source Data Reception
and Digital Tag should be registered.
· Destination Block Start : Register - Destination Block Start Tag
Real Tag of the device with a consecutive address
should be registered.
· Destination Handshake : The value of the tag registered before writing the data of
the Destination Blockis made as 1,
the value is initialized by 0 after work is completed. It
is used to confirm theDestination Data
Transmission and Digital Tag should be registered.

204

CIMON-Xpanel

Point
Other communication work to I/O Device will be delayed while synchronization working.
When you use the data bridge function too much or frequently generate the synchronization event,
please note the communication update can be delayed.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

XVI

206

CIMON-Xpanel

Modbus Slave
1. Function
By the function, the communication can be composed between Master equipment and Xpanel using the Modbus
protocol(RTU, TCP).

Xpanel has memory for Modbus Slave action inside, and if Master asks via the designated communication
channel, it answers to put the content of the memory in the frame.
The Modbus memory is composed of Coil(Max Size: 5000) and the Holding Register(Max Size: 10000) area and
Digital tag can be registered in the Coil area and Analogue/String tag be registered in the Holding Register Area.
· Ex. When Tag1 is registered in Holding Register 400001, If it keeps reading the value of 400001 in Master, the
value of Tag1 is understood and moreover if it keeps writing the value in 400001, the value of Tag1 can be
changed.
Function

Contents

Coil Area Reading

Hold Register Area Reading

Coil 단 독 Writing

Holding Register 단 독 Writing

Modbus Slave

Coil 연 속 Writing

Holding Register 연 속 Writing

207

< Modbus Function >
If the data form of the registered tag is bigger than Word (UINT 32, INT32, float..) or is the string tag, the
designated number will be used as the beginning number of data.
· Ex 1. When the Form of Tag1 registered in Holding Register 400001 is UINT32, the data of Tag 1 is updated
to 400001 and 400002. When the value is written in 400002 with Master, the value of Tag 1 is also changed.
· Ex 2. When Tag 3 registered in Holding Register 400001 is string tag(string size : 10), the data of Tag 3 is
updated to 400010 ~ 400014. When the value is written in 400014 with Master, the value of Tag 3 is also
changed.

16.1

Modbus Slave Setting
Open Modbus Slave

Click - [Tools] -> [Data Sever] MODBUS
-> [
Slave] of XpanelDesigner orModbus Slave item of Project
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

208

CIMON-Xpanel

window.

Communication Setting

The communication channel means a physical passage(Serial, Ethernet) for connection with Master. Setup Communication Parameter of the port and the Modbus Unit No. etc. in the channel setting.
The communication channel without the action form is registered up to 3, and each channel can be connected
with one Master.

Communication Setting
Communication Editing
Communication Deletion

· Unit No. is a Modbus Unit No. of Xpanel.
· The communication port should be set not to be duplicated with another communication channel or I/O device.

Modbus Slave

209

· The "Soket No." defined in the Modbus TCP protocol is 502.
· When you register the TCP channel by the addition, The "Soket No." should be set not to be duplicated. In this
case, it is necessary to edit the setting of Master.

Coil Area Tag 등 록

· The Coil Area can be registered up to 05000(5000).
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

210

CIMON-Xpanel

· Register - Tag in the Coils Area. If the tag is not registered, the basic value(0) would be answered.
· Click - "Coils Area" in the left window. Register or Edit - Tag using (Registration),

(Editing) buttons.

Holding Register Area Tag 등 록

· The Holding Register Area can be registered up to 410000(10000).
· Register - Tag in the Holding Register Area. If the tag is not registered, the basic value(0) would be answered.
· Click - "Holding Register Area" in the left window. Register or Edit - Tag using(Registration),

(Editing)

buttons.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

XVII

212

CIMON-Xpanel

Recipe
The recipe service of Xpanel supports the multiple models. This makes it possible to manipulate different recipe
for multiple devices with an Xpanel.
In an Xpanel, every recipe model has its own name, parameters and group data. Up to 1024 group data can be
registered in a recipe model.
But at any time, only one group data can be manipulated in Xpanel. The reason is that a group data must be
located in the memory of Xpanel for manipulation.
A group data can be transferred between four types of media.
And the Xpanel memory is located at the center of these transfers. Following picture shows paths of group data
movement.

Each of group data movement is issued by the internal functions for recipe operation. More precise explanations
can be found on the script section of this manual.

RcpCsvRd(S1, S2,

A group data can be imported from external memory through CSV formatted file.

R3)

CSV formatted file can be created or read by the spreadsheet utilities such as
MS-Excel on PC

RcpMemUp(S1),

A group data can be uploaded from the device through communication. For normal

Recipe

RcpMemDown(S1)

213

recipe operation,
the communication driver must support the recipe functions.
This can be known from the manual of the communication driver. Refer to the
driver’
s manual.

RcpFileStore(S1, R2), The group data in memory can be stored to the recipe configuration file.
RcpFileRead(S1, R2) The stored group data will be maintained while power off.
And the function for reading a group data from configuration file is provided also.
RcpUpload(S1, R2)

Compounded functions are provided for convenience.
RcpUpload() function is a compounded form of RcpMemUp() and RcpFileStore()

RcpDownload(S1,

RcpDownload() function is a compounded form of RcpFileRead() and

R2)

RcpMemDown().

See :
· Model Configuration
· Recipe Operator Interface

17.1

Model Configuration
A recipe model is defined by following dialog box of Xpanel Designer.

214

CIMON-Xpanel

Basic Properties

Mo Every recipe model has its own name. This name will be used in the functions for recipe operation.
del
Na
me
Nu One or more recipe group data can be predefined in a recipe configuration file.
mb ‘
Number of Group’field gets the total number of predefined group data.
er

These group data can be read or written by RcpFileRead() or RcpFileStore(). Each group is distinguished by the

index number in those functions. According to the following example picture, index 0 is the Vanilla, and index 1 is

Choco and so on.

ou
p

Re One of analog TAG in database can be assigned to this field. The device address of the TAG must be designated
cip with the first address of the recipe data memory area of a device. This memory area must be continuous. The
e

analog TAG of this field specifies not only the first address but also specifies the type of data. Xpanel supports

WORD (16 bits) and DWORD (32 bits) type of data for recipe. Therefore, the data type of an analog TAG for this

field should be one of INT16, UINT16, INT32 or UINT32. Following picture shows the property page of analog

Sta TAG.
rt
Po
siti
on

Recipe

215

Nu This field gets the total number of recipe group data items. All groups in a model have the same number of data.
mb The exact size of a recipe group data can be calculated from this value and the data type described in the
er

previous field (Recipe Area Start Position).

of
Da
ta

Handshake with the Device

Xpanel does handshake with a device while up/download a recipe data via communication.
The handshake is progressed on the basis of device memories. These handshake memories must be
declared as TAGs in the database of Xpanel.

Wo Word handshake is a group of up/download request flags. It must be declared as an analog TAG with 16 bits
rd

property. This word is divided into two different areas. High nibble of the word is the flags for request from

Ha device (for example a PLC), and low nibble of word is the flags for request from Xpanel.
nd
sh
ak
e

216

CIMON-Xpanel

BIT The bit handshake must be declared as a digital TAG in database. It is set or reset by Xpanel.
Ha This flag indicates that the recipe data transfer is under the progressing.
nd

Therefore, by this flag, the device can recognize the fact that its recipe data are ready for use or not.

sh
ak
e
Gr

This field retains the group number for upload or download. And it is effective only when the recipe data

transfer is issued by device (PLC) side. The device can choose a group in Xpanel configuration file which is

wanted to be up/downloaded. The group number can be a number between 0 to 1023.

Nu
mb Following time chart shows the status of handshake signals during recipe data transfer. It is an example of
er

up/download issued by PLC side. For transfer a new recipe data from Xpanel to device (PLC), the group
number should be decided foremost and written to the memory of group number. And next, the device
signals the bit08 (or bit09) flag of word handshake. Immediately after detection of that signal, Xpanel sets the
bit handshake and starts to transfer the recipe group data which is designated by the group number field.
After the successful transfer, Xpanel resets the bit handshake signal and clears the word handshake also. The
device can recognize the completion of transfer through those handshake signals.

Following time chart shows an example of recipe data transfer issued by Xpanel side. All the handshake
signals are controlled by Xpanel. The group number field has no meaning at Xpanel issued transfer. Since the
group number was designated in the parameter of functions already (RcpUpload(), RcpDownload()) or does
not need the group number because data are not for file access (RcpMemUp(), RcpMemDown()). The device
can recognize the progress of recipe data transfer with word and bit handshake signals.

Recipe

217

Post Process for Uploaded Data

Automatically

This option is effective only for the uploaded data by device side. As explained in

File Store On PLC previous section, the device (PLC) can control the uploading process by using
Managed Upload handshake signal (bit9 of word handshake) and a group number.
If this option is checked, Xpanel will store the received recipe group data to the
configuration file automatically at the end of upload process. At that moment, the
group number from device will be used to determine which group in a file should be
replaced with the newly received data. Stored group data will be retained permanently
in flash memory even while Xpanel is powered off. If this option is not checked, the
uploaded data will be stored only in RAM.

17.2

Recipe Operator Interface
Recipe Functions

Xpanel provides 9 functions for recipe operation.
Those functions can be used as command of touch operation as well as script. Following table shows a list
of recipe functions.
(Please refer to the ‘
Script’section for more information)

Function

Description

RcpDownload(S1, R2)

Read a group of recipe data from file, and download it to device

RcpUpload(S1, R2)

Upload the specified recipe group data from device, and store it to file.

RcpStop(S1)

Stop and terminate the processing job of specified recipe model.

RcpFileStore(S1, R2)

Stores the recipe data to the file..

218

CIMON-Xpanel

RcpFileRead(S1, R2)

Read the recipe data from file.

RcpMemDown(S1)

Download the current recipe data to device.

RcpMemUp(S1)

Upload the recipe data from device.

RcpCsvRd(S1, S2, R3)

Read the recipe data from CSV formatted file.

RcpConfig()

Pops up a dialog box for recipe data manipulation.

Recipe Dialog Box

RcpConfig() function pops up a dialog box on screen. This dialog box provides some tools for manipulating
recipe data in memory.
Each data item in a group can be modified by touch operation. Following picture shows a example of recipe
dialog box.

Save

Save button stores the recipe group
data to the recipe configuration file.
The storage media can be the internal
flash memory of Xpanel or other
external none-volatile memory device
such as SD/MMC. It is dependent on
the location of project folder which is
determined on start-up.

Upload Upload button reads the recipe data
from device. Current recipe data in
memory will be discarded and
replaced with those of device. This
button gives the same result with the
function RcpMemUp()
Downl

Download button writes current recipe

oad

data in memory to device. This button
gives the same result with the
function RcpMemDown()

CSV File Importing

Xpanel provides a way to import the external recipe group data.

Recipe

219

External data must be a CSV formatted file and the SD/MMC or USB memory can be used for importing
media.
Following picture shows the work flow of recipe data importing.

Writing a CSV file CSV formatted file can be generated by spreadsheet program of PC such as Excel.
A CSV file can include one group data and the first data of this file should be the number of
following recipe data. This number must same with the ‘
Number of Data’field of recipe
configuration dialog box.

Importing the

RcpCsvRd() function is used for importing a CSV file from external memory media. External

CSV file

memory can be the SD/MMC or USB memory. If there is no fault to access the CSV file in

on external

external memory, the recipe group data will be loaded to RAM of Xpanel. After successful loading

memory

of recipe group data, they can be manipulated in various ways. They can be stored in
configuration file and also can be downloaded to the device, Please refer to the ‘
Script’section
for more information about RcpCsvRd() function.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

XVIII

System Memory

221

System Memory
System Memory function supports useful continuous memory space for the script, recipe and so
on.
This function also uses continuous data storage at the script or editing buffer at the script.
· System Memory : Continuous Data Space
·

Continuous data storage for the Script.

· Editing group data space for the Recipe

See :
· Using System Memory Tag
· Example of using system memory about opened page log.
· Editing recipe data using system memory

18.1

Using System Memory Tag
System Memory Configuration

222

CIMON-Xpanel

Select menu [Tools] -> [Project(P)]
“System Memory Size” configures system memory size. If it is inputted 1000 like above figure then it
assigns range 0 ~ 999.

Registering Tag

Register the tag at data base for use system memory as like virtual tag.
This case can handle system memory value directly and monitor the value.

System Memory

223

Input tag name. Select the kind of tag.
System
(
Memory area must be used as the Digital/Analog tag.
)
Select real tag at the general tab. Select “SYSTEM MEMORY”at the I/O device.
( “SYSTEM MEMORY” item has been registered basically.)
Input I/O address will be used. If it is inputted “5”like above figure then address 5 data can be handled or
monitored.
(If it is inputted less than 0 or out of the range assigned, the system tag will not be worked.)

18.2

Example of using system memory about opened page log.
Follow example shows the method of making opened page log by using system memory.
· Select system memory size
· Register two virtual tags at the data base.
■ Name : PAGE_NUM, Type : Analog, Initial Value : 0
■ Name : PAGE_LOG_SIZE, Type : Analog, Initial Value : 0

224

CIMON-Xpanel

· Register 10 system memory tags at the data base.
■Name : SYSTEM_00, Type : Analog
■Change I/O address as the follow figure and register 10 tags until SYSTEM_09.

· Select menu [Tools] -> [Script(S)]
· Create the script as follow.

System Memory

· Input commands at script as follows

//Move system memory data from address 0 toPAGE_LOG_SIZE based on address 1.
Sysmemmove(0,1,PAGE_LOG_SIZE);
//Save current page number at the system memory address 0.
SetSysMem(0,PAGE_NUM);
//If PAGE_LOG_SIZE if less than 10 then increase 1.
if(PAGE_LOG_SIZE < 10)
PAGE_LOG_SIZE = PAGE_LOG_SIZE + 1;

· "Create new page “Page1”

225

226

CIMON-Xpanel

Select [Tools] -> [Page setup]

Input as follow figure in the action tab.

· If “Page1”is opened,PAGE_NUM tag value is set 1 and runs InserPageLog function.
· Create “Page2”, “Page3” and input as above figure changing PAGE_NUM tag value.

System Memory

· Arrange tag object at the page and let it indicates “SYSTEM_00”tag.
· Through the same method arrange SYSTEM_01, SYSTEM_02,… SYSTEM_09 tags at the page.
· Copy above objects and paste to all pages.

227

228

CIMON-Xpanel

· Insert Side5Button wizard from library and register page open action at each button.

System Memory

Open configure window through
download project.

[Tools]->[CIMON-XPANEL setup(X)].Indicate starting page and

· Every time when the page is opened by using side button, logs of opened page are updated.

229

230

CIMON-Xpanel

< Xpanel acting page, recently opened page >

18.3

Editing recipe data using system memory
Bellow example shows the method of editing recipe internal buffer using system memory.

Registering System tag

Register system memory tag at the data base for displaying system value tag value at the monitor.
Register 10 tags address 0 ~ 9 according to the following figure.

Registering tag for Recipe model

Register tags for the Recipe model. Refer the manual for more details. In this example is registered
bellows.
Recipe Area Start Position: START
Handshake Word : CONTROL
Handshake Bit : CTL_BIT
Handshake Group Number: GROUP

Registering Recipe model

System Memory

231

Page construction for editing system memory

Construct page for editing and displaying system memory. Arrange tag value object at the page and
register system memory tag.

232

CIMON-Xpanel

Check the EntryData and register same system memory tag.

System Memory

Make button to bring system memory from recipe data.

233

234

CIMON-Xpanel

Input commands as follows after selection of [Touch] -> [Command Expression] at the button
configuration.
When button is touched it brings buffer data of “SAMPLE” recipe model to system memory address 0. It
updates 10 areas from address 0 to 9.
RcpGetSysMem("SAMPLE",0)

System Memory

235

Input commands as follows after selection of [Touch] -> [Command Expression] at the button
configuration.
When button is touched it transfers buffer data of “SAMPLE”recipe model to system memory address 0.
It updates 10 areas from address 0 to 9.
RcpSetSysMem("SAMPLE",0)

Making Recipe Upload Button

Input commands as follows after selection of [Touch] -> [Command Expression] at the button
configuration.
When button is touched it updates “SAMPLE” recipe model’s buffer by reading device’s data.
RcpMemUp("SAMPLE");

Making Recipe Download Button

Input commands as follows after selection of [Touch] -> [Command Expression] at the button
configuration.
When button is touched it downloads “SAMPLE” recipe model’s buffer data to device.
RcpMemDown("SAMPLE");

236

CIMON-Xpanel

· Save project and download project to Xpanel. It realizes download function about download at once after
reading continuous data and modifying
data according to order as like [Upload] -> [Bring recipe data to system memory] -> [Modifying system
memory] -> [Inputting system memory data] ->
[Download] in displaying monitor.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

XIX

238

CIMON-Xpanel

Trend
Xpanel provides various kinds of trend functions. Each trend function has its own distinguishable and specialized
data manipulation method and trending style.
System engineer can choose the best fitting trend function among those trend functions for their application.

See :
· YT Trend

Scope Trend

SPC Trend

ST Trend

LOG Trend

XY Trend

19.1

YT Trend
The ‘
YT Trend’is periodical time based generic trend. The data for trending are collected by Xpanel. Y axis
represents the value of trending data and X axis represents the time. Maximum 8 different data (pens) can be
shown in a trend window at the same time. Each pen has its own data buffer (RAM) with capacity of 5000 data.
The datum of each pen is sampled and stored periodically to this buffer by Xpanel. This buffer makes it possible
to support the historical trend of sampled data.
Trend Config

Display Basis

Designate the side which displays the more recent data. For example, if the ‘
Right’is
selected, the trend screen will be

Trend

239

scrolled right to left direction and the right most data will be the most recent data.
Display Time

Designate the time span of trend window. The maximum configurable time can be
derived from the sampling time.
(Max. 5000 x Sampling time)

Sampling

Designate the data sampling time. Xpanel will collect the pen data at every this sampling

Time

time.
The data buffer of a pen has the capacity of 5000 samples.

File Saving

This option can be used when the historical trend data must be preserved in non-volatile
memory. Without this option, the historical data are stored in RAM (volatile memory).
One of three kinds of non-volatile memory media can be chosen for the storage of
historical data. Following table shows the logging path of each media. The log file has its
own format, it cannot be read other application software.

Media

Logging Path

Main Memory

//Xpanel/Log//

SD Memory

//Log//

USB Memory

//Log//

Object Style & Trend Area Style

The ‘
Object Style’and ‘
Trend Area Style’configuration tab decide the color of trend window as shown in the
following sample picture.

240

CIMON-Xpanel

Pen

A trend can be assigned maximum 8 pens. Each pen has its own properties and these properties must be
configured individually.

Trend

Tagname

241

Define a TAG for each pen. Xpanel will log the value of this TAG in memory
periodically. Maximum 5000 data can be logged in memory for each pen.

Comment

Designate a display name of pen. This name will be shown at the bottom of trend
window, as shown in the following example.

Min Value / Max Designate the minimum and maximum values of Y axis. If these values are denoted as
Value

question mark (‘
?’
), those values defined in the TAG database will be applied.

Pen Color

Designate a color to the pen.

242

CIMON-Xpanel

Control Button

If the ‘
Show Control Buttons’option is checked, the operator can use the ‘
Control Button’of the trend as
shown in the following example.

Switch the trending mode between real-time and historical.
Up and down page of the trending window. These buttons are activated only at
historical mode.
Zoom in or out page of the trending window.
Change the primary pen. Min/Max values of Y axis are those of the primary pen.
Open the online trend configuration tool. The following picture shows the online
configuration tool window. Operator can change the monitoring time and pen by using
this tool.

Trend

243

Legend

The date and TAG value can be shown or hidden by option in ‘
Legend’tab.
Following example window shows the ‘
Date’and ‘
TAG Value’area which can be controlled by above options.

Grid

244

CIMON-Xpanel

The number of grids and their color can be configured in this configuration tab. Following sample picture
shows the grids with above configuration.

Y-Axis Legend & X-Axis Legend

The legend of each axis can be hidden or shown by the above options. Following sample trend shows those
two legends.

Trend

19.2

245

Scope Trend
The ‘
Scope Trend’is useful at the system of test equipment. This trend can display maximum 8 different sampled
data lists on the same window.
The sampled data lists can be located in device memory or Xpanel’
s log file.

Trend Config

Display Basis

Designate the side which represents the origin of X axis. For example, if the ‘
Right’is
selected, the right most trend screen will be the position of index zero (0) data.

246

CIMON-Xpanel

Object Style & Line Color

The ‘
Object Style’and ‘
Line Color’configuration tab decide the color of trend window as shown in the
following sample picture.

Pen

A trend can be assigned maximum 8 pens. Each pen has its own properties and these properties must be
configured individually.
The scope trend can read the pen data not only from the device memory but also from the logged data file
of Xpanel.

Trend

247

Using DataLog

If this field was checked, then all the declared data logger models are listed in the

Model

combo-box as shown in the following picture.
When one of data logger models is chosen, the TAGs registered in this data logger
model are automatically listed in the pen list.
If this field was not checked, then Xpanel will read pen data from the device
memory. Following dialog box is used for defining the properties of each pen.

Tagname

Define a TAG for each pen. In case of scope trend, this TAG’
s address represents the
origin of a Y axis data list.

Comment

Designate a display name of pen.

Min Value / Max These items have no meaning in scope trend.
Value
Pen Color

Designate a color to the pen.

248

CIMON-Xpanel

Grid

The number of grids and their color can be configured in this configuration tab. Following sample picture
shows the grids with above configuration.

Y-Axis Legend & X-Axis Legend

The legend of each axis can be hidden or shown by the above options. Following sample trend shows those
two legends. The ‘
Size (Pixcels)’configuration item decides the width of Y-Axis legend.

Trend

249

Scope Option

Data Porint

Every data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have the shape of
rectangular.
· [Size (Pixels)] : Designate the size of dot in the unit of pixel.

Draw Border

The outline of the trend window can be shown by this option. Please refer to the
following sample picture.

250

CIMON-Xpanel

Scope Tags

Following TAGs must be configured in this configuration tab.

Control Bit

This field is effective only on device memory based trend. If the trend is based on data
logger model, just leave this field as empty.
If the trend is based on the device memory sampled data, designate a real digital TAG to
this field. (The virtual digital TAG can not be used for this ‘
Control Bit’
.) The TAG is used for
handshaking purpose while transferring sampled data. The PLC sequence program can be

Trend

251

noticed the data transfer by monitoring ON (1) signal of this TAG. During this signal, the
time schedule data should not be modified for data consistency.
Control

Designate an analog TAG. The value of this TAG controls the trend window as shown in the
following table.

Value

Action

Clear the trending window

Clear the current trend window and draw a new time schedule trend.

Other Values

No action.

This analog TAG can be a real TAG as well as a virtual TAG. This means that the sequence
program in PLC can control or update the trend window of Xpanel.
Data Count

This field indicates total number of sampled data in device memory. It can be the range
between 1 and 2048. This field is not effective on data logger model based trend.

Minimum /

These fields specify the range of Y axis. The specified range is effective to all pens.

Maximum
Block Number

This field is effective only on the data logger based trend. The block number of logged data
is identified by the value of this TAG.

19.3

SPC Trend
The ‘
SPC Trend’has no time axis. All axes are based on sampled or predefined value lists stored in the device.
The SPC trend visualizes the relationship between those data. X axis can be assigned only one data list. Y axis can
be assigned maximum 8 different data lists. Note that all those data lists must be stored in device memory.
Xpanel supports a real-time cursor which represents the position from current X and Y values.
Following picture shows the first configuration tab page of SPC trend. As shown in this picture, there is no need
to time configuration.

Trend Config

252

CIMON-Xpanel

Display Basis

Designate the side which represents the minimum value of X axis. For example, if the
Right’is selected, the right most trend screen will be the position of lowest X axis value.
‘

Object Style & Line Color

The ‘
Object Style’and ‘
Line Color’configuration tab decide the color of trend window as shown in the
following sample picture.

Trend

253

Pen

A trend can be assigned maximum 8 pens. Each pen has its own properties and these properties must be
configured individually.

Tagname

Define a TAG for each pen. In case of SPC trend, this TAG’
s address represents the

Comment

origin of a Y axis data list.
Designate a display name of pen.

254

CIMON-Xpanel

Min Value / Max These items have no meaning in SPC trend.
Value
Pen Color

Designate a color to the pen.

Grid

The number of grids and their color can be configured in this configuration tab. Following sample picture
shows the grids with above configuration.

Y-Axis Legend & X-Axis Legend

The legend of each axis can be hidden or shown by the above options. Following sample trend shows those
two legends. The ‘
Size (Pixcels)’configuration item decides the width of Y-Axis legend.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Trend

255

SPC Option

Using Moving

The moving point is a real-time data cursor. This point moves at every data update. The

Point

coordinate of the movement is calculated by the TAG values of ‘
X Axis Moving’and ‘
Y
Axis Moving’configuration items. Please refer to the next section for information about
these configuration items.
· [Color] : The real-time data cursor has the shape of small rectangular dot. The color
of this dot can be designated. Please refer to the following example picture.
· [Size (Pixels)] : Designate the size of cursor in the unit of pixel.

256

CIMON-Xpanel

Data Point

Every data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have the shape of
rectangular.

Draw Border

· [Size (Pixels)] : Designate the size of dot in the unit of pixel.
The outline of the trend window can be shown by this option. Please refer to the

Draw Data

following sample picture.
If this option is checked, lines will be drawn between every neighboring data. Please

Connection

refer to the following sample picture.

SPC Tags

Trend

257

Following TAGs must be configured in this configuration tab.

Control

Designate an analog TAG. The value of this TAG controls the trend window as shown in
the following table.

Value

Action

Draw a new trend without clearing (overwrite).

Clear the trending window

Clear the current trend window and draw a new trend.

Other Values

No action.

This analog TAG can be a real TAG as well as a virtual TAG. This means that the
sequence program in PLC can control or update the trend window of Xpanel.
Data Count

Designate an analog TAG. The value of this TAG represents the number of data be
drawn in the trend window. It can be a value between 0 and 2048.

X Axis Min. /

Designate analog TAGs. The values of these TAGs reconfigure the range of X axis when

Max

the ‘
Control’TAG’
s value is changed to 1 or 3.

Y Axis Min. /

Designate analog TAGs. The values of these TAGs reconfigure the range of Y axis when

Max

the ‘
Control’TAG’
s value is changed to 1 or 3.

Control Bit

Designate a real digital TAG. (The virtual digital TAG can not be used for this ‘
Control
Bit’
.) The TAG is used for handshaking purpose while the transfer of trend data. The
PLC sequence program can be noticed the data transfer by monitoring ON (1) signal of
this TAG. During this signal, the trend data should not be modified for data consistency.

X Axis Moving / Designate analog TAGs which represent the coordinate of real-time cursor. These
Y Axis Moving

configurations are valid only when the ‘
Using Moving Point’option of ‘
SPC Option’tab
was checked.

X Axis Start

Designate a real analog TAG. (The virtual TAG can not be used in this field.) The device
address of the designated TAG is considered as the origin (start address) of X axis data.
Xpanel assumes that the data are stored continuously in device memory and the length
of data is the value stored in the TAG of ‘
Data Count’field.

258

19.4

CIMON-Xpanel

ST Trend
The ‘
ST Trend’is useful at the system of temperature control and monitoring. This trend provides a display
solution for time schedule of control. Maximum 8 different schedules and 2 real-time traces can be displayed in
the same trend window. The schedule data are composed of a time span and destination value pair. Each
schedule data can include up to 2048 pairs of schedule point. The X axis of ST trend is an accumulated time of
those schedule data. The configuration of ST trend is described as followings.

Trend Config

Display Basis

Designate the side which represents the time origin of X axis. For example, if the ‘
Right’
is selected, the right most trend screen will be the position of zero (0).

Sampling Time

Designate the sampling time for real-time trace. The unit of this time is 100 mSec.

Object Style & Line Color

Trend

259

The ‘
Object Style’and ‘
Line Color’configuration tab decide the color of trend window as shown in the
following sample picture.

Pen

A pen of ST trend represents a time schedule. Maximum 8 different time schedules can be displayed in the
same trend window.

The pen of ST trend must have a given data format. Each point in a time schedule is represented by a pair
of data as shown in the above diagram. One preceding datum (delta-T of above diagram) represents the
time duration and the other following datum (v of above diagram) represents the control value. These two
data pair represents a point in trend window and those pairs should be stored in the continuous device
memory.
The TAGs which will be designated in the following dialog box should have the address of the first delta-T.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

260

CIMON-Xpanel

Tagname

Designate a TAG which represents the first data memory address of time schedule list.

Comment

Designate a description of the pen.

Min Value / Max These items have no meaning in ST trend.
Value
Pen Color

Designate a color to the pen.

Data Count Tags

Designate the analog TAG which has the number of total pen data. As noted in the previous part, a pen data
is expressed with a pair of two values. Hence, this TAG must have the value of 2n (n is the number of time

Trend

261

schedule points).

Grid

The number of grids and their color can be configured in this configuration tab. Following sample picture
shows the grids with above configuration.

Y- Axis Legend & X-Axis Legend

The legend of each axis can be hidden or shown by the above options. Following sample trend shows those
two legends. The ‘
Size (Pixcels)’configuration item decides the width of Y-Axis legend.

262

CIMON-Xpanel

The X-Axis legend has 4 different time expression formats as shown in the above picture. One of them can
be chosen as an actual format.

ST Trend Options

Trace Point

Every trace data can be distinguished by dots. These dots have the shape of
rectangular.
· [Color] : The real-time trace data cursor has the shape of small rectangular dot. The

Trend

263

color of this dot can be designated. Please refer to the following example picture.
Data Point

· [Size (Pixels)] : Designate the size of dot in the unit of pixel.
Every time schedule data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have
the shape of rectangular.

Draw Border

[Size] : Designate the size of dot in the unit of pixel.
The outline of the trend window can be shown by this option. Please refer to the
following sample picture.

ST Tags

Following TAGs must be configured in this configuration tab.

264

CIMON-Xpanel

Control Bit

Designate a real digital TAG. (The virtual digital TAG can not be used for this ‘
Control Bit’
.)
The TAG is used for handshaking purpose while the transfer of time schedule data. The PLC
sequence program can be noticed the data transfer by monitoring ON (1) signal of this TAG.

Control

During this signal, the time schedule data should not be modified for data consistency.
Designate an analog TAG. The value of this TAG controls the trend window as shown in the
following table.

Value

Action

Clear the trending window

Clear the current trend window and draw a new time schedule trend.

Starts the real time trace

Pauses the real time trace

Resets the real time trace

Other Values

No action.

This analog TAG can be a real TAG as well as a virtual TAG. This means that the sequence
program in PLC can control or update the trend window of Xpanel.
Trace Point

Designate an analog TAG to be traced. ST trend collects the data of this TAG at every
sampling period, and stores the data in memory up to 2048 samples. Those sampled trace
data will be drawn on the trending window by real time. The real time trace data can be
easily visualized and compared with the time schedule data which were drawn already in
trending window.

Trend

265

Minimum

Minimum’represents the minimum value of the Y axis. It can be designated by not only a
‘

Value / Using

fixed value but also a TAG. If the ‘
Using Fixed Minimum Value’item was checked, the

Fixed Minimum minimum value should be given by fixed constant.
Value
Maximum

Maximum’represents the maximum value of the Y axis. It can be designated by not only a
‘

Value / Using

fixed value but also a TAG. If the ‘
Using Fixed Maximum Value’item was checked, the

Fixed Maximum maximum value should be given by fixed constant.

19.5

Value
Trace Display

Trace Display Time’represents the maximum value of the X axis. It can be designated by not
‘

Time / Using

only a fixed value but also a TAG. The unit of display time is second. If the ‘
Using Fixed Trace

Fixed Trace

Display Time’item was checked, the maximum time value in second should be given by fixed

Display Time

constant.

LOG Trend
The ‘
Log Trend’is similar to the ‘
YT Trend’
. It is based on a time axis, and 16 different data can be displayed at
the same time.
However, the ‘
Log Trend’does not require the periodical data sampling. The data can be sampled or initialized at
any time by a trigger.

Trend Config

266

CIMON-Xpanel

Display Basis

Designate the side which represents the origin of X axis. For example, if the ‘
Right’is
selected, the right most trend screen will be the position of index zero (0) data.

File Saving

This option generates CSV formatted file at runtime. At every 10 seconds all the
sampled data is written to the log file in CSV format. A log file includes up to 30,000
logs. One of three kinds of non-volatile memory media can be chosen for the storage of
log files. Following table shows the logging path of each media.

Media

Logging Path & CSV File name

Main Memory

//Xpanel/Log//YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV

SD Memory

//Log//YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV

USB Memory

//Log//YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV

Following picture is a sample view of CSV log file.

Trend

Object Style & Line Color

The ‘
Object Style’and ‘
Line Color’configuration tab decide the color of trend window as shown in the
following sample picture.

Pen

267

268

CIMON-Xpanel

A trend can be assigned maximum 16 pens. Each pen has its own properties and these properties must be
configured individually.

Tagname

Define a TAG for each pen.

Comment

Designate a display name of the pen.

Min Value / Max In log trend each pen can be assigned different minimum and maximum Y axes values.
Value

The minimum value must be assigned as a smaller value than maximum value.

Pen Color

Designate a color to the pen.

Grid

The number of grids and their color can be configured in this configuration tab. Following sample picture
shows the grids with above configuration.
If ‘
Using Multi-Channel’of ‘
Log Option’tab was checked, the Y-Axis grid number has no meaning. Y-axis grid

Trend

269

is not displayed when multi-channel trend mode.

Y-Axis Legend & X-Axis Legend

The legend of each axis can be hidden or shown by the above options. Following sample trend shows those
two legends. The ‘
Size (Pixcels)’configuration item decides the width of Y-Axis legend.

270

CIMON-Xpanel

Log Option

The log trend specific options can be configured in this tab.

Buffer Size

Log trend keeps the sampled data in Xpanel’
s memory. This field specifies the size of
buffer for sampled data.

Sampling Type

Log trend can handle not only periodically sampled data but also trigger sampled data.
This field decides which type of sampling to be used.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Trend

Sampling Time

271

If the periodical sampling type was chosen at ‘
Sampling Type’field, the trend needs the
period in 100mSec. unit.

Trigger Tag

If the trigger sampling type was chosen at ‘
Sampling Type’field, the trend needs the
name of TAG which represents the trigger signal. The sampling is done when this signal
changes from zero to non-zero value.

Control Tag

This TAG controls the operation of trend window. The table below shows the effects of
each code that this control TAG can have.

Value

Action

Do the normal sampling and trending job.

Pause the sampling and trending job.

Reset and clear the sampling buffer.

Other Values

No action.

Data Point : Size

Every sampled data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have the

(Pixels)

shape of rectangular. Designate the size of dot in the unit of pixel.

Draw Border

The outline of the trend window can be shown by this option. Following picture shows
the border of trend window.

19.6

XY Trend
The ‘XY Trend’has no time axis like the ‘SPC Trend’. And it does not take block data from device, but the Xpanel
collects the trending data periodically or on every trigger event. This trend can display the correlation between a
designated data (X-axis) and up to 16 data (Y-axis). Maximum 800 pairs of correlation data are maintained in
memory.

272

CIMON-Xpanel

Trend Config

File Saving
This option generates CSV formatted file at runtime. At every 10 seconds all the sampled data is written to
the log file in CSV format. A log file includes up to 30,000 logs. One of three kinds of non-volatile memory
media can be chosen for the storage of log files. Following table shows the logging path of each media.

Media

Logging Path & CSV File name

Main Memory

//XPanel/Log//YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV

SD Memory

//Log//YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV

USB Memory

//Log//YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV

Following picture is a sample view of CSV log file.

Trend

Object Style & Line Color

The ‘
Object Style’and ‘
Line Color’configuration tab decide the color of trend window as shown in the
following sample picture.

Pen

273

274

CIMON-Xpanel

A trend can be assigned maximum 16 pens. Each pen has its own properties and these properties must be
configured individually.

Tagname

Define a TAG for each pen.

Comment

Designate a display name of the pen.

Min Value / Max In log trend each pen can be assigned different minimum and maximum Y axes values.
Value

The minimum value must be assigned as a smaller value than maximum value.

Pen Color

Designate a color to the pen.

Grid

The number of grids and their color can be configured in this configuration tab. Following sample picture

Trend

275

shows the grids with above configuration.

Y-Axis Legend & X-Axis Legend

The legend of each axis can be hidden or shown by the above options. Following sample trend shows those
two legends. The ‘
Size (Pixcels)’configuration item decides the width of Y-Axis legend.

XY Option

276

CIMON-Xpanel

The XT trend specific options can be configured in this tab.

Buffer Size

XY trend maintains the sampled data in Xpanel’
s memory. This field specifies the size of
buffer for sampled data.

Sampling Type

XY trend can handle not only periodically sampled data but also trigger sampled data.
This field decides which type of sampling to be used.

Sampling Time

If the periodical sampling type was chosen at ‘
Sampling Type’field, the trend needs the
period in 100mSec. unit.

Trigger Tag

Control Tag

This TAG controls the operation of trend window. The table below shows the effects of
each code that this control TAG can have.

Value

Action

Do the normal sampling and trending job.

Pause the sampling and trending job.

Reset and clear the sampling buffer.

Other Values

No action.

Trend

277

Data Point : Size Every sampled data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have the
(Pixels)

shape of rectangular. Designate the size of dot in the unit of pixel.

Draw Border

The outline of the trend window can be shown by this option. Following picture shows
the border of trend window.

Draw Data

This option makes Xpanel draw the line between data points. If this option was not

Connection

checked, then following trend would be displayed. There is no line between points.

Display Time

Xpanel can display the time of last sampled data. This option controls the time will be
shown or not. Please see the picture of ‘
Draw Border’option above.

XY Min/Max

The minimum and maximum values of x axis are configured in this tab. These configurations can be not only
static numbers (fixed value) but also TAGs. When a TAG is assigned to the minimum or maximum value, the
range of x axis would be changed dynamically at runtime.

278

CIMON-Xpanel

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

280

CIMON-Xpanel

String Editor
String editor constructs a number of string groups. These string groups are managed like string tables at
runtime.
Each group can be distinguished by group number. And all the strings defined in each group can be referenced by
index number.
Constructed string groups are useful when there is a need to make (or display) different string according to the
status code.
It can be accomplished by two different ways as shown in the following picture.
One method is done by the String Value graphic object and the other is done by the StringTable() script
function.
These two different applications will be described in next sections of this manual.

See :
· String Construction

20.1

String Construction
String Group Construction

Click - the ‘
Tools’
-‘
String Editor’menu or the

icon.

String Editor

281

A new string group will be created by this icon (menu).
Add String
Group
This icon (menu) deletes a group.
Delete String
Group
A new string can be added to the current group by this icon (menu).
Add String
A string can be modified by this icon or double click of mouse.
Edit String
This icon deletes a selected string.
Delete String

A new multiple language string group will be created by this icon
Insert Multiple (menu).
Language
String Please refer to the section of"Using Multiple Language".
Group

282

CIMON-Xpanel

String Display

Click - the 'Draw’
-‘
String Value' menu

w
to
us
e‘
Str
ing
Val
ue'

String Editor

283

* The string is not output when there is no input string of the value of analog tag in the input string table. (Nul
Ho
w

1) Register - String Tag
(It is necessary to register the string tag that displays the script to use the script.)

to
us
e‘
Stri
ng
Ta
ble
()'

284

CIMON-Xpanel

2) Click - [Tools] -> [Scripts] -> [Add Script]

3) Write -Script Program
Following script example shows the usage of ‘StringTable()’ function. For more information about the
‘StringTable()’, please refer to the section of ‘Script’.

4) Select a Object andClick - [Draw] -> [Tag] -> [Tag Name]

String Editor

285

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

XXI

Using Multiple Language

287

Using Multiple Language
· You can change the displaying language to Korean, Japanese or Chinese by using multiple
language tables.
· If your windows system based language is English, you must install MUI for multiple language.
You can downloadMUI at the Microsoft home page (www.micorsoft.com
).

See :
· How to Set Multiple Language
· Multiple language string display
· Using Multiple Language (Change the displayed language by using multiple language table)

21.1

Multiple Language setup
This manual provides how to use Multiple Language.
By the function, languages of various countries are displayed to the screen.

IN THIS TOPIC :
Register IME

Language and IME Selection

In English Window, IME should be used for inputting the language of another country(Japan, China..).
Following pictures describes how to register IME.
1. Click - [Control Panel] -> [Regional and Language Options]
2. Select - "Languages" Tab -> Click - [Details...]

288

CIMON-Xpanel

3. Check - language and the IME registered inEnglish
the
Window.
4. For example, if you want to input Japanese, Japanese and one more IME should be registered in the
installed service.
5. ow
H to register IME
5.1. Click - [Add]

5.2 Select - Language in 'Input Language'

Using Multiple Language

289

6. Select - IME in 'Keyboard layout/IME'. When the input language is selected, the basic IME is
automatically selected.
7. Click - [Ok]

Language and IME Selection

1. Click - [Control Panel] -> [Regional and Language Options]
2. Select - "Languages" Tab -> Click - [Details...]
3. Click - [Language Bar], Check - "Show the Language Bar on the desktop", Click - [Ok]

4. Select - Language of "Language Bar"

290

CIMON-Xpanel

5. Select - IME by clicking IME icon.

6. Letters are input via the selected IME.

21.2

Multiple language string display
Make - Page to input the string. Register - String by using each language.

1. Change the language to the Japanese in the "Language Bar".

2. Select - [Microsoft Natural Input 2002 ver.8.1] by clicking IME icon
( To select the relative item, the IME of the relative language should be registered in the window.
Refer to the "Multiple Language setup")

3. Change - Input Mode(Hiragana) by clicking "Input Mode" button

4. Input - Japanese using Keyboard
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Using Multiple Language

291

"MS Gothic" in Font Toolbar. MS Gothic selected here is a Japanese basic
5. Change the font to the
font.
It is possible that if the inputted string is not expressed as a designated font, it might not be
expressed normally, so change to the font of the relative country.

1. Change the language to the Chinese in the "Language Bar".

2. Select - [Microsoft Pinyin IME 3.0] by clicking IME icon

3. Change - Input Mode(Chinese) by clicking "Input Mode" button

4. Input - Chinese using Keyboard

"SimSun" in Font Toolbar. SimSun selected here is Chinese
5. Change the font to the
a
basic font.

292

CIMON-Xpanel

It is possible to use it by inputting other languages except Japanese and Chinese to Xpanel.

21.3

Using Multiple Language (Change the displayed language by
using multiple language table)
·

You can change the displaying language to Korean, Japanese or Chinese by using multiple
language tables.

If your windows system based language is English, you must install MUI for multiple language.
You can downloadMUI at the Microsoft home page (www.micorsoft.com
).

IN THIS TOPIC :
Configure Multiple Language
Register Multiple Language Table
Multiple language table display by using multiple language string.

Configure Multiple Language
1.Tools -> Project

2.
Click Language Configuration button to open multi language configuration window.

Using Multiple Language

293

3.Check “use multiple language” for using multiple language.
4.Register analog tag at “Table Control Tag” to control column. For example, above figure

shows that selects valid tag as like “COLSEL” and
it decides referencing column by its value.
5.
When program runs the initial column indicated by ‘Table initial Value’.
6.Register language name and representative font at Language 0 ~ 9.

Language string register at ‘multiple language tables’and it displayed here with registered
name and font.

294

CIMON-Xpanel

2.Before you register multiple language tables, click button )( to register language which

will be used.

3.
After above language setting, Column 0 is Korean(Gulim), Column 1 is Chineses(SimSun)

and Column 2 is Japanese(MS Gothic).

4.
After complete registering language, click ‘OK’ to save the configurations.

Using Multiple Language

295

5.
Click “Add String Group” button (), select “Multiple Column” and then “OK”. Multiple

column is string group having 16 columns and
Single column is string group having only one column.

6.
Select one group in the already registered, click “Add String” button() to open add string

window.

7.
Input string at each column while changing IME. At above example shows inputting multiple

languages.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

296

CIMON-Xpanel

Column 0 is configured Korean, so use Korean IME for inputting string. Column 1 is
configured Chinese,
so use Chinese IME for inputting string. Input strings to remained table by the same method.
8.
String table allows Cut & Past at Excel.

Multiple language table display by using multiple language string.
1. Multiple language string object display changed column of indicated string group which

controlled by “Table Control Tag”.
2.
Select ‘Draw -> Muli String’or click button )( to make object at page.

Using Multiple Language

297

3.
Input the value at String Group and String Value.
4.
According this procedure, make the multi String object and download this project.

If you change the tag(you registered as “COLSEL”) for control multiple language table to 0,1,2
then you can see the
俄 色 的 德 大 ? ? 佛 ? ? ”,”
あ あ で ｆ っ で ぶ ぷ で へ べ ほ ”.
displaying string changed 가to나“다 ”,”
Each displayed strings
reference indicated font at corresponding column.
“
*Table Control Value"s value means string table column number and it is irrelevant to the
order of registered language
at language configuration window.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

XXII

Network Data Server

299

Network Data Server
Xpanel provides TAG values to CIMON SCADA system through Ethernet. For this purpose, there are two memory
areas in Xpanel as shown in the
following picture. Each memory area has 1,000 buffers. The SCADA system can read and write those memory
areas through Ethernet.

Following sections describe how to define the memories in Xpanel and configure the network and SCADA.

See :
· Data Definition in Xpanel
· The Configuration of CIMON SCADA

22.1

Data Definition in Xpanel
To enable the network data server service, the service memory areas need to be configured. Use the
Tools’
-‘
Data Server’menu or the
‘

icon.

300

CIMON-Xpanel

Following picture shows the memory definition window of Xpanel.
The memory is composed with two areas. One area is data memory (D) and the other is string memory (S).
Each area can be filled with up to 1,000 TAGs.
And these TAGs are designated the address ranged from 0 to 999.

Analog and digital TAG can be assigned in ‘
D’area. The ‘
D’memory area has the value of floating point type.
On the other side, only the string TAG can be assigned in ‘
S’memory.

Point
The data server function needs a fixed IP address in network. For configuring the IP address of Xpanel,
please refer to the section of “Configuration”of this manual.

22.2

The Configuration of CIMON SCADA
Device Driver Configuration

CIMON SCADA deals the Xpanel just like a general device such as PLC.
That is, the same concept of configuration as PLC is applied to Xpanel in SCADA.

1. Create a Device First of all, the Xpanel must be registered in SCADA system though the ‘
I/O device
configuration’window as shown in the following picture.

Network Data Server

301

Choose the ‘
I/O Device Type’as “KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-XPANEL Ethernet”
in the above windows. The following picture shows the dialog boxes for
configuration of Xpanel.

2. Create a Station

Every Xpanel registered as a station has to be identified by its IP address. Specify

302

CIMON-Xpanel

the IP address of Xpanel at “#1-1 IP Address”field of above window.

3. Create the
Comm.Block

If the station is created successfully, then define the communication blocks which
include the data to be used. The Xpanel provides two different memory areas, ‘
D’
and ‘
S’
. These two memory areas are described in the previous section of this
chapter.

Point
Ensure that all data to be monitored are included in the ‘
COM Block’
. Otherwise,
it will not be monitored normally during online.

4. Identify the
SCADA
IP Address

Network Data Server

303

The IP address of SCADA itself must be identified. Move to the “COM Port”tab of
the main dialog box.
And give the IP address of SCADA to the “#1 IP Address”field as shown in the
above picture.

TAG Configuration

1. Analog / Digital
Tag

The ‘
D’memory area can be used as an analog or digital TAG in SCADA.
In the case of analog TAG, the ‘
Float’data type is recommended as shown in
the following picture.

304

CIMON-Xpanel

In the case of digital TAG, the value is 1 (true) when the value from Xpanel is
non-zero.
Ensure that the address of TAG is included in the ‘
COM Block’definition.
Otherwise, the data is not monitored normally at online.

2. String TAG
The ‘
S’memory area can be used in the string TAG in SCADA as shown in the
following picture.

Point
1. The maximum length of the string is 80 characters (bytes).
COM Block’
2. Ensure that the address of TAG is included in the ‘
definition.
Otherwise, the data is not monitored normally at online.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

XXIII

306

CIMON-Xpanel

Security
Xpanel provides the security function which protects the secret screen or operation from unauthorized
access.
Every regal user, screen and touch operation in Xpanel has its own privilege level. The 11 privilege levels are
denoted by the number from 0 to 10.
The zero is the lowest level. The operator can see the page or operate the touch zone which has lower
privilege level than his.

See :
· User Registration
· Access Privilege
· User LogOn / LogOff

23.1

User Registration
The Xpanel Designer provides a tool for user security configuration as shown in the following picture.

Security

Above user security configuration tool can be opened by ‘
Tools’
-‘
Security’menu or the

icon in

toolbar.
Each user has following properties.

User ID

User ID can be any combination of alpha-numeric characters.
The maximum length of ID string is 15 characters.

Level

Assign the privilege level of the user.
This level can be a number between 0 and 10. 10 is the most authorized level.

Password

Only the numeric characters (‘
0’to ‘
9’
) can be used as password.
The maximum length of password string is 15 characters.

307

308

CIMON-Xpanel

Description

Give a simple description to the user data.
The maximum length of description is 256 characters.

Log On action

This field is not necessarily edited. But, it is very useful when there is a need to do

Script

something at user logon.
Describe the command script in this field.
Please refer to the ‘
Script’section for more information about the ‘
command script’
.

Log Off Action

This field is not necessarily edited. But, it is very useful when there is a need to do

Script

something at user logoff.
Describe the command script in this field.
Please refer to the ‘
Script’section for more information about the ‘
command script’
.

23.2

Access Privilege
Xpanel provides the security for page and touch operation.
The user can access the page and touch zone which have the equal or lower privilege level than his.

Page Security

Security

309

The page security can be configured at ‘
Page Properties’window as shown in the above picture.
This window can be opened by ‘
Tools’
-‘
Page Setup’menu.Every pages are designated a security level
between 0 and 10.
Zero level is the default and lowest level. The user whose privilege level is lower than this cannot access
(open) the page.

Touch Operation Security

310

CIMON-Xpanel

Touch zone security configuration is performed based on the above dialog box.
This dialog box is the ‘
Object Config’window. The ‘
Touch’and ‘
EntryData’have the ‘
Security’property page.
Assign a security level to this field.
The user whose privilege level is lower than this cannot access (touch) this object.

23.3

User LogOn / LogOff
Xpanel system’
s default user privilege level is zero. The default user privilege level is applied when there is no
logon user in Xpanel system.
To logon Xpanel system, the operator must submit his ID and password though the following window.
This window is popped up by “LogOnWin()”command or function.

Xpanel provides following functions for security manipulation.

Security

Please refer to the section of ‘
Script’for more information.

LogOnWin()

Pop up the ID and password entry dialog box.

LogOn(“I D”,

Log on without user interface.

“Password”)

This level can be a number between 0 and 10. 10 is the most authorized level.

LogOff()

Log off the current user.
The security level of system is returned to the default level (zero).

GetSecurity()

Get current security level of system. (0..10)

311

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

XXIV

Script

313

Script
The script of Xpanel is very similar with the ‘C’programming language. Variables can be used in script.
And script provides function call mechanism and supports almost keywords defined in standard ‘C’ language
such as switch-case, for, while, if-else, goto.
All user programmed scripts are executed in multi-thread environment.
Each script is assigned a priority among total 10 levels, such that the execution speed of a script is dependent
on this level. (most high priority = 10, most low priority = 1)
· Uses the ‘C’ language style statement
· All TAGs defined in Xpanel database can be used as variables in script. It does not need additional
definition, symbol or configuration.
That means, values of all TAGs can be referenced or changed in every script program freely.
· Two kinds of variable types are supported, real and string type. Actual type of a variable is decided
automatically during program execution.
But, only one type of value can be used in a script scope. All real type data are processed in 64 bits.
· Does not distinguish capital letters. That is, ‘VAR’and ‘var’are the same keyword.
See :
· Structure of Program
· Operator
· Scripts for command and condition
· Statements
· Internal Functions

24.1

Structure of Program
Declaration Part
Declare internal variables and input parameters
Program Part
All program statements can be located here.
Except declarations.

Comments can be located on any place in a script.
A comment must be started by ‘
//’and all strings following this symbol are treated as a comment
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

314

CIMON-Xpanel

string until the end of a line.

Declaration Part

Variable
Declaration

VAR variable_name [, variable_name];
Declare internal variables. The scope of these variables restricted in a declared
script.
The initial value of declared variable is zero. If there is need to declare several
variables, comma(,) can be used between each variable name. This statement can
be used in multiple, until the beginning of program part.

Input

PARAM 1 stparameter [, 2ndparameter … ] ;

Parameter
Declaration

This declaration is needed when the program can be called by another program or
command statements.
The order of declaration must be matched with the order of input parameters.
Parameters will be initialized with input parameters from caller. If there is need to
declare multiple parameters,
use comma (,) between parameter names.
This statement can be used in multiple, until the beginning of program part.
Example : MyPgm
VAR a, b;
VAR c;
PARAM p1, p2;
PARAM p3;

Assume that the name of above example program is ‘
MyPgm’
.
This program can be called by external program or command line as following
statement.

MyPgm(1, 2, 3);
Parameters p1, p2, p3 will be initialized to 1, 2, 3 each. Notice that variables a, b, c
will be initialized to zero.

Program Part

In program part, all the programming statements can be used except variable(VAR) and parameter(PARAM)
declarations.

Script

315

Calculation, storing a data in some variable, function call and many other expressions can be used in a
statement.
Following is a simple example of statements.

Tag_a = Tag_a + 1;
Tag_b = MyPgm(Tag_a, 2, 3);

A statement must be ended by ‘
;’character.
All functions return a value to caller. In the above program example, the returned value will be stored in
Tag_b.

Constants

Following notation is used for each type of constant.

Number characters between 0 and 7 can be used. It must be started by zero. (ex : 01277)

tal
co
nst
ant
De

Normal notation is used. (ex : 15, 3.14, 2.45E-12)

ci
ma
l
co
nst
ant
He

It must be started with ‘
0x’
. Alphabet and number character between ‘
0’ ‘
F’can be used. (ex : 0xFFFF)

xa
de
ci
ma
l
co
nst
ant
Str A string must be described between two ‘
“’
. (ex : "string variable " )
ing
co
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

316

CIMON-Xpanel

nst
ant
Pr

_PI_ (pi : 3.14......) etc. (refer to the following table)

Constant Name

Value/Usage

efi

_PI_

3.141592...... (pi)

_LOCAL_

0, Local flash memory

_SDMEM_

1, SD/MMC memory

_USBMEM_

2, USB memory

nst

_COM232_

0, COM1, RS232C mode

ant

_COM422_

1, COM1, RS422 mode

_COM485_

2, COM1, RS485 mode

_COMAUX_

3, COM2 (RS232C only)

_BPS300_

300 bps

_BPS600_

600 bps

_BPS1200_

1200 bps

_BPS2400_

2400 bps

_BPS4800_

4800 bps

_BPS9600_

9600 bps

_BPS19200_

19200 bps

_BPS38400_

38400 bps

_BPS56000_

56000 bps

_BPS57600_

57600 bps

_BPS115200_

115200 bps

_BPS128000_

128000 bps

_BPS256000_

256000 bps

_PARITY_NONE_

No parity

_PARITY_EVEN_

Even parity

_PARITY_ODD_

Odd parity

_PARITY_MARK_

Mark parity

_PARITY_SPACE_

Space parity

_STOPBIT_ONE_

1 stop bit

_STOPBIT_TWO_

2 stop bits

_STOPBIT_ONE5_

1.5 stop bit

_ALMPRT_ALL_

Print all items of alarm data

_ALMPRT_TIME_

Print the time of alarm data

_ALMPRT_ADDR_

Print the address of alarm point

_ALMPRT_VALUE_

Print the value of alarm

_ALMPRT_TYPE_

Print the alarm type

_ALMPRT_DESC_

Print the alarm description

Remark

Can be used as parameters for functions or
commands.

COM port number. See the serial
communication functions.

Baudrate code. See the OpenPort() function.

Parity code. See the OpenPort() function.

Stopbit code. See the OpenPort() function.

Option flags for AlarmPrint() function.

Script

24.2

_UINT_

Unsinged integer

_INT_

Signed integer

_FLOAT_

Floating point value

_HEX_

Hexa-decimal number

_EXP_

Real number with exponent

Data type options. These definition can be
used in the NumToStr() function.

Operator
Operators for calculation

The result row of following table assumes that the value of variable ‘
A’is 3 and ‘
B’is 4.
Operator

Description

Example

Result

Addition

A+B

Subtraction

-1

Multiplication

A*B

Division

A/B

0.75

A%B

Bitwise

OR(1)

A|B

Bitwise

AND(1)

A&B

Bitwise

XOR(1)

A^B

Bitwise

Invert(1)

0xFFFFFFFC

Bitwise Shift Left

A << B

Bitwise Shift Right

A >> B

|
&
^

(1)

Remainder of

division(1)

Remainder of division (%) and all bitwise operators are performed with 32 bits integer data.

Logical/Comparative Operators

The result row of following table assumes that the value of variable ‘
A’is 2 (true) and ‘
B’is 0 (false).
Xpanel treats all values except zero as logical TRUE. Only zero is treated as logical FALSE.
When the result of logical operation is TRUE, the value 1 will be returned and stored.

Operator

Description

Example

Result

Logical AND

A && B

0 (false)

Logical OR

A || B

1 (true)

Logical NOT

0 (false)

EQUAL

A == B

0 (false)

NOT EQUAL

A != B

1 (true)

317

318

CIMON-Xpanel

Big

A>B

1 (true)

>= or =>

Big or Equal

A >= B

1 (true)

Small

Big

A>B

>= or =>

Big or Equal

A >= B

Small

A [CIMON-XPANEL Setup(X)] -> [Using Scroll Message] -> [Scroll Message]

Configuration Items

369

370

CIMON-Xpanel

Scroll Message

Scroll Message is created from the bottom of the screen.

Height

So scroll message height must be shorter than screen height.

Text Size

Configure text size of scroll message. Text size must smaller than scroll message
height

Scroll Message

It configures distance between messages.

Gap
Scroll Message

It configures message scrolling speed.

Speed
Text Color, Back

It configures text color and background color.

Color
Scroll Direction

25.2

It configures the scrolled direction.

Apply Scroll Message
Apply from alarms

[Tools] -> [Alarms] -> [Add],[Edit] -> [Apply Scroll Message]

Scroll Message

Message index at alarms
When scroll messages are applied from alarms, each message is allowed index automatically.
Please reference scroll message index generated automatically from the alarms as the following.

Alarm Group

Index number

Group 1

10000 - 10063

Group 2

10100 - 10163

Group 3

10200 - 10263

Group 4

10300 - 10363

Group 5

10400 - 10463

Group 6

10500 - 10563

Group 7

10600 - 10663

Group 8

10700 - 10763

Group 9

10800 - 10863

Group 10

10900 - 10963

Apply scroll message using script

371

372

CIMON-Xpanel

You can apply scroll message by using script function.
When you add scroll messages, you must attend the scroll message index. If it is duplicated, it will not be
added.

AddMessage(R1, S2)
[R1] Appling Index(0-9999)
[S2] Appling Message

Example ) AddMessage(1, "Warning")

Ad
d
me
ss
ag
e

Re
mo
ve
Me
ss

RemoveMessage(R1)
[R1] Removing Index(0-9999, If you use number-1, then it will remove all items)
Example )RemoveMessabe(1);

ag
e

Scroll Message

373

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

XXVI

Indirect Address

375

Indirect Address
Indirect Tag

The indirect tag is to describe one tag by two tags that are divided into Target tag and Offset tag.
As described by the indirect tag, the address of Target tag is handled to change, referring to the tag’s value
designated as Offset tag.
For example, if the tag’s value designated as Offset tag is 0, it will be same value with the designated
address of tag designated as Target tag
Also, if the value of Target tag is 2, it will express the value that is 2 plus the address designated to Target
tag.

Notation Method

Write - “# ” between Target Tag and Offset Tag
Ex) Target_Tag#Offset_Tag

Attention

Offset tag is that all analogue tag and digital tag with sate value(in case of I/O device, there are some tags
without sate value) are registered,
but Target tag is specified only real tag with the I/O device below.
In case of using the tag with I/O device that is not described on the bottom is managed as normal tag.

Supporting Indirect Tag Device

KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC
KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI
KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC Loader
KDT SYSTEMS XPANEL
Allen Bradley DF1
DELTA TAU PMAC Drive
FUJI Micrex SX
KEYENCE PLC (KV mode)
KOYO DirectNet
LSIS GLOFA PLC Cnet
LSIS GLOFA PLC Enet

376

CIMON-Xpanel

LSIS Master-K S-Series Enet
LSIS Master-K H Series PLC Cnet
LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Cnet
LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Loader
LSIS XGT/XGB Series PLC Cnet
LSIS XGT Series FEnet
MITSUBISHI MELSEC A Loader
MITSUBISHI MELSEC 1C (AnA/Anu CPU)
MITSUBISHI MELSEC 1C (A CPU)
MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX
MITSUBISHI MELSEC 1E
MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3E
MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3E (ASCII)
MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX Loader
MITSUBISHI MELSEC-Q Loader (Q00/01)
MITSUBISHI MELSEC-Q Loader (Q02/06/12/25)
YASKAWA MEMOBUS RTU
MODBUS ASCII protocl
MODBUS RTU protocl
MODBUS TCP
MAIS FPO MEWTOCOL-COM
OMRON PLC (Host Link)
SIEMENS RK512/3964R
SIEMENS S7 Ethernet
SIEMENS S7 MPI
SIEMENSE S7 PPI Direct
SAIA S-BUS
YOKOGAWA Computer Link Protocol
It is ignored when the value of Offset tag is under 0, and numbers under a decimal point are thrown.

26.1

Using Indirect Tag
Indirect Tag can be used byfollowingfunctions.

Supporting Functions of Indirect Tag

Tag Value, Key Input Window, String Value, Animation bitmap, Visible, Blink, V-Size, H-Size, V-Move, HMove, Color, Rotate, Touch, Entry Data, Command, Script.

Example for Indirect Tag

Indirect Address

377

Register - I/O device to support the Indirect Tag
Refer to the Indirect Device Item described ahead. "KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI" is used here.

ANA_01 -> Target Tag

378

CIMON-Xpanel

ANA_00 -> Offset Tag
Open a Page and Select a Tag Value Object. Register "Object Configuration" as follows.

Display - The value of Offset Tag

Indirect Address

Display - The basic area value of Target Tag

Display - The value of Indirect Tag
(ANA_00).
The value of other areas is displayed by the value of Offset Tag
Make - Buttons to change the value of "Offset Tag" and "Indirect Tag"

379

380

CIMON-Xpanel

Input commands as like follows at ‘+’ button property of Offset change.
ANA_00 = ANA_00 + 1;// When touching, the value of Offset Tag will automatically increases by 1.
Input commands as like follows at ‘- ’ button property of Offset change.
if(ANA_00 > 1)

// If the value is larger than 1,

ANA_00 = ANA_00 - 1;

// When touching, the value of Offset Tag will automatically decreases by 1.

Input commands as like follows at ‘+’button property of Data change.
ANA_01#ANA_00 = ANA_01#ANA_00 + 1; // When touching, the value of Indirect Tag will automatically
increases by 1.
Input commands as like follows at ‘- ’button property of Data change.
ANA_01#ANA_00 = ANA_01#ANA_00 - 1;

// When touching, the value of Indirect Tag will

automatically decreases by 1.
Download the project and check the changing value while touching button.

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

XXVII

382

CIMON-Xpanel

Communication Driver
Company

Driver

ASI Controls

ASIC Protocol

Barcode Scanner

Danfoss

Danfoss VLT Automation Drive FC300

DELTA TAU

DELTA TAU PMAC

HITACHI

HITACHI Inverter SJ300/L300P

KDTSYSTEMS

KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI (RS232C/RS422A)
KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC Loader (RS232C/RS422A)
KDT Systems Xpanel Master

Keyence

Keyence KV Mode

KOYO

KOYO DirectNet

LSIS

LSIS GLOFA Cnet
LSIS GLOFA Enet
LSIS GLOFA Loader
LSIS XGT Cnet
LSIS XGT Enet
LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Loader
LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Cnet
LSIS Master-K H Series PLC Cnet
LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Enet
LSIS Inverter Starvert

MITSUBISHI

MITSUBISHI Inverter FR-E500
MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU)
MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E(Q/QnA)
MITSUBISHI Melsec 1E
MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E ASCII
MITSUBISHI Melsec A Series (Programming Port)
MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series
MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series (Programming Port)
MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Series (Programming Port)
MITSUBISHI Melsec FX2N-10/20GM(Programming Port)

MODBUS Protocol

MODBUS RTU protocl
MODBUS TCP protocl

NAIS

NAIS PLC FP Series (MEWTOCOL-COM)

Communication Driver

OMRON

383

OMRON HostLink
FINS Ethernet

SAIA

SAIA S-BUS

SIEMENS

SIEMENS RK512/3964R
SIEMENS S7 Ethernet
SIEMENS S7 MPI
SEIMENS S7 PPI Direct

27.1

ALLENBRADLEY

ALLENBRADLEYDF1

YOKOGAWA

YOKOGAWA Personal Computer Link

Fuji

Fuji Micrex SX Ethernet

METRONIX APD

FARA N70/700 PLUS

Samsung BRAIN SPC Series

ASIC Protocol
This driver supports the ASI communication protocol of ASI Controls.
This protocol provides communication access to a network of ASI controllers from Xpanel.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
device

‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’
For creating a new device activate the menu
or
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in tool-bar.

384

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name : Give a device name.

This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the ‘Statio
Name’.

Select a device
type

Select a device type : ASI Communication Protocol
‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog
After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step,
box will be popped
up as shown in following picture.

Communication Driver

385

‘ASI Communication Protocol’ and configure the
In this window, select the ‘Device Type’as

proper serial communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC
configuration.
Local ID : The host address of Xpanel has to be designated in this window.
It is 16 bits value between 1 and 65535. There are reserved address ranges which
cannot be used by

Xpanel or DDC. Please refer to the DDC manual from ASI Controls for more informat
about the address.

Create a station

Move to the Station’
‘
tab of ‘Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box.
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the

386

CIMON-Xpanel

Xpanel.
Each field can be configured with following rules.

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the
‘Device Name’.

Station Type

Choose the type of connected PLC among the “ASIC”.

Network ID

This field has no effect

Station No.

Specify a decimal number between 1 and 65535.
This number must be matched with the node address of the DDC.

16Bit Data

This option swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data.

Swap

Following diagram shows an example of byte swapping.

Communication Driver

387

Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except
INT8 / UINT8 / BCD8 / UBCD8.
32Bit Data

This option swaps words of all double word sized data.

Swap

Following diagram shows an example of word swapping.

INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be
influenced by
this option.
Using

This field has no effect.

CheckSum

This communication driver always checks the check-sum.

Comm.Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message Pop

message at every Rx and Tx error. Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not

display the message at data receive error. Only when there is data transmit

(writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message is popped
up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Data Address

Xpanel supports reading object and table data from DDC. These two data can be referenced by following
TAG address format.

[Object] O[ Obj No ].[ Size ].[ Index ].[ Attribute ](:Bit No)
[Table]
T[ Table No ].[ Offset ](:Bit No)
Designate the object (table) number of data location.
Obj No / Table No Please refer to the object definition of connected DDC, for more information about
object.
Size

Designate the data type. It can be 1 (BYTE) or 2 (WORD).

Offset

Designate the byte offset within the table.

Index

Designate the assigned index number within the given object.

Attribute

Designate the attribute number of data.

:Bit No

Designate the bit number. This bit address notation is used in digital TAG. Notice

388

CIMON-Xpanel

that the TAG with this bit number only can be read.
That is, the digital TAG writing is not supported with ASIC protocol driver.
Bit number has to be within the range of data size. In case of a table (T) or object
(O) with size 1 (BYTE), bit number can be between 0 and 7. Elsewhere, object with
size 2 (WORD), bit number can be between 0 and 15.

Address
Examples

TAG Data Type

O33.2.0.0

Object 33, WORD, Index 0, Attribute 0

T10.0

Table 10, Byte offset 0

O32.1.0.8

Object 32, BYTE, Index 0, Attribute 8

O3.2.11.0:0

Object 3, WORD, Index 11, Attribute 0, Bit 0

ASIC DDC supports two types of data, BYTE and WORD. If the data type of TAG was
larger than that, Xpanel will read next continuously positioned data for making
designated data. For example, if UINT32 type of TAG referred to the address of T1.2,
Xpanel will read T1.2, T1.3, T1.4 and T1.5 for assembling the UINT32 data.

Wiring Diagram

RS232C

Communication Driver

389

RS422/485

27.2

Barcode Scanner
This driver provides the function of communication with the barcode scanner via RS232C.
The barcode scanner driver is distinct from other standard drivers. It does not support real TAG.
This driver receives the characters from barcode scanner and converts them to keyboard input.
Because of that, in Xpanel kernel’s point of view, the barcode scanner is just like as a standard
keyboard.
To utilize the data from the barcode scanner, the ‘keyboard input window’object must be used in the
graphic page design.
This topic is described in this manual.

Communication Setup : Barcode Scanner

Follow the manual from barcode scanner vender.
Make the confirmation of following condition during barcode scanner setup.
· ‘Enter (0Dh)’or other special code must be added at the end of data transmission.
· Prepare the communication parameters from vender’s documentation. (Baudrate, Parity, Stop Bit,
Data Bits, Stop Bit)

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
device

‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’
For creating a new device, use the menu
or
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in tool-bar.

390

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device :Give a device name.

Select a device
type

Select a device type : ‘
Barcode Scanner’
‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog
After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step,
box will be
popped up as shown in following picture.

Communication Driver

Device Tpe

Barcode Scanner

Comm. Port

COM1

Baud Rate

9,600 bps

Parity

None

Data Bits

8 Bits

Stop Bit(s)

1 Bit

RTS/CST

OFF

Comm.Type

RS-232

Retry No.

Time Out

391

392

CIMON-Xpanel

Create a station

Move to the‘Station’tab of ‘Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box.
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the
XPanel.
Each field can be configured with following rules.

Station Name

Give a name to the barcode scanner.
)

Station Type

Choose the ‘BarCode’. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

his field has no effect.

Station No.

16Bits Data

his field has no effect.

Swap
32Bits Data

his field has no effect.

Communication Driver

393

Swap

'Key Input Window' Object : Xpanel (Page Designer)

‘Key input window’object displays the input character to the screen and executes the assigned
commands when the predefined terminating code
input is detected.

End Code

This field must be matched with terminating code of the barcode scanner.

(HEXA)

Typically 0Dh (Enter) code is widely used.

Input Tag Name

This field must be designated a string TAG.
The input string from barcode scanner is stored in this string TAG.

Command On

Describe the command script in this field.

Input

When the ‘End Code’ is received, this command script is executed automatically.

Password Type

This option can be used when there is need to hide input characters.
If this option was checked, the input characters will be seen as ‘* ’ character.

394

CIMON-Xpanel

Clear at End

If this option was checked, the string on screen will be cleared when ‘End Code’

Code

is received. Otherwise, the string on screen will be cleared when there is a new
input.

Communication Cable Wiring

RS232C

Above picture shows only the RS232C port of Xpanel. This is the standard DB9 RS232C pin assignment.
Typically RD and SG pins are enough to communicate with general barcode scanner. Refer to the manual
of your barcode scanner for signal description.

27.3

Danfoss VLT Automation Drive FC300
This driver can communicate with the VLT AutomationDrive FC 300 inverter series from Danfoss.

Communication Setup : Inverter Setting(FC300, VLT2800)

Inv
ert
er
Set
tin
g
(FC
30
0)

For normal communication, following parameters of the inverter must be set as stated.
· Parameter 8-10 : FC profile [0]
· Parameter 8-30 : FC MC [1]
Parameter Number

Set Value

Description

8-311

[1]

Station number 1. (any number between 1 to 126)

8-321

[3]

19200 bps

8-351

[10]

10 ms Min. response delay

Communication Driver

8-361

[5000]

5000 ms Max. response delay

8-371

[25]

25 ms Max. inter-char delay

8 - 1 02

[0]

FC Profile

8 - 3 02

[1]

FC MC

395

(Note 1) Those parameters (8-31 to 8-32) must be matched with the settings of Xpanel.
(Note 2) The parameters of 8-10 and 8-30 must be set as the value shown in this example.
If those parameters were set as other values, Xpanel can not communicate with the inverter.
Inv
ert
er
Set
tin
g
(VL
T2
80
0)

For normal communication, following parameters of the inverter must be set as stated.
· Parameter 512 : FC profile [1]

Parameter Number

Set Value

Description

5001

[1]

Station number. (any number between 1 to 247)

5011

[5]

9600 bps

5 0 22

[1]

FC Profile

(Note 1) Those parameters (500 and 501) must be matched with the settings of Xpanel.
(Note 2) The parameter of 512 must be set as the value shown in above table.
If this parameter was set as other value, Xpanel can not communicate with the inverter.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e

For creating a new device the menu, 'Tool > I/O Devices' or
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in tool bar.

396

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database accompanied by the 'Station Name'.

Sel Device type : ' DANFOSS VLT AutomationDrive FC-300 '
ect
a
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box will
de
be popped up as shown in following picture.
vic
e
typ
e

Communication Driver

397

Note
FC 300 supports the RS485 only with even parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit.

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
DANFOSS VLT AutomationDrive FC-300’and configure
the
proper serial communication parameters.

Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box.
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel.
Each field can be configured with following rules.

398

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the 'Device Name'.

Station Type

Choose the 'FC-300'. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

Specify a decimal number between 0 and 9.

16Bits Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bits Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using Checksum

This field has no effect.

Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification message at

Message pop Up

every Rx and Tx error.

Communication Driver

399

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive error.
Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the
notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically
about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format.

TAG Type

Format

Example

Analog

[Symbol][Decimal Number]

P023

Digital

[Symbol][Decimal Number][.][Hexadecimal Number]

P000.F

Symb
ol

Addres Description
s

Access

0001 - Parameter Area

R/W

1760

The address of each TAG can be induced from the parameter number of
FC 300 or VLT 2800. For example, to monitor the ’
16-17 Speed [RPM]’
of FC 300, the address should be designated with ‘
P1617’
. For more
parameters, please refer to the ‘
How to Program’section of “FC 300
Design Guide”.
The value written to this address will be transferred to the FC 300 or VLT
2800 directly. That means, parameters of the inverter can be modified by
writing a desired value to this address. The new value can be stored in not
only RAM also EEPROM of FC 300. For storing set value to the EEPROM,
C002 point must have a non-zero value.

000

Control Code
1 word sized control data. Each bit has its own control meaning which is
shown in following [control code] table. To control FC 300 or VLT 2800,
write a value of combination of the table.
Ensure that the reference (C001) must be set as desired value before
issuing of this control code.

001

Reference
This point is a signed word data (-32767 - +32767), and the range of data
corresponds to -200% to +200% of reference. For example, the value of

400

CIMON-Xpanel

16384 represents 100% of reference.
This reference value must be set before the actual control by control code
(C000).
002

EEPROM Writing
If this is non-zero, the value written to the parameter area (Pnnnn) will
be saved to the EEPROM as well as RAM of FC 300 or VLT 2800.
Otherwise, the set value will be stored only in RAM. Ensure that the value
of this point is what you wanted before parameter writing.

Above addresses can be used in both of analog and digital TAG.
For more information of each point, please refer to the ‘
FC 300 Design Guide’
.

[C000 : Control Code for FC300]
Bit No.

Bit Value = 0

Bit Value = 1

Reference value

External selection lsb

Reference value

External selection msb

DC brake

Ramp

Coasting

No coasting

Quick stop

Ramp

Freeze output

Use ramp

Ramp stop

Start

No function

Reset

No function

Jog

Ramp 1

Ramp 2

Data not valid

Data valid

Relay 01 open

Relay 01 active

Relay 02 open

Relay 02 active

Parameter set-up

Selection lsb

Parameter set-up

Selection msb

No function

Reverse

Control Word According to FC Profile (CTW)’
[ Note ] For more information of each bit, refer to the ‘
section of ‘
FC 300 Design Guide’
.

[C000 : Control Code for VLT2800]
Bit No.

Bit Value = 0

Bit Value = 1

Preset ref. lsb

Preset ref. msb

Communication Driver

DC brake

Coasting stop

Quick stop

Freeze output freq.

Ramp stop

Start

Reset

Jog

Ramp 1

Ramp 2

Data not valid

Data valid

Relay 01 activated

Digital output terminal 46 activated

Selection Setup, lsb

Selection Setup, msb

401

Reverse

[ Note ] For more information of each bit, refer to the 'Control Word According to FC Profile(CTW)'
section of 'FC 2800 Design Guide'.

[Example : Monitors the frequency data]

1.Make an analog TAG for frequency data. The address can be induced from parameter number 16-13.
Designate ‘
P1613’as the address of new analog TAG.
Conversion index’of parameter 16-13 is -1.
2. Setup the scale factor of the analog TAG if needed. ‘
Conversion index’and other useful
Configure the scaling factor of the TAG in database as 0.1. (The ‘
information of each parameter
can be found on the ‘
Parameter Lists’section of the ‘
FC 300 Design Guide’
.)

402

CIMON-Xpanel

[Example : Changes the 'speed PID lowpass filter time']

1. Make two analog TAGs. One TAG is for EEPROM storage control and the other TAG is for the parameter.
The address of parameter TAG can be induced from parameter number 7-06. Designate P0706 as the
address of the new analog TAG.

Communication Driver

403

2. Setup the scale factor of the analog TAG. In this example, the value of 0.1 was designated as the scale
factor.
This value came from the ‘
Conversion index’of the parameter 7-06. But the conversion index of par.
7-06 is -4.
This index is based on the unit of second. For convenience, we can use the unit of milli-second, such
that the index can be thought as the value of -1.

3. The parameter of FC 300 can be modified by changing the TAG.
If needed but not necessarily, before the writing a new parameter value, the EEPROM storing option can
be arranged.
Following picture shows an example of changing parameter.

404

CIMON-Xpanel

[Example : Start Controls ]

1. Make two analog TAGs for control. One TAG is for reference value (C001, INT16) and the other TAG is
for control word (C000, UINT16).

2. To control the FC 300, write a desired reference value to the ‘
Reference’point (C001) first. And then,
write a control value to ‘
Control’point.
For example, write the value of 0x047F for issuing a start command.
Following picture shows an example of a command expression for control. (Start with 100%)

Communication Driver

Communication Cable Wiring

405

406

CIMON-Xpanel

NOTE
(Note 1) Shielded twisted pair cable must be used for P-N pair.
(Note 2) Ensure that shield cable was connected to the COM terminal (61) of FC 300.

27.4

DELTA TAU PMAC
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and DELTA TAU
PMAC series drivers.

Communication Setup : PMAC

For normal communication between Xpanel and PMAC, the some of I-variables should have the values
described below.
ISet
variable Value

Remark

The station number ‘
0’is the default value of PMAC. To set up the PMAC to

0 .. 15

communicate as station 1 to 15 on a multi-drop serial cable, first communicate with
the board as station 0. Set I0 to specify the new station number. Also set I1 to 3 to
enable the station number addressing.

Communication Driver

CS handshake not used; software card address required.

Communication handshake style and code

Checksum disabled, serial errors reported immediately

Error reporting mode.

0 or 2

0 (short form of decimal) or 2 (short form of hexadecimal)

I63

Echo the character

I64

Internal response tag enable

407

Store these values to the non-volatile flash memory with the ‘
SAVE’command. Then turn off power.
Please refer to the manual of PMAC for more information.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’-> ’
I/O Devices’or
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in tool-bar.

408

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window
of database
accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.

Select a device
type

Select a device type : ' DELTA TAU PMAC Drive '
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog
box will be
popped up as shown in following picture..

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
DELTA TAU PMAC Drive’and configure the proper
serial
communication parameters. (9600bps, no parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit recommended)

Communication Driver

Create a station

409

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
PMAC’
. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

Specify a decimal number between 0 and 15.

16bits Data

This field has no effect.

Swap

410

CIMON-Xpanel

32bits Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using

This field has no effect.

Checksum
Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message pop

message at every Rx and Tx error.

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format.

TAG Type

Format

Example

Analog

[Symbol][Address]

P0012

Digital

[Symbol][Address]

M0215

· Address : decimal number between 0 and 8191
· All the addresses can be used with the digital TAG. The value of zero (0) is treated as OFF and other
values are treated as ON in Xpanel.

Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in Xpanel database.

Symbol

Description

Address
Range

Type

Access

Variable of fixed meaning for card setup

0-8191

Analog

R/W

Global variable for programming use

0-8191

Analog

R/W

Variable assigned to memory location for user

0-8191

Analog

R/W

Local variable for programming use

0-8191

Analog

R/W

DELTA TAU PMAC communication driver supports only FLOAT data type. Ensure that the data
type of TAGs.
(Following picture shows the FLOAT data type configuration window ofXpanell database.)

Communication Driver

Communication Cable Wiring

Xpanel
COM1/COM2
RS232C
Connector Type :
D89

Xpanel
COM1 RS422A
Connector Type :
5 Pins Terminal
Block

411

412

27.5

CIMON-Xpanel

FATEK PLC(Serial)
This driver provides the software interface and serial communication protocol between Xpanel and
FATEK PLCs.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

You can configure I/O device according to various kind of field equipments by using Xpanel Designer.
Configure the option of the example followed. More details about I/O device configuration in section “I/O
device configuration”.

Create a new
device

To configure the communication device of LSIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in
the menu or icon

tool-bar , and then “I/O device configuration”dialog box will be shown up. And then
click [new device] button.
“I/O device selection”dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a device type
as the following figure.

I/O Device Name :

Communication Driver

413

Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window
of database accompanied
by the ‘Station Name’
.
Select a device
type

Select a device type : ' Fatek PLC Cnet '

Serial Communication
After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘
Configuration ’dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

Fatek PLC Cnet’ and
In this window, select the ‘Device Type’as ‘
appropriate communication parameters. Those parameters must be
matched with the PLC.
Create a station

Move to [Station] tab at the “Serial Communication Configuration”Dialog Box and click
[Add Station] button then you can see “Station”Dialog Box popped up. Please

414

CIMON-Xpanel

configuration as the following contents then click “OK” button.

Station
Name

Give a name to thr PLC. This name will be used in the
database window
accompanied with the 'Deviec Name' .

Station Type

Choose the 'FATEK PLC'.(No other type can be slected)

Network ID

This field has no meaning in this driver.(ignored in
runtime)

Station No.

Specify a decimal number between 0 and 126

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Communication Driver

415

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Comm.Error

If this is checked, XPanel displays a communication error

Message Pop

notification message at every RX and Tx Error.

Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the
message at data receive error. Only When there is data
transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the
notification message is poped up. This message box will
be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Communication Setting : FATEK PLC

1) In case , using CPU Loader Port

•

Run ‘WinProLadder’

•

Select [PLC] -> [On

Line] in manu.

416

CIMON-Xpanel

•

•
•
•
•

Select ‘RS232’ on Connection Name, and push [Auto Check] button to popup
Connection Auto Check window.

Select using serial port on ‘Search Port’.
Select PLC Type on ‘SelectPLC Series’.
Select PLC side port on ‘Select Port’.
Push [OK] button to do connectionauto check.

Communication Driver

•

•
•

417

Connection finished. Select [PLC] -> [Setting] -> [Station Number] to popup ‘Station
Number’window.

After input PLC의 Station Number, puch [OK] button to finish.
Select Port parameter on [PLC] -> [Setting],to change port parameter.

418

CIMON-Xpanel

•
•
•

Must select ‘Fatek Communication Protocal’on Protocol.
After finished parameter setting, push [OK] button.
If you use serial loader port, check Port0 Parameter on [PLC] -> [Setting].

Address Notifiation

Name

Symbol

Digital

Analog
16 Bit

32 Bit

Input discrete

X00~X9999

WX00-WX9984

DWX00-DWX9984

Output relay

Y00~Y9999

WY00-WY9984

DWY00-DWY9984

Internal relay

M00~M9999

WM00-WM9984

DWM00DWM9984

Step relay

S00~S9999

WS00-WS9984

DWS00-DWS9984

Timer discrete

T00~T9999

WT00-WT9984

DWT00-DWT9984

Counter
discrete

C00~C9999

WC00-WC9984

DWC00-DWC9984

Timer register

TMR

RT00-RT9999

DRT00-DRT9999

Counter register

CTR

RC00-RC9999

DRC00-DRC9999

Data register

R00-R65535

DR00-DR65535

Data register

D00-D65535

DD00-DD65535

(1) Word tag is supported by only 16 Bit.
(2) Digital address is only used to Digital tag.
(3) 32Bit address is used to 32 bit Analog tag only.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Communication Driver

27.6

419

FATEK PLC(Ethernet)
This driver provides the software interface and Ethernet communication protocol between Xpanel and
FATEK PLCs.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
device

To configure the communication device of LSIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in the
menu or icon

tool-bar , and then “I/O device configuration”dialog box will be shown up. And then click
[new device] button.
“I/O device selection”dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a device type as the
following figure.

I/O Device Name :

420

CIMON-Xpanel

Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database accompanied
by the ‘Station Name’
.
Select a device
type

Select a device type : ' Fatek PLC Enet '

Ethernet Communication
After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘
Configuration ’’dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

Fatek PLC Enet’and appropriate
In this window, select the ‘Device Type’as ‘
communication parameters. Those parameters must be matched with the
PLC.
Create a station

Move to [Station] tab at the “Serial Communication Configuration”Dialog Box and click [Add
Station] button then you can see “Station”Dialog Box popped up. Please configuration as the
following contents then click “OK” button.

Communication Driver

Station Name

Give a name to thr PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the 'Deviec Name' .

Station Type

Choose the 'FATEK PLC'.(No other type can be slected)

Network ID

This field has no meaning in this driver.(ignored in runtime)

IP Address

Input IP Address FATEK PLC

Soket Port No. Input Major Port FATEK PLC.
16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
String Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using
Checksum

421

This field has no effect.

422

CIMON-Xpanel

Comm.Error

If this is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification

Message Pop

message at every RX and Tx Error.

Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the message at data
receive error. Only When there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to
the station) error, the notification message is poped up. This message
box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Fixed XPANEL

This field has no effect.

Socket port

Communication Setting : FATEK PLC

1) In case , using CPU Loader Port

•

Run ‘WinProLadder’

•

Select [PLC] -> [On

Line] in manu.

Communication Driver

•

•
•
•
•

423

Select ‘RS232’ on Connection Name, and push [Auto Check] button to popup
Connection Auto Check window.

Select using serial port on ‘Search Port’.
Select PLC Type on ‘SelectPLC Series’.
Select PLC side port on ‘Select Port’.
Push [OK] button to do connectionauto check.

424

CIMON-Xpanel

•

•
•

Connection finished. Select [PLC] -> [Setting] -> [Station Number] to popup ‘Station
Number’window.

After input PLC의 Station Number, puch [OK] button to finish.
Select Port parameter on [PLC] -> [Setting],to change port parameter.

2) IP Setting

•

Run ‘Fatek Ethernet Module ConfigurationTool’

Communication Driver

•
•

To scan Fatek PLC, push ‘Scan Map’button.
Double click item on scan result to edit Ethernet setting.

•
•
•

[General]tab, IP and Subnet Mask, GateWay to set.
Remote Config. Enable must check.
Select Server on Operation Mode.

425

426

CIMON-Xpanel

•
•

[ M i s c . ]tab, Major Port set on FATEK Service Port Number.
After finished parameter setting, push [OK] button.

Address Notifiation

Name

Symbol

Digital

Analog
16 Bit

32 Bit

Input discrete

X00~X9999

WX00-WX9984

DWX00-DWX9984

Output relay

Y00~Y9999

WY00-WY9984

DWY00-DWY9984

Internal relay

M00~M9999

WM00-WM9984

DWM00DWM9984

Step relay

S00~S9999

WS00-WS9984

DWS00-DWS9984

Timer discrete

T00~T9999

WT00-WT9984

DWT00-DWT9984

Counter
discrete

C00~C9999

WC00-WC9984

DWC00-DWC9984

Timer register

TMR

RT00-RT9999

DRT00-DRT9999

Counter register

CTR

RC00-RC9999

DRC00-DRC9999

Data register

R00-R65535

DR00-DR65535

Data register

D00-D65535

DD00-DD65535

(1) Word tag is supported by only 16 Bit.
(2) Digital address is only used to Digital tag.
(3) 32Bit address is used to 32 bit Analog tag only.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Communication Driver

Wiring Diagram

This interface is used to communicate between the equipment and TOUCH/PPC by Ethernet code of
practice.
This interface is satisfied with standard IEEE802.3 about the 10BaseT/100BaseTX.
You can make cable and allocation pin number of RJ45 as the following figure.

RJ45 Connector

RJ45 Jack

Direct Cable: Host <-> HUB
Cable

Color

Orange/W

Orange

Green/W

Blue

Blue/W

Green

Brown/W

Brown

Cable

Crossover Cable: Host <-> Host
Cable

Color

Orange/W

Green/W

Orange

Green

Green/W

Orange/W

Blue

Blue/W

Green

Orange

Brown/W

Brown

Cable

427

428

27.7

CIMON-Xpanel

HITACHI Inverter SJ300/L300P
This driver supports the communication with Hitachi Inverter SJ300 and L300P models through RS485 port.

Communication Setup : HITACHI Inverter(SJ300/L300P)

For normal communication with Xpanel, following parameters of inverter have to be properly configured.

Function
Code

C070

C071

Item

Data command
source

Baudrate

C072

Node address

C073

Data bits

C074

C075
C078

Parity

Stop bits
Wait time

Value

Description

Digital operator

RS485 connector

Expansion card #1

Expansion card #2

Loopback test

2400 bps

4800 bps

9600 bps

19200 bps

1 to 32

Node or station address
(unique to each inverter or device)

7 bits

8 bits

None

Even parity

Odd parity

1 bit

2 bits

0 to
1000

0 to 1000 ms time that the inverter waits to respond to
network master

Please refer to the manual of inverter for more information.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Communication Driver

Create a new
device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’-> ’
I/O Devices’or

429

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window
of database accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.

Select a device
type

Select a device type : ' HITACHI Inverter '
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog
box will
be popped up as shown in following picture..

430

CIMON-Xpanel

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
HITACHI Inverter’and configure the proper serial
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the inverter's
configuration.
Create a station

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box.
In this dialog box, all the connected inverter stations can be configured and registered to the
Xpanel.
Each field can be configured with following rules.

Communication Driver

Station Name

431

Give a name to the inverter.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the type of connected inverter.
Two inverter models are supported by this communication drivers (SJ300
and L300P).

Network ID

This field has no effect.

432

CIMON-Xpanel

Station No.

Specify a decimal number between 1 and 32. This number must be matched
with the number in the parameter of the inverter (Function code : C072).

16bits Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32bits Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using

This field has no effect.

Checksum

This communication driver always checks the check-sum.

Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message pop

message at every Rx and Tx error.

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically about 5 seconds after.

Point Map

Ad
dre
ss
Not
ati
on

[ Symbol ][ Offset ][ . ][ Bit number ]
· Symbol : A, B, C, F, H, P, X or Y
· Offset : 3 digits decimal number (001 ... ???)
· Bit number : 2 digits decimal number (00 ... 31) with proceeding dot (.)
All analog real tags must be declared as UINT32 data type for normal data processing
as shown in the following picture. And some points need the scale factor for simple and
easy data manipulation in Xpanel. The point map in the next section includes a
recommended
scale factor column for those points.

Communication Driver

Poi
nt
Ma
p

Address

Description

433

Acc.

Scale

Cmd

A001-A393 Basic parameter setting

R/W

06(R)/07(W)

B001-B313 Fine tuning functions

R/W

06(R)/07(W)

C001-C123 Intelligent terminal functions

R/W

06(R)/07(W)

F002-F303 Main profile parameters

R/W

06(R)/07(W)

H003-H306 Motor constants

R/W

06(R)/07(W)

P001-P049 Expansion card functions

R/W

06(R)/07(W)

X001

Output frequency (x 100Hz)

0.01

X002

Output current (x 10A)

0.1

X003

Direction of rotation

X004

PID feedback monitor (x 100%)

0.01

X005

Intelligent input monitor

X006

Intelligent output monitor

X007

Frequency converting monitor (x 100)

0.01

X008

Output torque monitor (%)

X009

Output voltage monitor (x 10V)

0.1

X010

Electric power monitor (x 10kW)

0.1

X012

Run mode time monitor (Hours)

X013

Power ON time monitor (Hours)

X014

Trip : Inverter status A

X015

Inverter status B

434

CIMON-Xpanel

X016

Inverter status C

X018

Total accumulated number of trip events

X019

History : Trip factor

X020

History : Inverter status A

X021

History : Inverter status B

X022

History : Inverter status C

X023

History : Output frequency (x 100Hz)

0.01

X024

History : Accumulated run mode time (Hours)

X025

History : Output current (x 10A)

0.1

X026

History : Output voltage (x 10V)

0.1

X027

History : Power ON time (Hours)

X028

EEPROM write availability verify

Y001

Mode control (0=STOP / 1=FORWARD / 2=REVERSE)

Y002

Output frequency (x 100Hz)

0.01

Y003

Intelligent terminal function (High-Word)

Y004

Intelligent terminal function (Low-Word)

Y005

Inverter Initialize (any value)

Y006

EEPROM write (any value)

Y007

Recalculate internal motor constants (any value)

Y008

Read trip history (0=Internal buffer / 1=Comm.)

Y009

Trip history number to read (1...6)

Scale

: Some points need a scaling process for simple and easy data manipulation in Xpanel.
Recommended scale factors are given in 'Scale' column of above table.

Cmd

: The command codes used in the communication between Xpanel and inverter are listed in
the above table. Please refer to the manual of inverter for more information about the
command codes. The points without command codes are internal points of Xpanel.
Following sections describe these internal points.

Write Only
Points (Y)
:

The points with symbol 'Y' are write only. When these points were monitored in the screen
of Xpanel, value of zero would be displayed. But, the points Y004 and Y009 are
exceptional. These two points are described in the following sections.

Inv
ert
er
Sta
tus
Fla
gs

Each status data keeps a code as shown in the following data.
Code
0
1

Status A (X014)
Initial status

Status B (X014)

Status C (X016)

On stopping
On running

Stop

Communication Driver

(X0
14
/
X0
15
/
X0
16)

On tripping

On stopping

On running

Constant speed

On free-run stop

Acceleration speed

On jog

Forward

On dynamic breaking

Reverse

On retry

Reverse from forward

On trip

Forward from reverse

On under-voltage

Forward start

10
Tri
p
His
tor
y
(Y0
08/
Y0
09)

435

Deceleration speed

Reverse start

The inverter keeps total 6 trip history data on its memory. And the Xpanel driver provides a method to choose
on of those 6 trip history data for monitoring.
To monitor a trip history in Xpanel, first of all, Y009 has to be set a value between 1 and 6. This value denotes
the history data ID to be stored in X018 - X027. And then, when the Y008 point was written as zero or one,
one of history data block would be copied to the monitoring points (X018 - X027) as explained in the following
picture. When the Y008 point was written as zero (0), one of buffered trip history would be copied to the
monitoring points(X018 - X027). Otherwise (written as 1), the internal trip history data buffer would be updated
by the data from inverter.

Thus, following sequential commands or script program updates the trip history data which are stored in
X018 - X027 and monitored.

436

CIMON-Xpanel

TAG_Y009 = 1; // Set the trip history ID (1...6)
TAG_Y008 = 1; // Update the history data by communication
Int
elli
ge
nt
Ter
mi
nal
Fu
nct
ion
(Y0
03
/
Y0
04)

The intelligent terminal functions are composed with 64 bit control flags as listed in the following table. These
control flags are accessed by Xpanel with two different touble word points, Y003 and Y004. Y003 holds high 32
bit flags of intelligent terminal function and Y004 holds low 32 bits.
Y004 (Low)
Bit No.

Description

Y003 (High)
Bits No.

Description

[FW] Forward command

[SF1] Multi-speed bit-level

[RV] Reverse command

[SF2] Multi-speed bit-level

[CF1] Multi-speed 1

[SF3] Multi-speed bit-level

[CF2] Multi-speed 2

[SF4] Multi-speed bit-level

[CF3] Multi-speed 3

[SF5] Multi-speed bit-level

[CF4] Multi-speed 4

[SF6] Multi-speed bit-level

[JG] Jog operation

[SF7] Multi-speed bit-level

[DB] Dynamic braking

[OLR] Overload restriction setting

[SET] Set 2nd motor

[TL] Torque limit

[2CH] 2-stage adjustable speed

[TRQ1] Torque limit select 1

[TRQ2] Torque limit select 2

10
11

[FRS] Free-run stop

[PPIP/PI] Inverter model select

[EXP] External trip

[BOK] Brake confirmation

[USP] Unattended start protection

[ORT] Orientation (home) command

[CS] Commercial power change

[LAC] Linear accel/decel cancel

[SFT] Software lock

[PCLR] Position error clear

[AT] Analog input voltage/current

[STAT] Pulse train input enable

[SET3] Set 3rd motor

[RS] Reset

[STA] 3-wire Start

[STP] 3-wire Hold

[F/R] 3-wire FWD/REV

[PID] PID enable

24-31

When data were written to Y004 points, Xpanel would store the value in its memory. That is, Xpanel does not
send the Y004 data to the inverter and waits until the point Y003 is written as some other value. The actual
data sending is fulfilled when Y003 point was written as some value. Following sequential commands or script

Communication Driver

437

program sends "forward : bit 0 of Y004", "multi-speed 1 : bit 2 of Y004" and "multi-speed 2 : bit 3
of Y004" commands to the inverter at the same time.

TAG_Y004 = 0x000D;
TAG_Y003 = 0;

// Set the low command flags
// Set the high command flags and send commands to inverter

Wiring Diagram

RS485

Xpanel
COM1 RS422/485

27.8

KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI (RS232C/RS422A)
This driver supports the communication with CIMON-PLC through RS232C/422A HMI Protocol. Following
modules (options) support the HMI Protocol.

* CM1-SC01A/B

* CM1-SC02A

* CM1-CP4C/D/U

* CM1-BPnnM option : R, S, U, T

Communication Setup : Xpanel

438

CIMON-Xpanel

Create a new
device

For creating a new device activate the menu [ Tools - I/O Devices ] or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window
of database
accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.

Select a device
type

Select a device type : ' KDT Systems CIMON-PLC HMI '
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box will
be popped up as shown in following picture.

Communication Driver

439

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
KDT Systems CIMON-PLC HMI’and configure the
proper serial
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC configuration.

Create a station

440

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the
Device Name’
.
‘

Station Type

Choose the type of connected PLC between “CP/XP Series”and “BP Series”.

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

Specify a decimal number between 0 and 31.

16bits Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32bits Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using

This field has no effect.

Checksum

Communication Driver

441

Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message pop

message at every Rx and Tx error.

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically about 5 seconds after.

Communication Setup : PLC

Co
m
mu
nic
ati
on
Mo
dul
e

If one of the following special function modules is used for Xpanel connection, the property of module should
be configured as following picture.
· CM1-SC01A or B
· CM1-SC02A
· BPnnMxxx-U or T

The protocol item must be set as ‘
HMI Protocol’
. And ensure that other communication parameters are

442

CIMON-Xpanel

matched with Xpanel.

CP If the CPU embedded port is used for connection with Xpanel, the CPU parameter must be configured as
U
following picture.
Em
be
dd
ed
Por
t

This type of communication port is supported by following models :
· CM1-CP4C or D or U
· BPnnMxxx-R or S

Supported PLC Memories

Area

Symbol

Analog TAG

Digital TAG

External Input

X0000 X5110

X0000 X511F

External Output

Y0000 Y5110

Y0000 Y511F

Internal Relay

M0000 - M9990

M0000 - M999F

Internal Relay

L0000 L9990

L0000 L999F

Latch Relay

K0000 K9990

K0000 K999F

Flags

F0000 F1270

F0000 F127F

Timer Output

Not supported

T0000

Remark

Read Only

T4095

Communication Driver

Timer PV

TC0000 TC4095

Not supported

Timer SV

TS0000 TS4095

Not supported

Counter Output

Not supported

C0000 C4095

Counter PV

CC0000 CC4095

Not supported

Counter SV

CS0000 CS4095

Not supported

Data Memory

D00000 D31999

Not supported

Wiring Diagram

[ RS232C ]
CM
1SC
01
A,
SC
02
A
CM
2BP
nn
Mx
x-T
CM
1CP
4C
:

Op
tio
n
Por
t

443

444

CIMON-Xpanel

CM
2BP
16
Mx
x-R

[ RS422A ]
CM1-SC01A,
SC02A

CM1-CP4C :
Option
Port

Communication Driver

445

CM2-BP16Mxx-S

CM2-BPnnMxx-U

27.9

KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC Loader (RS232C/RS422A)
This driver supports the communication with CIMON-PLC through RS232C/422A loader protocol.
Following PLC CPU modules are connectable with this driver.

* CM1-XPnA/R

* CM1CPnA/B/C/D/U

* CM2-BPnnM

* CM1-SC01A/B

* CM1-SC02A

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e

For creating a new device activate the menu [ Tools - I/O Devices ] or
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in tool-bar.

446

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database
accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.
Sel Select a device type : ' KDT Systems CIMON-PLC LOADER '
ect
a
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box will
de
be
vic
e
popped up as shown in following picture.
typ
e

Communication Driver

447

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
KDT Systems CIMON-PLC Loader ’and configure the
proper
serial communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC configuration.
38400-n-8-1’
.
[Note] The communication parameter of standard loader port is ‘

Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box. In this dialog box, all
the
connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each field can be configured
with
following rules.

448

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the ‘
Device
Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the type of connected PLC among the “CP/XP/BP Series”.

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

Specify a decimal number between 0 and 31. This number is effective on CPU’
s
optional
port or SCnnA/B module. The station number is ignored on the standard loader
port.

16bits Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32bits Data

This field has no effect.

Communication Driver

449

Swap
Using

This field has no effect.

Checksum
Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message pop

message at every Rx and Tx error.

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error,
the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically about 5 seconds after.

Communication Setup : CIMON PLC

Sta
nd
ard
Lo
ad
er
Por
t
on
CP
U

All the CPU models support RS232C loader port by RJ11 connector. There is no need to configure this port.

CP
U's
Op
tio
n
Por
t

If the CPU’
s optional communication port is used for connection with Xpanel, the CPU parameter must be

The communication parameters are fixed as ‘
38400-n-8-1’
.
This configuration supports only peer to peer (1:1) communication. Because of that, CPU ignores the station
number part in the communication frame from Xpanel. That is, the CPU accepts all the station number from
Xpanel.

configured as following picture.

450

CIMON-Xpanel

Notice that the station number must be matched with that of Xpanel configuration. CP series CPU’
s optional
port supports two protocols. But, there is no need to set the protocol type. This port automatically detects the
protocol type. Following CPU models support the loader protocol on the optional communication port.
· CM1-CP4C or D or U
Co
m
mu
nic
ati
on
M
od
ule

If one of the following special function modules (options) is used for Xpanel connection, the property of module
should be configured as following picture.
· CM1-SC01A or B
· CM1-SC02A
· BPnnMxxx-U or T

Communication Driver

451

The protocol item must be set as ‘
CICON(Loader) Protocol’
. And ensure that other communication parameters
are matched with Xpanel, especially for the station number.

Supported PLC Memories

Area

Symbol

Analog TAG

Digital TAG

External Input

X0000

X5110

X0000

X511F

External Output

Y0000

Y5110

Y0000

Y511F

Internal Relay

M0000 - M9990

M0000 - M999F

Internal Relay

L0000

L9990

L0000

L999F

Latch Relay

K0000

K9990

K0000

K999F

Flags

F0000

F1270

F0000

F127F

Timer Output

Not supported

T0000

T4095

Timer PV

TC0000

TC4095

Not supported

Timer SV

TS0000

TS4095

Not supported

Counter Output

Not supported

C0000

Counter PV

CC0000

Not supported

CC4095

C4095

Remark

Read Only

452

CIMON-Xpanel

Counter SV

CS0000

CS4095

Not supported

Data Memory

D00000

D31999

Not supported

Wiring Diagram

[ RS232C ]
All
CP
U
mo
del

CM
1SC
01
A,
SC
02
A
CM
2BP
nn
Mx
x-T

[ RS422A ]

Communication Driver

453

CM1-SC01B,
SC02A

CM1-CP4D

CM2-BPnnMxxxU

27.10 KDT Systems Xpanel Master
This driver provides the network solution between Xpanels. The XPanel in which this driver was loaded is a
master station,
and other Xpanels are slave stations. All slave Xpanels should have been configured as the ‘data server’.

454

CIMON-Xpanel

(The Xpanel’s data server configuration is described in the manual of Xpanel.)

Communication Setup : Slave Xpanel

Above picture shows how to configure a slave Xpanel to the data server.
Each slave Xpanel can have up to 1000 data buffers (D000-D999) and 1000 string buffers (S000
S999).
All these buffers should be assigned to their appropriate TAGs as shown in above picture.
For more information, please refer to the ‘Network Data Server’section of Xpanel manual.

Communication Setup : Master Xpanel

Communication Driver

Create a new
device

‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’
For creating a new device activate the menu
or

455

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window
of
database accompanied by the ‘Station Name’.

Select a
network type

Select a network type : ' KDT Systems Xpanel '
‘Ethernet Communication Configuration’ dialog
After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step,
box will be popped
‘KDT
up as shown in following picture. In this window, select the ‘Device Type’
as Systems
Xpanel’ and configure
the proper Ethernet communication parameters.

Point
UDP/IP protocol suit .
XPanel network data server supports only
Do not select the ‘TCP’ protocol of configuration dialog box.

456

CIMON-Xpanel

Create a station Move to the‘Station’tab of ‘Ethernet Communication Configuration’dialog box.
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel.
Each field can be configured with following rules.

Communication Driver

Station Name

457

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘Device Name’.

Station Type

Choose the ‘XPANEL’. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no effect.

IP Address

Give the IP address of the server (slave) Xpanel with dotted decimal format.

Socket Port

Give the port number of data server serviced by the Xpanel. This value must

Nimber

be 10262.

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message Pop

message at every Rx and Tx error.

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data
receive error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the
station) error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will
be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Fixed XPANEL

Do not use this option (leave as unchecked). The server (slave) XPanel can

458

CIMON-Xpanel

Socket Port /

service multiple masters and dynamic socket port.

XPANEL Socket
Port No.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in master Xpanel has the following format.
Type

Format

Example

Number

[D][Address in decimal number]

D0012

String

[S][Address in decimal number]

S0100

Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in Xpanel database.
Memory Area

Symbol

I/O Address Range

Applicable TAG

Real Data

D000

D999

Digital / Analog

String Data

S000

S999

String

Communication Cable Wiring

Communication Driver

459

27.11 Keyence KV Mode
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and Keyence KV
series PLCs.
It supports the following families of Keyence PLCs.
· KV-10, KV-16, KV-24, KV-40
· KV-300 with KV-L2 in KV mode

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
->’
I/O Devices’or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.

Sel Select a network type : ' KEYENCE PLC(KV mode) '
ect

460

CIMON-Xpanel

a
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box will
net
wo be
rk
popped up as shown in following picture.
typ
e

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
KEYENCE PLC (KV mode)’and configure the proper
serial
communication parameters. The parity is fixed as 'Even' in case of KV-10, KV-16, KV-40 PLC
module.

Cre Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box.
ate
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel.
a
sta Each field can be configured with following rules.
tio
n

Communication Driver

Station Name

461

Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the ‘
Device
Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
KEYENCE KV’
. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No

Specify a decimal number between 0 and 9.

16Bits Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bits Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using

This field has no effect.

Checksum
Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

462

CIMON-Xpanel

Message pop

message

at every Rx and Tx error.
Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error.
Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the
notification
message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5
seconds
after.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format.

TAG Type

Format

Example

Analog

[Symbol][Address]

DM0012

Digital

[Symbol][Address]

R0215

· Address : decimal number
Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in Xpanel database.

Symbol

Description

Address
Range

Type

Access

Counter : Current Value

0-249

Analog

R/W

Counter : Preset Value

0-249

Analog

R/W

Counter Contact

0-249

Digital

R/W

CTHC

High Speed Counter : Current Value

0 - 1

Analog

R/W

CTHP

High Speed Counter : Preset Value

0 - 1

Analog

CTH

High Speed Counter : Contact

0 - 1

Digital

CTCC

High Speed Counter Comparator : Current Value 0 - 3

Analog

CTCP

High Speed Counter Comparator : Preset Value

0 - 3

Analog

R/W

CTC

High Speed Counter Comparator : Contact

0 - 3

Digital

R/W

Timer : Current Value

0-249

Analog

R/W

Timer : Preset Value

0-249

Analog

R/W

Timer : Contact

0-249

Digital

R/W

Temporary Data Memory

Analog

R/W

Data Memory

0 - 1999

Analog

R/W

Communication Driver

Relay (I/O, Internal AUX, Special AUX)

0-17915

Digital

R/W

Digital Trimmer

0 - 1

Analog

463

Keyence KV mode protocol does not support block data read and write functions.
Because of that, double word (INT32, UINT32, BCD32, UBCD32, FLOAT) data types are not supported.
Ensure that especially for using following functions of Xpanel.
· Recipe
· XY / SPC / Scope Trend.

Communication Cable Wiring

KV10,
KV
16,
KV24,
KV
-40

KVL2
mo
dul
e
of
KV30
0

464

CIMON-Xpanel

27.12 KOYO DirectNet
This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with KOYO DL06 PLC using RS232C
or RS422/485.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

You can configure I/O device according to various kind of field equipment's by using Xpanel Designer.
Configure the option of the example followed. More details about I/O device configuration in section “I/O
device configuration”.

Create a new
device

To configure the communication device of DL06 PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in the menu
or icon
in tool-bar , and then “I/O device configuration”dialog box will be shown up. And then
click
'new device' button. “I/O device selection”dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a
device
type as the following figure.

Communication Driver

465

I/O Device Name : In the case there are various kinds of field equipments, Type device name
to identify what
equipments it is. The string “DEV”of this item will be shown up in the
selection list of
I/O device when you register a tag. Xpanel can communicate with various
kinds of equipment
simultaneously connected by identifying equipment by its name. The value
which is saved as
a tag is the compound string of a device name and station name as following
“DEV.ST”
(“DEV”is a device name, and “ST”is a station name). And it is used as a
unique identifier in
Xpanel project.

Select a
network type

Select a network type : ' KOYO DirecNet '
You can select communication device which is connected to Xpanel.

466

CIMON-Xpanel

Comm.Port

COM1
Select communication port to communicate. If you use RS-485, you must
select “COM1”. When RS-232 communication type of COM1 port is used,
9P DSUB connector is used. And When RS-422/485 communication type
of COM1 port is used, 5P plug connector is used. If you use COM1 port,
you cannot use RS-232 and RS-422/485 together, but you can use only
one type.

Baud rate

9,600
Select the communication speed to equipment. The configuration of the
communication speed of Xpanel must be the same as the configuration of
equipment. If speed of the configurations of two sides are not same, they

Communication Driver

467

will not be communicated each other.
Parity

Odd

Data bits

8 bits

Stop bits

1 bits

RTS/CTS

OFF
RTS/CTS control is used for HALF-DUPLEX communication. When you
ordinary modem of two-wire circuit, you can control the modem by this
implement. Because of RS-485 communication port of the Xpanel
supports Auto Toggle function so Xpanel doesn’
t use this function. This
example doesn’
t use RTS-CTS control.

Comm.Type

RS232
When you use RS-422 communication select RS-422 or you use RS-485
communication then select RS-485. When RS-232 communication is
used, 9P DSUB connector is used. And When RS-422/485 communication
is used, 5P plug connector is used.

Retry No.

3 (If communication failed with the kind of field equipment, it will retry as
the number of this.)

Time Out

s time out count will be 30
30 (If you input as the number of 30 then it’
seconds. )

Using Dial Up

Not Select (This item can be chosen only when you use Dial Up modem.)

Modem

Create a station

468

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

When field equipments number exceed over than 2, station name is used
for division of field equipment at the internal Xpanel.
Internal Xpanel it expresses as “Device.Station”and this example shows
you as “DEV.ST”.

Station Type

DirectNet(ASCII)
Either “DirecNet(HEX)”or “DirectNet(ASCII)”is to be selected by accorded
with PLC configurations.

Network ID
Station No.

This field has no effect.
When field equipments number exceed over than 2, it assigned different
Station No. to divide. Station number must be same configured in field
equipments. It will not be communicated if the Station No. different each
other.

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap

Device range

Communication Driver

469

When you edit the tag or communication block, you can edit address as following figure.

Memory Type

Discrete Memory Reference(octal)

Word memory Reference(octal)

Input Point

X0 - X777

V40400 - v40437

Output Point

Y0 - Y777

V40500 - V40537

Control Relays

C0 - C1777

V40600 - V40677

Special Relays

SP0 - SP777

V41200 - V41237

Timer Current Values

TA0 - TA377

V0 - V377

Timer Status Bits

T0 - T377

V41100 - V41117

Counter Current Values

CTA0 - CTA177

V1000 - V1177

Counter Status Bits

CT0 - CT177

V41140 - V41147

Stage

S0 - S1777

V41000 - V41017

Remote I/O

GX0 - GX3777

V40000 - V40177

GY0 - GY3777

V40200 - V40377

(Analog)

Above the address table is a basis of the company of Koyo’
s DL06.
If the Equipment used DirectNET Excepted of the Koyo’
s DL06, DL405, DL205 then you reference this
manual and so you can use Word memory Reference only.

Case of Digital Tag
· In the case of Word memory Reference

[Ex.] At the 15 bit of the No.40000 -> V40000.15
[Ex.] 0 bit of the No.40000 -> V40000.15

· In the case of Discrete Memory Reference

[EX.] At the 15 bit of the No.40000 -> GX017

(reference 129-12)

27.13 LSIS GLOFA Cnet
This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with LSIS GLOFA PLC using RS232C or
RS422/485.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

470

CIMON-Xpanel

device configuration”.

Create a new
device

To configure the communication device of LSIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in the menu
or icon

tool-bar , and then “I/O device configuration”dialog box will be shown up. And then click [new
device] button.
“I/O device selection”dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a device type as the
following figure.

I/O Device Name : In the case there are various kinds of field equipments, Type device name
to identify what equipments it is. The string “DEV”of this item will be shown up in the
selection list of I/O device when you register a tag. Xpanel can communicate with various
kinds of equipment simultaneously connected by identifying equipment by its name. The
value which is saved as a tag is the compound string of a device name and station name as
following

“DEV.ST”(“DEV”is a device name, and “ST”is a station name). And it is used as

a unique identifier in Xpanel project.

Communication Driver

Select a device
type

471

Select a device type : ' LSIS GLOFA PLC '
You can select communication device which is connected to Xpanel.

Comm.Port

COM1
Select communication port to communicate. If you use RS-422/485, you
must select “COM1”. When RS-232 communication type of COM1 port is
used, 9P DSUB connector is used. And When RS-422/485 communication
type of COM1 port is used, 5P plug connector is used. If you use COM1
port, you cannot use RS-232 and RS-422/485 together, but you can use
only one type.

472

CIMON-Xpanel

Baud rate

Parity

None

Data bits

8 bits

Stop bits

1 bits

RTS/CTS

OFF
RTS/CTS control is used for HALF-DUPLEX communication. When you
ordinary modem of two-wire circuit, you can control the modem by this
implement. Because of RS-485 communication port of the Xpanel supports
Auto Toggle function so Xpanel doesn’
t use this function. This example
doesn’
t use RTS-CTS control.

Retry No.

3
If communication failed with the kind of field equipments, it will retry as
the number of this.

Time Out

s time out count will be 30
30 (If you input as the number of 30 then it’
seconds. )

Using Dial Up

Not Select (This item can be chosen only when you use Dial Up modem.)

Modem

Create a station

Communication Driver

Station Name

473

ST
When field equipments number exceed over than 2, station name is used
for division of field equipment at the internal Xpanel.
Internal Xpanel it expresses as “Device.Station”and this example shows
you as “DEV.ST”.

Station Type

DirectNet

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

0
When field equipments number exceed over than 2, it assigned different
Station No. to divide. Station number must be same configured in field
equipments. It will not be communicated if the Station No. different each
other.

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap

Parameter Setup : Cnet Frame Editor

474

CIMON-Xpanel

Run Cnet Frame Please run ‘
Cnet Frame Editor’from GLOFA Loader and activate I/O configurations.
Editor

Channel

RS232 side
To Communicate by RS/232, select the Button ‘
RS232 side’
.

Station

00
Configure Station number to 00. When field equipments number exceed
over than 1, it assigned different Station No. to divide. It will not be
communicated if the Station No. different each other. The way of wiring
will be following.

Cnet Frame
Editor

Baud Rate

9600

Data Bit

8 bits

Parity

NONE

If all configurations were ended, select [Online] [Write] in the menu.

Communication Driver

475

Select the proper slot which was located Cnet module and click [Write].

Wiring Diagram

You can wire communication cable as the following figures.

RS-232C :
NULL MODEM

Xpanel connects three lines to PLC. PLC connects lines such as above figure. If you don’
t
connect lines to PLC as the showing figure, it can’
t transmit data to other field equipments
but can receive data so that not to be accomplished communication.
RS-422

476

CIMON-Xpanel

On wiring as the above figure terminal resistance must be 330Ω.
To improve stability of communication it should connect SG and use STP cable.
But shielded cables must be earthed.
RS-485

On wiring as above the figure terminal resistance must be 120Ω.
When Xpanel is using RS-485, it connect with SDA and SDB but disconnect with RDA and
RDB.
To improve stability of communication it should connect SG and use STP cable.
But shielded cables must be earthed.

Device Memory range

You can use device memories as following range.

Direct Variable

Data type

Remark

%QX0.0.0 - %QX63.7.63

BIT

Output image area

%IX0.0.0 - %QX63.7.63

BIT

Input image area

%MX0 - %MX524287

BIT

Direct variable area

%MW0.0 - %MW32767.15

BIT

Direct variable area

%MD0.0 - %MD16383.31

BIT

Direct variable area

%QW0.0.0 - %QW63.7.3

WORD

Output image area

Communication Driver

%IW0.0.0 - %QW63.7.3

WORD

Input image area

%MW0 - %MX32767

WORD

Direct variable area

%QD0.0.0 - %QD63.7.1

DWORD

Output image area

%ID0.0.0 - %QD63.7.1

DWORD

Input image area

%MD0 - %MD16383

DWORD

Direct variable area

477

Error Code

When Xpanel communicates with PLC it can receive NAK including error code.
Reference Error code contents as following table.
Error
Code

Error type

Error factors and contents

0001

PLC system Error

Interface failed with PLC

0011

Data Error

In case of data length was wrong
In case of it doesn’
t start with ‘
%’
In case of variable value was wrong
If the case of Bit value write, you must write 00 or 01 but
you write other value

1132

Device memory Error

In case of unusable characters were inputted

1232

Data magnitude Error

In case of Read/Write requesting was over 60 Words

1332

Data type inconformity

When it does doing each case of Read/Write, if the data type
of each block was dislike then it will be happen.

1432

Data value Error

Unable to transform Data value to Hex

7132

permitted range of variable

Over requesting through each device supports memory

over Error

range.

27.14 LSIS GLOFA Enet
This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with LSIS GLOFA PLC using Ethernet.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

478

CIMON-Xpanel

Create a new
device

To configure the communication device of LGIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in the menu or
icon

in tool-bar, and then “I/O device configuration”dialog box will be shown up. And then click

[new device] button. “I/O device selection”dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a
device type as the following figure.

I/O Device Name : In the case there are various kinds of field equipments, Type device name to
identify what equipments it is. The string “DEV”of this item will be shown up in the selection
list of I/O device when you register a tag. Xpanel can communicate with various kinds of
equipment simultaneously connected by identifying equipment by its name. The value which is
saved as a tag is the compound string of a device name and station name as following

“DEV.

ST”(“DEV”is a device name, and “ST”is a station name). And it is used as a unique identifier
in Xpanel project.

Select a device
type

Select a device type: LSIS GLOFA PLC
You can select communication device which is connected to Xpanel.

Communication Driver

Protocol

479

UDP
You can choose one of the protocols - UPD, TCP when you use Ethernet.
Because the size of data which is used in normal industry is small, UDP is
generally used. TCP is efficient for transferring big sized data.

Retry No.

3
If communication failed with the kind of field equipments, it will retry as the
number of this.

Create a station

Move to [Station] tab at the “Serial Communication Configuration”Dialog Box and click [Add Station]
button then you can see “Station”Dialog Box popped up. Please configuration as the following
contents then click “OK” button.

480

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

When field equipments number exceed over than 2, station name is used for
division of field equipment at the internal Xpanel. Internal Xpanel it expresses
as “Device.Station”and this example shows you as “DEV.ST”.

Station Type
Network ID
IP Address

GLOFA
This field has no effect.
172.16.106.254
Exactly input the field equipment’
s IP address which is identified. If IP
address is not correct, it will not be communicated.

Socket Port No.

2005
The exclusive use of GLOFA Enet supporting socket number is TCP 2004,
UDP 2005.

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap

Communication Driver

481

Parameter Setup : Enet Frame Editor

Run Enet Frame Please run ‘
Enet Frame Editor’from GLOFA Loader and activate I/O configurations.
Editor

PLC Type

proper PLC which is using the same PLC.)
GM1 / 2 / 3 Select
(

IP Address

172.16.106.254
Please input the correct IP address which is corresponded with
already configured by Xpanel Designer.

Subnet Mask

255.255.0.0
Please input the correct Subnet Mask which is corresponded with
already configured by Xpanel Designer.

GateWay

172.16.100.1
If field equipment is connected out of the Local network, you must
input IP address of GateWay.

Enet Frame

If all configurations were ended, select 'Online Write' in the menu.

482

CIMON-Xpanel

Editor
: Write

Select the proper slot which was located Enet module and click [Write].

Wiring Diagram

RJ45 Connector

RJ45 Jack

Direct Cable: Host <-> HUB
Cable

Color

Orange/W

Orange

Green/W

Blue

Blue/W

Cable

Communication Driver

Green

Brown/W

Brown

Crossover Cable: Host <-> Host
Cable

Color

Orange/W

Green/W

Orange

Green

Green/W

Orange/W

Blue

Blue/W

Green

Orange

Brown/W

Brown

Device Memory ramge

You can use device memories as following range.
Direct Variable

Data type

Remark

%QX0.0.0 - %QX63.7.63

BIT

Output image area

%IX0.0.0 - %QX63.7.63

BIT

Input image area

%MX0 - %MX524287

BIT

Direct variable area

%MW0.0 - %MW32767.15

BIT

Direct variable area

%MD0.0 - %MD16383.31

BIT

Direct variable area

%QW0.0.0 - %QW63.7.3

WORD

Output image area

%IW0.0.0 - %QW63.7.3

WORD

Input image area

%MW0 - %MX32767

WORD

Direct variable area

%QD0.0.0 - %QD63.7.1

DWORD

Output image area

%ID0.0.0 - %QD63.7.1

DWORD

Input image area

%MD0 - %MD16383

DWORD

Direct variable area

Error Code

When Xpanel communicates with PLC it can receive NAK including error code.

Cable

483

484

CIMON-Xpanel

Error
Code

Error type

Error factors and contents

0001

PLC system Error

Interface failed with PLC

0011

Data Error

In case of data length was wrong
In case of it doesn’
t start with ‘
%’
In case of variable value was wrong
If the case of Bit value write, you must write 00 or 01 but you
write other value

1132

Device memory Error

In case of unusable characters were inputted

1232

Data magnitude Error

In case of Read/Write requesting was over 60 Words

1332

Data type inconformity

When it does doing each case of Read/Write, if the data type of
each block was dislike then it will be happen.

1432

Data value Error

Unable to transform Data value to Hex

7132

permitted range of

Over requesting through each device supports memory range.

variable over Error
You can reference Error code contents as following table.

27.15 LSIS GLOFA Loader
This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with LSIS GLOFA PLC using Loader
Port.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
device

To configure the communication device of LGIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -' I/O device' in the menu or
icon

in tool-bar, and then “I/O device configuration”dialog box will be shown up. And then

click [new device] button. “I/O device selection”dialog box is shown up, select a device name and
a device type as the following figure.

Communication Driver

485

I/O Device Name : In the case there are various kinds of field equipments, Type device name
to identify what equipments it is. The string “DEV”of this item will be shown up in the
selection list of I/O device when you register a tag. Xpanel can communicate with various
kinds of equipment simultaneously connected by identifying equipment by its name. The
value which is saved as a tag is the compound string of a device name and station name as
following

“DEV.ST”(“DEV”is a device name, and “ST”is a station name). And it is used as

a unique identifier in Xpanel project.

Select a device
type

Select a device type : LSIS GLOFA PLC Loader
You can select communication device which is connected to Xpanel.

486

CIMON-Xpanel

Comm.Port

Baud rate

38,400

Communication Driver

487

Select the communication speed to equipment. The configuration of the
communication speed of Xpanel must be the same as the configuration of
equipment. If speed of the configurations of two sides are not same, they
will not be communicated each other.
Parity

None

Data bits

8 bits

Stop bits

1 bits

RTS/CTS

OFF

Retry No.

3
If communication failed with the kind of field equipments, it will retry as
the number of this.

Time Out

30
If you input as the number of 30 then it’
s time out count will be 30
seconds.

Create a station

Using Dial Up

Not Select

Modem

This item can be chosen only when you use Dial Up modem.

Station Name

When field equipments number exceed over than 2, station name is used

488

CIMON-Xpanel

for division of field equipment at the internal Xpanel.
Internal Xpanel it expresses as “Device.Station”and this example shows
you as “DEV.ST”.
Station Type
Network ID
Station No.
16Bit Data

GLOFA
This field has no effect.
0
This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap

Wiring Diagram

You can wire communication cable as the following figures.

Xpanel connects three lines to PLC. PLC connects lines such as above figure. You must connect using three
lines.
If you connect other lines it can make problems.

Device Memory range

You can use device memories as following range.

Communication Driver

Direct Variable

Data type

Remark

%QX0.0.0 - %QX63.7.63

BIT

Output image area

%IX0.0.0 - %QX63.7.63

BIT

Input image area

%MX0 - %MX524287

BIT

Direct variable area

%MW0.0 - %MW32767.15

BIT

Direct variable area

%MD0.0 - %MD16383.31

BIT

Direct variable area

%QW0.0.0 - %QW63.7.3

WORD

Output image area

%IW0.0.0 - %QW63.7.3

WORD

Input image area

%MW0 - %MX32767

WORD

Direct variable area

%QD0.0.0 - %QD63.7.1

DWORD

Output image area

%ID0.0.0 - %QD63.7.1

DWORD

Input image area

%MD0 - %MD16383

DWORD

Direct variable area

489

27.16 LSIS XGT Cnet
This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with LSIS GLOFA PLC using RS232C or
RS422/485.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
device

To configure the communication device of LSIS PLC, Select 'Tools' - 'I/O device' in the menu or
icon

in tool-bar, and then “I/O device configuration”dialog box will be shown up. And then

click [new device] button. “I/O device selection”dialog box is shown up, select a device name and
a device type as the following figure.

490

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name : In the case there are various kinds of field equipments, Type device name
to identify what equipments it is. The string “XGTCNET”of this item will be shown up in the
selection list of I/O device when you register a tag. Xpanel can communicate with various
kinds of equipment simultaneously connected by identifying equipment by its name. The
value which is saved as a tag is the compound string of a device name and station name as
following

“XGTCNET.ST”(“XGTCNET”is a device name, and “ST”is a station name). And it

is used as a unique identifier in Xpanel project.

Select a device
type

Select a device type : ' LSIS XGT/XGB Series PLC Cnet '
You can select communication device which is connected to Xpanel.

Communication Driver

Comm.Port

491

COM1
Select communication port to communicate. This example shows you
selecting COM1 port. If you want use other port select one in this combo
box.

Baud rate

38,400

Parity

None

Data bits

8 bits

Stop bits

1 bits

492

CIMON-Xpanel

RTS/CTS
Comm. Type

t use RTS-CTS control.)
OFF ( This example doesn’
RS232
(To Communicate by RS/232, configure Type to RS-232.
When you use RS-422 communication select RS-422 or you use RS-485
communication then select RS-485.)

Retry No.

3
If communication failed with the kind of field equipments, it will retry as
the number of this.

Time Out

30
s time out count will be 30
(If you input as the number of 30 then it’
seconds..)

Create a station

Using Dial Up

Not Select

Modem

This item can be chosen only when you use Dial Up modem.

Station Name

Station Type

XGT Series

Communication Driver

493

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

When field equipments number exceed over than 2, it assigned different
Station No. to divide. Station number must be same configured in field
equipments. It will not be communicated if the Station No. different each
other.

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap

Parameter Setup : Network Manager

Run Network
Manager

Please run ‘
Network Manager’from XGT Loader program and activate I/O configurations.

494

CIMON-Xpanel

Comm.Type

RS232C
To Communicate by RS/232, configure Type to RS-232 at Channel 1.
When you use RS-422 communication select RS-422 or you use RS485 communication then select RS-485.

Speed

38,400

Data Bit

Stop Bit

Parity

NONE

Modem type

Null Modem

Modem

This field has no effect.

Initialization

Communication Driver

Station No.

495

0
Station No. needed to distinguish when it communicate several PLC.
When field equipments number exceed over than 2, it assigned
different Station No. to divide. Station number must be same
configured in field equipments. It will not be communicated if the
Station No. different each other.

Delay time

Time out

Wiring Diagram

You can wire communication cable as the following figures.

RS-232C

RS-422

On wiring as the above figure terminal resistance must be 330Ω.
To improve stability of communication it should connect SG and use STP cable.

496

CIMON-Xpanel

But shielded cables must be earthed.
RS-485

On wiring as above the figure terminal resistance must be 120Ω.
When Xpanel is using RS-485, it connects with SDA and SDB but disconnect with
RDA and RDB.
To improve stability of communication it should connect SG and use STP cable.
But shielded cables must be earthed.

Device Memory range

Usable device memory range
You can use device memories as following range.

Type

Range

Size (Word)

Remark

P0 P2047

2048

Read/Write/Monitor

M0 M2047

2048

Read/Write/Monitor

L0 L11263

11264

Read/Write/Monitor

K0 K2047

2048

Read/Write/Monitor

F0 F2047

2048

Read/Monitor

T2047

2048

Read/Write/Monitor

C0 C2047

2048

Read/Write/Monitor

D32767

32768

Read/Write/Monitor (XGK-CPUH)

D19999

20000

Read/Write/Monitor (XGK-CPUS)

128

Read/Write/Monitor

S0 S127

Error Code

Communication Driver

497

When Xpanel communicates with PLC it can receive NAK including error code.
Reference Error code contents as following table.

Error Code

Error type

Error factors and contents

0003

Over block number

It is block number bigger than 16 in the case of individual
Read/Write requesting.

0004

Variable length error

Variable length is over than its max size 16.

0007

Data type error

Receiving data is not included in X,B,W,D,L

0011

Data error

The memory address that including the length of data is
incorrect
In the case of starting without %
In the case of variable value is incorrect.
When you write a Bit Value, you must use only 0 or 1.

0090

Monitor

In the case of executing unregistered Monitor

0190

Monitor execution error

In the case of the number exceeds register number limit

0290

Monitor registration error

In the case of the number exceeds register number limit

1132

Device memory error

In the case of not entering using device name or character

1232

Data size error

In case of Read/Write requesting was over 60 Words

1234

Sufficient frame error

Unnecessary contents exist

1332

Data type inconformity

When it does doing each case of Read/Write, if the data type
of each block was dislike then it will be happen.

1432

Data value Error

Unable to transform Data value to Hex

7132

permitted range of variable

Over requesting through each device supports memory

over Error

range.

27.17 LSIS XGT Enet
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and LSIS XGT
series PLCs via Ethernet protocol.
Following communication module can be connected with this driver.
· XGL-EFMT ( Fast Ethernet)

Communication Setup : Xpanel

498

CIMON-Xpanel

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e

For creating a new device activate the menu 'Tools' -> 'I/O Devices' or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database
accompanied by the 'Station Name'.

Sel Select a network type: ' LSIS XGT Series FEnet '
ect
a
After selecting the 'OK' button of previous step, 'Ethernet Communication Configuration' dialog box will
net
be popped up as shown in following picture.
wo
rk
typ
e

Communication Driver

499

In this window, select the 'Device Type' as 'LSIS XGT Series FEnet' and appropriate communication
parameters.
Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n

Move to the 'Station' tab of 'Ethernet Communication Configuration' dialog box. In this dialog box, all
the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each field can be
configured with following rules.

500

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the 'Device Name'.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
XGL-EFMT’
. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no meaning in this driver. (ignored in runtime)

IP Address

Give the IP address of PLC with dotted a decimal format

Socket Port No.

The socket number should be configured as 2005 for UDP and 2004 for TCP.
Please verify your configuration (UDP or TCP) in "Communication Port" setup
tab.
n UDP/IP Port : 2005
n TCP/IP Port : 2004

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Fixed XPANEL

If this option was checked, Xpanel will use only one port defined in 'XPANEL

Socket Port /

Socket Port No.' field for connection with PLC. Otherwise, Xpanel will change

XPANEL Socket

the port at every TCP connection or communication error.

Communication Driver

Port No.

501

This option is provided for Xpanel to deal with various TCP port management
ways of PLC. Some PLC has a limit on the number of TCP services. In that
case, this option can be a help.
The actual effect of this option on PLC cannot be described here. Because,
there are too many kinds of PLC and the response in PLC is entirely dependant
on the specification of PLC and engineer's experience.
The default setting of this option is unchecked state.

Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message Pop

message at every Rx and Tx error.

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically about 5 seconds after.

Communication Setup : XG5000

Following picture shows the screen shot of 'Network Manager' of XG5000 programming tool.
This window can be activated by the menu of 'Tool-Network Manager'.

502

CIMON-Xpanel

IP Address

Give the IP address of PLC with dotted decimal format. This address has to be
registered in the device configurationof XPanelDesigner as described before.

Subnet mask,
Gateway

system.

Give the appropriate values which are provided by network administrator of your

DHCP

Do not use this option. The XPanel supports fixed IP address device only.

Driver

Choose the “XGT server”.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in XPanel has the following format.

TAG Type

Format

Example

Analog

[Symbol][Address]

D064

Communication Driver

Digital

503

[Symbol][Address].[Bit Number] or [Symbol][Address][BitM012.A or M012A
Number]

· Address : decimal number (0..65535)
· Bit Number : hexa-decimal number (0..F)

Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in XPanel database.
Symbol

Description

Range
(Word)

Word
Notation

Bit
Notation

Type

Access

I/O Relay

2048

P123

P123A

Bit/Word

R/W

Auxiliary Relay

2048

M123

M123A

Bit/Word

R/W

Link Relay

11264

L123

L123A

Bit/Word

R/W

Keep Relay

8192

K123

K123A

Bit/Word

R/W

Special Relay

2048

F123

F123A

Bit/Word

Timer (CV)

2048

T123

Word

R/W

Counter (CV)

2048

C123

Word

R/W

D123

D123.A(1)

Bit/Word

R/W

N123

N123.A(1)

Bit/Word

R/W

D
N

Data Reg

32768

Comm. Data
Reg

28763

(1) When a ‘
D’or ‘N’register was referenced by a digital TAG with bit notation, it cannot be

written. (Read only)

Support Function Table

Following table shows the list of functions that are supported by ‘LSIS XGT Series Ethernet’
communication driver.

Function

Support

Block Data Read

Block Data Write

String real Tag

Word Swap

Dword Swap

Remark

504

CIMON-Xpanel

Block

Data This function makes it possible that is bulk data reading at a time.
Re It will be applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the
ad Xpanel.

Block

Data This function makes it possible that is bulk data writing at a time.
Wr It will be applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the
ite Xpanel.

String real Tag

It makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicate
string data of
Xpanel with PLC.

Word Swap

This function swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data. It
depends upon 16Bit
Data Swap configuration.

Dword Swap

This function swaps words of all double word sized data. It depends upon
32Bit Data Swap
configuration.

27.18 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Loader
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and LSIS MasterK S Series Loader.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

Communication Driver

505

I/O Device Name
Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the
Station Name’
.
‘

Sel Select a device type : LSIS Master-K H-Series PLC Loader
ect
a
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box will be
de
vic
popped up as shown in following picture.
e
typ
e

506

CIMON-Xpanel

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Loader’and appropriate
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the device’
s configuration.

Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box. In this dialog box, all the
connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be configured with
following rules.

Communication Driver

Station Name

507

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window accompanied
with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
S Series’
. (Another type can’
t be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no meaning in this driver. (Ignored in runtime)

Station No.

This number must be matched with the one of PLC.

16Bit Data Swap

This field has no meaning in this driver.

508

CIMON-Xpanel

32Bit Data Swap

This field has no meaning in this driver.

CheckSum

This field has no meaning in this driver.
If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification message at
every Rx and Tx error.

Comm. Error
Message Pop Up

Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the message at data receive error.
Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the
notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically
about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation

Symbol

Range

Size

Access

P0 - P63F

R/W

M0 - M203F

192

R/W

L0 - L63F

R/W

K0 - K31F

R/W

F0 - F63F

T0 - T256

256

R/W

C0 -C256

256

R/W

D0 -D9999

10000

R/W

S0 - S99

100

R/W

Refer the upper table for available device range.
If you use ‘P,M,L,K,F’device by digital tag, the lowest position number is hexadecimal and else
number decimal.
If you use ‘P,M,L,K,F’device by analog tag, all number is decimal.

Communication Cable Wiring

Communication Driver

509

RS-232Cwiring

27.19 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Cnet
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and LSIS MasterK H Series through RS232 or RS422/485.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in tool-bar.

510

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name
Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by
the ‘
Station Name’
.

Sel Select a device type : LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Cnet
ect
a
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box will be
de
vic
popped up as shown in following picture.
e
typ
e

Communication Driver

511

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Cnet’and appropriate
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the device’
s configuration.

Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box. In this dialog box, all the
connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be configured with
following rules.

512

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
S Series’
. (Another type can’
t be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no meaning in this driver. (Ignored in runtime)

Station No.

This number must be matched with the one of PLC.

16Bit Data Swap

This field has no meaning in this driver.

Communication Driver

32Bit Data Swap

This field has no meaning in this driver.

CheckSum

This field has no meaning in this driver.

513

If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification message at
every Rx and Tx error.
Comm. Error
Message Pop Up

Communication Setup : Frame Editor

Configure communication card setting by LSIS Cnet Frame Editor.

Option -> Port : Select proper PC’
s port to connect loader.

514

CIMON-Xpanel

Online -> Connect
Online -> Read : Read configurations from communication card.
Onlie -> Write : Change the configurations for communication and download changed configurations.
Refer the manual for more details.

Address Notation

Symbol

Range

Size

Access

P0 - P63F

R/W

M0 - M203F

192

R/W

L0 - L63F

R/W

K0 - K31F

R/W

F0 - F63F

T0 - T256

256

R/W

C0 -C256

256

R/W

D0 -D9999

10000

R/W

S0 - S99

100

R/W

Refer the upper table for available device range.
If you use ‘P,M,L,K,F’device by digital tag, the lowest position number is hexadecimal and
else number decimal.
If you use ‘P,M,L,K,F’device by analog tag, all number is decimal.

Communication Cable Wiring

RS-232Cwiring

Communication Driver

515

RS-422 wiring

Use terminal resistance by 330Ω.
For stable communication, connect SG and use STP cable and surely earth the
shield.

RS-485 wiring

Use terminal resistance by 120Ω.
If you use RS-485, don’
t connect RDA & RDB but SDA & SDB at Xpanel.
For stable communication, connect SG and use STP cable and surely earth the
shield.

27.20 LSIS Master-K H Series PLC Cnet
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and LSIS MasterK H Series through RS232 or RS422/485.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

516

CIMON-Xpanel

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name
Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by
the ‘
Station Name’
.

Sel Select a device type : LSIS Master-K H-Series PLC Cnet
ect
a
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box will be
de
vic
popped up as shown in following picture.
e
typ
e

Communication Driver

517

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
LSIS Master-K H-Series PLC Cnet’and appropriate
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the device’
s configuration.

Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box. In this dialog box, all the
connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be configured with
following rules.

518

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
Master-K 500/1000’
. (Another type can’
t be selected.)
’

Network ID

This field has no meaning in this driver. (Ignored in runtime)

Station No.

This number must be matched with the one of PLC.

16Bit Data Swap

This field has no meaning in this driver.

Communication Driver

32Bit Data Swap

This field has no meaning in this driver.

CheckSum

This field has no meaning in this driver.

519

If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification message
at every Rx and Tx error.
Comm. Error
Message Pop Up

Master-K 500/1000DIP SWITCH Configuration

*If communication type is RS-485, configure baud rate by loader.

Address Notation

Symbol

Range

Size

Access

P0 - P63F

R/W

520

CIMON-Xpanel

M0 - M203F

192

R/W

L0 - L63F

R/W

K0 - K31F

R/W

F0 - F63F

T0 - T256

256

R/W

C0 -C256

256

R/W

D0 -D9999

10000

R/W

S0 - S99

100

R/W

Refer the upper table for available device range.
If you use ‘P,M,L,K,F’device by digital tag, the lowest position number is hexadecimal and
else number decimal.
If you use ‘P,M,L,K,F’device by analog tag, all number is decimal.

Communication Cable Wiring

RS-232Cwiring

Communication Driver

521

RS-422 wiring

Use terminal resistance by 330Ω.
For stable communication, connect SG and use STP cable and surely earth the
shield.

RS-485 wiring

Use terminal resistance by 120Ω.
If you use RS-485, don’
t connect RDA & RDB but SDA & SDB at Xpanel.
For stable communication, connect SG and use STP cable and surely earth the
shield.

27.21 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Enet
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and CIMONPLC.
Following module is able to communicate with this driver.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in tool-bar.

522

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name
Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the
Station Name’
.
‘

Sel Select a device type : LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Ethernet
ect
a
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box will be
de
vic
popped up as shown in following picture.
e
typ
e

Communication Driver

523

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Enet’and appropriate
communication parameters. Those parameters must be matched with the PLC. Protocol type must be selected by
UDP’
.
‘

Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Ehternetl Communication Configuration’dialog box. In this dialog box, all the
connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be configured with
following rules.

524

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window accompanied
with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
Master-K S ’
. (You can’
t select any other type.)

Network ID

This field has no meaning in this driver. (Ignored in runtime)

IP Address

Input PLC’
s IP by decimal number and point for connection.

Socket Port No.

If you want to use UDP, port number is 2005 else TCP, port number is 2004.
Go to “Communication Port”and confirm the protocol. (UDP or TCP)

16Bit Data Swap

This field has no meaning in this driver.

32Bit Data Swap

This field has no meaning in this driver.
If you select this option, XPanel use only one port to connect PLC defined by ‘
Xpanel

Fixed XPANEL
Socket Port

Socket Port No.’If it is not, Xpanel will change the port no. when it occurs
communication error.
This option makes XPanel to handle various port management methods. Several PLC has
restriction about TCP service number. In that case, this option will help.

Communication Driver

525

We can’
t mention all about this option this time. Because, too many PLC beings this
world and response of PLC totally depended from PLC manual and engineer’
s
experience.
This option is unchecked by default.
If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification message at
every Rx and Tx error.
Comm. Error
Message Pop Up

Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the message at data receive error. Only
when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification
message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds
after.

Communication Setup : Frame Editor

Following picture shows frame editor for configure of Master K Ethernet module.

526

CIMON-Xpanel

Edit -> Basic Parameters

Communication Driver

527

Input PLC’
s IP address by decimal number and point. It is must be same previous
IP Address

Subnet Mask,
Gateway
DNS Server

set at XPanelDesigner’
s I/O device configuration.
Input the proper value offered from system network manager.
Input same value with Xpanel.
Input the proper value offered from system network manager.

Address Notation

Following table shows address notation at XPanel.

TYPE

FORM

Example

Analog

[Symbol][Address]

D064

Digital

[Symbol][Address].[Bit Number] or
[Symbol][Address][Bit Number]

M012.A or
M012A

· Address : Decimal (0..65535)
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

528

CIMON-Xpanel

· Bit Number : Hex (0..F)

Following table shows referable device list by XPanel.

Symbol

Description

Range

Word

Bit

(word)

Notation

Type

Read Write

Notation

I/O Relay

1024

P23

P23A

Bit/Word

R/W

Auxiliary Relay

3072

M23

M23A

Bit/Word

R/W

Link Relay

1024

L23

L23A

Bit/Word

R/W

Keep Relay

512

K23

K23A

Bit/Word

R/W

Special Relay

1024

F23

F23A

Bit/Word

Timer (CV)

256

T123

Word

R/W

Counter (CV)

256

C123

Word

R/W

Data Reg

10000

D123

D123.A(1)

Bit/Word

R/W

Special Reg.

100

S123

S123.A(1)

Bit/Word

R/W

(1) If register as ‘
D’or ‘
S’is used by BIT, it can’
t use write but only read.

Support Function Table

Next table shows the available functions from the ‘
LSIS Master-K S-Series Enet’communication driver.

Function

Support

Block Data Read

Block Data Write

String real Tag

Word Swap

Dword Swap

Remark

Block Data
Read

This function makes it possible that is bulk data reading at a time. It will be

Block Data
Write

This function makes it possible that is bulk data writing at a time. It will be applied

applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the Xpanel.

when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the Xpanel.
It makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicate string

String real Tag
Word Swap

data of Xpanel with PLC.
This function swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data. It depends upon

Communication Driver

529

16Bit Data Swap configuration.
This function swaps words of all double word sized data. It depends upon 32Bit
Dword Swap

Data Swap configuration.

27.22 LSIS Inverter Starvert
This driver can communicate with iP5A and iV5 inverters from LSIS via its dedicated protocol.

Communication Setup : (iP5A example)

For normal communication, following parameter must be set as noted at inverter side.
[Inverter Setting Example]

Parameter
Number

Set Value

Description

DRV_03

Int. 485

Drive mode

DRV_04

Int. 485

Frequency control mode

I/O_90

Station number (1 .. 250)

I/O_91

9600

Communication speed (19200, 9600 or 4800 recommended)

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create
a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/ODevices’or
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in tool-bar.

530

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database
accompanied by the ‘Station Name’.

Select
a
device
type

I/O Device type : ' LSIS INVERTER Starvert Series '
Serial Communication Configuration ’dialog box will be
After selecting the ‘OK’button of previous step, ‘
popped up as
shown in following picture.
LSIS INVERTER Starvert Series’and configure the proper serial
In this window, select the ‘Device Type’as ‘
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the inverter configuration.
All communication parameters except baudrate are fixed as : no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit.

Communication Driver

Create
a
station

531

Station’tab of ‘Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box.
Move to the ‘
In this dialog box, all the connected inverter stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel.
Each field can be configured with following rules.

532

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the ‘Device
Name’.

Station Type

Choose one of two inverter models (‘iP5A’and ‘iV5’).

Network ID

This field has no meaning in this driver.

Station No

Specify a decimal number between 1 and 250.

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using

This field has no effect.
Checksu
m

Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification message

Message pop

at every Rx and Tx error.Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the

message at data receive error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value

Communication Driver

533

to the station) error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will
be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in XPanel has the following format.
TAG Type

Format

Example

Analog

[Symbol][Hexadecimal Number]

M0006

Digital

[Symbol][Hexadecimal Number][.][DecimalNumber]

M0006.12

Symbol

Address

Description

0000

002C

Communication Memory Area

0500

051B

Reference Data Memory Area (Not supported in iP5A model)

9100 - 9800

Parameter Memory Area

Above addresses can be used in both of analog and digital TAG.
For more information of each point, please refer to the manual of inverter.

Communication Cable Wiring

27.23 MITSUBISHI Inverter FR-E500
This driver can communicate with the FR-E510/520/540 inverter series from Mitsubishi.

534

CIMON-Xpanel

Xpanel Setting Example

For normal communication, following parameter must be set as noted at inverter side.
· CR/LF instruction presence/absence (Pr. 124) :Mode 2 (with CR/LF)
· Comm. response waiting time (Pr. 123) : 9999 (use the waiting time data)

Inverter Setting Example

Parameter Number

Set Value

Description

Communication Driver

1171

Station number 0. (any number between 0 to 31)

1181

192

19200 bps

1191

8 data bits, 1 stop bit

1201

No parity

121

9999

Don’t use the communication retry

122

9999

Don’t use the communication timeout

1232

9999

Response delay is dependent on the received frame.

1242

Use CR/LF terminator

535

(Note 1) Those parameters (117 to 120) must be matched with the settings of Xpanel.

(Note 2) The parameters of 123 and 124 must be set as the value shown in this example. If those
parameters were set as other values,
Xpanel can not communicate with the inverter.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format.

TAG Type

Format

Example

Analog

[Symbol][Decimal

Number]

Digital

[Symbol][Decimal

Number][.][Hexadecimal

P023
Number]

B022.F

Symbol

Address

Description

Inst. (R)

Inst. (W)

Access

000 - 999

Parameter Area

H00

H80

R/W

008

Second Parameter

H6C

HEC

009

RAM Set Frequency

H6D

HED

010

EEPROM Set Frequency

H6E

HEE

023

Operation Mode

H7B

HFB

027

Link Parameter

H7F

HFF

011

Output Frequency (Speed)

H6F

012

Output Current

H70

013

Output Voltage

H71

016

Recent Alarm

H74

017

H75

018

H76

019

H77

022

Inverter Status (Bit mapped)

H7A

H63

HE3

R/W

536

CIMON-Xpanel

016

Alarm Definition Batch Clear

HF4

022

Run Command (Bit mapped)

HFA

024

All Parameter Clear

HFC

025

Inverter Reset

HFD

Above addresses can be used in both of analog and digital TAG.
For more information of each point, please refer to the manual of inverter.

Communication Cable Wiring

27.24 MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU)
This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel using ‘
MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C protocol’

Communication Driver

537

communication with
ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU using RS232C or RS422/485.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
Device

To configure the communication device of Melsec 1C (ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU) PLC, Select
'Tools - I/O device' in the
menu or icon

in tool-bar, and then “I/O device configuration” dialog box will be shown up.

And then click [new device] button. “I/O device selection” dialog box is shown up, select a
device name and a device type as the following figure.

I/O Device Name MEL
In the case there are various kinds of field equipments, Type device

538

CIMON-Xpanel

name to identify what equipments it is. The string “MEL” of this item will
be shown up in the selection list of I/O device when you register a tag.
Xpanel can communicate with various kinds of equipment
simultaneously connected by identifying equipment by its name. The
value which is saved as a tag is the compound string of a device name
and station name as following

“MEL.ST” (“DEV” is a device name, and

“ST" is a station name). And it is used as a unique identifier in Xpanel
project.
I/O Device

Serial device

Selection

You can select field equipment and a communication type. Select one
according to the communication method of the selected device.

Select a device
type

I/O Device type : ' MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (AnA/AnU CPU) '
You can select communication device which is connected to Xpanel. This example shows you
selecting “MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (AnA/AnU CPU)”. But if you want to use ACPU, select
“MITSUBISHI 1C (ACPU).

Communication Driver

Comm.Port

539

COM1
This example uses COM1 port. If you want use other ports, select one in
the combo box.

Baud rate

19,200
Select the communication speed to equipment. The configuration of the
communication speed of Xpanel must be the same as the configuration of
equipment. If speed of the configurations of two sides are not same, they

540

CIMON-Xpanel

will not be communicated each other.
Parity

None

Data bits

8 Bits

Stop bits

1 Bits

RTS/CTS

ON
This example uses RTS-CTS control always ON doing.

Comm. Type

RS232
This example selects S232 communication.
When you use RS-422 communication select RS-422 or you use RS-485
communication then select RS-485.

Retry No.

3
If communication failed with the kind of field equipments, it will retry as
the number of this.

Time Out

30
If you input as the number of 30 then it’
s time out count will be 30
seconds.

Create a station

Using Dial Up

Not Select

Modem

This item can be chosen only when you use Dial Up modem.

Move to [Station] tab at the “Serial Communication Configuration”Dialog Box and click [Add
Station] button
then you can see “Station”Dialog Box popped up. Please configuration as the following
contents then click “OK” button.

Communication Driver

Station Name

541

Station Type
Network ID
Station No.

AnA / AnU
This field has no effect.
0
When field equipments number exceed over than 2, it assigned different
Station No. to divide. Station number must be same configured in field
equipments. It will not be communicated if the Station No. different each
other.

Socket Port

2005

No.

The exclusive use of GLOFA Enet supporting socket number is TCP 2004,
UDP 2005.

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using

This field has no effect.

Checksum
Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message Pop

message at every Rx and Tx error.

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data
receive error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the
station) error, the notification message is popped up. This message box
will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Configuration of PLC Communication module : AJ71UC24

According to the following explain, configure communication module. If you want more details or not
included contents in this manual,
refer to module manuals.

Mode
Configuration

Xpanel communicate with PLC using “A compatible 1C Frame”. You can choose one of
the protocols using Mode setting switch. If you use RS-232, configure the switch as 1

542

CIMON-Xpanel

Switch

or you use RS-422/485 configure the switch as 5.
When RS-232 and RS-422/485 is used at the same time, configure switch as A.

Station No.
Configuration
Switch

Station number must same of Xpanel Station No. Above configuration of the Xpanel
station number is 0.
Both x10 and x1, configure as 0.

Communication
Configuration
Switch

Communication configuration switch configure as the following figure.
switc
h

configuration

SW1
1

Configure state
OFF

Main channel

RS-232C

RS-422

SW1
2

Data Bit

7 Bit

8 Bit

SW1
3

Baud rate

Refer to the follows

SW1
6

Parity Using

OFF

SW1
7

Even/Odd Parity

Odd

Even

SW1
8

Stop Bit

1 Bit

2 Bit

SW2
1

Sum check 사 용

OFF

SW2
2

RUN중 Write 가 능

impossible possible

SW2
3

Computer Link /

Multi-drop Computer
Link

SW2
4

수신 측 종단 저항

SW1
4
SW1
5

Multi-drop Link

Not being

Being

Baud rate configuration
Baud rate
(bps)

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

SW13

OFF

SW14

OFF

SW15

OFF

If all configurations were ended, reboot the PLC and then apply changed
configurations.

Communication Driver

543

Wiring Diagram

You can wire communication cable as the following figures.

RS-232C

RS-422

On wiring as the above figure terminal resistance must be 330Ω.
To improve stability of communication it should connect SG and use STP cable. But
shielded cables must be earthed.
RS-485

On wiring as the above figure terminal resistance must be 120Ω.
When Xpanel is using RS-485, it connects with SDA and SDB but disconnect with

544

CIMON-Xpanel

RDA and RDB.
To improve stability of communication it should connect SG and use STP cable.
But shielded cables must be earthed.

Device Memory range

I/O Device
Device

Symbol

Melsec 1C (ACPU)

Melsec 1C (AnA/AnU)

Type

Bit/Word

Input

X0000-X07FF

X000000-X001FFF

Hex

Bit

Output

Y0000-Y07FF

Y000000-Y001FFF

Hex

Bit

Internal Relay

M0000-M2047

M000000-M008191

Decimal

Bit

Latch Relay

L0000-L2047

M000000-M008191

Decimal

Bit

Step Relay

S0000-S2047

S000000-S008191

Decimal

Bit

Link Relay

B0000-B03FF

B000000-B001FFF

Hex

Bit

annanciator

F0000-M0255

F000000-F002047

Decimal

Bit

special Relay

M9000-M9255

M009000-M009255

Decimal

Bit

special register

D9000-D9255

Decimal

Word

Timer (point)

TS000-TS255

TS00000-TS02047

Decimal

Word

Timer (coil)

TC000-TC255

TC00000-TC02047

Decimal

Word

Timer(present value)

TN000-TN255

TN00000-TN02047

Decimal

Word

counter (point)

CS000-CS255

CS00000-CS01023

Decimal

Word

counter (coil)

CC000-CC255

CC00000-CC01023

Decimal

Word

counter (present value)

CN000-CN255

CN00000-CN01023

Decimal

Word

data register

D0000-D1023

D000000-D08191

Decimal

Word

Link register

W0000-W03FF

W000000-W001FFF

Hex

Word

File register

R0000-R8191

R000000-R008191

Decimal

Word

Usable device ranges are described above figure. You must use device in the allowable range. Note that
Input(X) and output(Y) are Hexadecimal.

Error Code

When Xpanel communicates with PLC it can receive NAK including error code.

Communication Driver

545

Reference Error code contents as following table.

Error
Code

Error type

Error contents

Solution

00H

Impossible on RUN

Even if it is forbade writing on

Change the configuration of On Run

Run, it receive writing commend

writable.

Parity bit wrong

Change the configuration of

01H

Parity error

Parity bit.
02H

Sum-check error

Uncorrected Sum-check

Check the wiring of the communication

03H

Protocol error

Receiving uncorrected

Confirm the opponent equipment’
s

statement that is violate control

transfer statement and communicate

order of the protocol.

after modifying.

Uncorrected stop-bit

Change the configuration of Stop-bit

04H

Framing error

configuration
05H

Over-run error

In the case of it receive data

Down the Baud rate and then try

before the previous data

communication again.

receiving ended
06H

Character part error

· Assignment method error of

Check the device range

statement
· In the case of receiving not
existed command
· In the case of exceeding
allowable range
· In the case of assigned not
existing device
07H

Character error

In the case of receiving data

Confirm the opponent equipment’
s

which it cannot use

transfer statement and communicate
after modifying.

08H

PLC access error

Cannot communication CPU

Substitute CPU as the useable

10H

PLC number error

PLC number is not “FF”or

Confirm the opponent equipment’
s

configured station number of

transfer statement and communicate

network parameter.

after modifying.

11H

Mode error

Error detection with PLC CPU

Substitute CPU as the useable

12H

Special function

Special function module is not

Confirm the opponent equipment’
s

module assignment

existed in assigned location.

transfer statement and communicate

error
21H

after modifying.

Special function

Access error to the special

According to the correspondent module

module bus error

module detected in assigned

manual, detect error and solute the

546

CIMON-Xpanel

location

problem as indicated.

27.25 MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E(Q/QnA)
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and Mitsubishi
MELSEC Q Series PLCs.
This protocol uses binary code. It supports the following families of MELSEC PLCs Ethernet modules.
· QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window
of database
accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.

Select a device
type

I/O Device type : MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Ethernet Communication Configuration’
dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

Communication Driver

547

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3E’and configure the proper
Ethernet
communication parameters.

Create a station

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Ethernet Communication Configuration’dialog box.
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel.
Each field can
be configured with following rules.

548

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
MELSEC’
. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no effect.

IP Address

Give the IP address of PLC with dotted decimal format.

Socket Port

Give the port number opened by the PLC.The default value of this field is

Number

5000.

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message Pop

message at every Rx and Tx error. Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not

display the message at data receive error. Only when there is data transmit
(writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message is popped
up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Communication Driver

Fixed XPANEL
Socket
Port / XPANEL
Socket
Port No.

549

If this option was checked, Xpanel will use only one port defined in ‘
XPANEL
Socket Port No.”field for connection with PLC. Otherwise, Xpanel will change
the port at every TCP connection or communication error.
This option is provided for Xpanel to deal with various TCP port management
ways of PLC. Some PLC has a limit on the number of TCP services. In that
case, this option can be a help.
The actual effect of this option on PLC cannot be described here. Because,
there are too many kinds of PLC and the response in PLC is entirely
dependant on the specification of PLC and engineer’
s experience.
The default setting of this option is unchecked state.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format.
Type

Format

Example

[Symbol][Address in decimal number]

D0012

[Symbol][Address in hexa-decimal number]

X01FC

Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in Xpanel database.
Memory Area

Symbol

I/O Address Range

Notation

Bit/Word

Input Relay

X000000-X001FFF

Bit

Output Relay

Y000000-Y001FFF

Bit

Internal Relay

M000000-M008191

Bit

M009000-M009255

Bit

Latch Relay

L000000-L008191

Bit

Step Relay

S000000-S008191

Bit

Link Relay

B000000-B001FFF

Bit

Annunciator

F000000-F002047

Bit

Timer Contact

TS00000-TS02047

Word

Timer Coil

TC00000-TC02047

Word

Timer Current Value

TN00000-TN02047

Word

Retentive Timer Contact

SS00000-SS02047

Word

Retentive Timer Coil

SC00000-SC02047

Word

Retentive Timer Current Value

SN00000-SN02047

Word

550

CIMON-Xpanel

Counter Contact

CS00000-CS01023

Word

Counter Coil

CC00000-CC01023

Word

Counter Current Value

CN00000-CN01023

Word

Data Register

D000000-D08191

Word

D9000-D9255

Word

Link Register

W000000-W001FFF

Word

File Register

R000000-R008191

Word

Communication Cable Wiring

Connect
through the
Ethernet HUB

Direct
connection

Communication Driver

551

27.26 MITSUBISHI Melsec 1E
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and Mitsubishi
MELSEC A or Q Series PLCs.
This protocol uses binary code. It supports the following families ofMELSEC PLCs Ethernet modules.

• AJ71E71
This communication module can be used to access data of ACPU.

• QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2
These communication modules can be used to access data of QCPU and QnACPU.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/ODevices’or
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in tool-bar.

552

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration
window of database
accompanied by the ‘Station Name’.

Select a device
type

I/O Device Type : MITSUBISHI Melsec 1E
Ethernet Communication Configuration ’
After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘
dialog box will be
popped up as shown in following picture.

Communication Driver

553

MITSUBISHI MELSEC 1E’and configure the proper
In this window, select the ‘Device Type’as ‘
Ethernet communication parameters.
Create a station

Station’tab of ‘Ethernet Communication Configuration’dialog box.
Move to the ‘
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the
XPanel. Each field can be configured with following rules.

554

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied
with the ‘Device Name’

Station Type

MELSEC

Network ID

This field has no effect.

IP Address

Give the IP address of PLC with dotted decimal format.

Socket Port

Give the port number opened by the PLC. The default value of this field

Number

is 5000.

16Bit

Data

This field has no effect.

Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit
Swap
Comm. Error

If this item is

Message

notification message at

Pop

checked, XPanel

displays a

communication error

every Rx and Tx error.
Otherwise(unchecked),XPanel does not display the message at data
receive error.
Only when there is data transmit

Communication Driver

555

(writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message is
popped up.
This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.
Fixed XPANEL

If this option was checked, XPanel will use only one port defined in ‘

Socket Port /

XPANEL Socket

Port No.”field for connection with PLC.

Port No.

Otherwise, XPanel will change the port at every TCP

connection or

communication error.
This option is provided for XPanel to deal with various TCP port
management ways of
PLC. Some PLC has a limit on the number of TCP services. In that
case, this option can
be a help. The actual effect of this option on PLC cannot be described
here.
Because, there are too many kinds of PLC and the response in PLC is
entirely
dependant on the specificationof PLC and engineer’s experience.
The default setting of this option is unchecked state.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in XPanel has the following format.
Type

Format

Example

[Symbol][Addressin decimal number]

D0012

[Symbol][Addressin hexa-decimal number]

X01FC

Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in XPanel database.
Memory Area

Symbol

I/O Address Range

Notation

Bit/Word

Input Relay

X000000-X001FFF

Bit

Output Relay

Y000000-Y001FFF

Bit

Internal Relay

M000000-M008191

Bit

Link Relay

B000000-B001FFF

Bit

556

CIMON-Xpanel

Annunciator

F000000-F002047

Bit

Timer Contact

TS00000-TS02047

Word

Timer Coil

TC00000-TC02047

Word

Timer Current Value

TN00000-TN02047

Word

Counter Contact

CS00000-CS01023

Word

Counter Coil

CC00000-CC01023

Word

Counter Current Value

CN00000-CN01023

Word

Data Register

D000000-D12286

Word

Link Register

W000000-W001FFF

Word

File Register

R000000-R008191

Word

Communication Cable Wiring

Connect
through the
Ethernet HUB

Direct
connection

Communication Driver

557

27.27 MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E ASCII
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and Mitsubishi
MELSEC Q Series PLCs.
This protocol uses the ASCII code. It supports the following families of MELSEC PLCs Ethernet modules.
· QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in tool-bar.

558

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window
of database
accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.

Select a device
type

I/O Device type : MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E(ASCII)
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Ethernet Communication Configuration’
dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

Communication Driver

559

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3E (ASCII)’and configure
the proper Ethernet
communication parameters.
[Note]
The ASCII communication of MELSEC is seviced with TCP/IP protocol suit only. Do not choose the
"UDP"
protocol in above dialog box.
Create a station

560

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
MELSEC’
. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no effect.

IP Address

Give the IP address of PLC with dotted decimal format.

Socket Port

Give the port number opened by the PLC.

Number
16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message Pop

message at every Rx and Tx error. Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not

Communication Driver

Fixed XPANEL
Socket
Port / XPANEL
Socket
Port No.

561

Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format.
Type

Format

Example

[Symbol][Address in decimal number]

D0012

[Symbol][Address in hexa-decimal number]

X01FC

Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in Xpanel database.
Memory Area

Symbol

I/O Address Range

Notation

Bit/Word

Input Relay

X000000-X001FFF

Bit

Output Relay

Y000000-Y001FFF

Bit

Internal Relay

M000000-M008191

Bit

M009000-M009255

Bit

Latch Relay

L000000-L008191

Bit

Step Relay

S000000-S008191

Bit

Link Relay

B000000-B001FFF

Bit

Annunciator

F000000-F002047

Bit

Timer Contact

TS00000-TS02047

Word

Timer Coil

TC00000-TC02047

Word

Timer Current Value

TN00000-TN02047

Word

Retentive Timer Contact

SS00000-SS02047

Word

Retentive Timer Coil

SC00000-SC02047

Word

Retentive Timer Current Value

SN00000-SN02047

Word

562

CIMON-Xpanel

Counter Contact

CS00000-CS01023

Word

Counter Coil

CC00000-CC01023

Word

Counter Current Value

CN00000-CN01023

Word

Data Register

D000000-D08191

Word

D9000-D9255

Word

Link Register

W000000-W001FFF

Word

File Register

R000000-R008191

Word

Communication Cable Wiring

Connect
through the
Ethernet HUB

Direct
connection

Communication Driver

563

27.28 MITSUBISHI Melsec A Series (Programming Port)
This driver supports the communication with MELSEC A series PLCs through the programming port (loader
port).

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create
a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in tool-bar.

564

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window
of database
accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.

Select
a
device
type

I/O Device Type : MITSUBISHI Melsec A Loader
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box will
be popped
up as shown in following picture.

Communication Driver

565

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
MITSUBISHI MELSEC A Loader’and configure the
proper serial communication parameters. The communication parameters must be configured as
followings : (no other configuration is allowed)

Create
a
station

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box.
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel.
Each field
can be configured with following rules.

566

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the type of connected PLC CPU. One of two CPUs can be chosen.
(AnS or AnA)

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

This field has no effect.

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap

Communication Driver

32Bit Data

567

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using

This field has no effect. This communication driver always checks the check-

Checksum

sum.

Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message Pop

message at every Rx and Tx error.

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically about 5 seconds after.

Supported PLC Memories

Memory Area

Symbol

CPU

Notation

Bit/Word

Input Relay

X0000-X07FF

Bit

Output Relay

Y0000-Y07FF

Bit

Internal Relay

M0000-M8191

Bit

M9000-M9255

Bit

Latch Relay

L0000-L8191

Bit

Link Relay

B0000-B1FFF

Bit

Annunciator

F0000-F2047

Bit

Timer Contact

TS0000-TS2047

Bit

Timer Coil

TC0000-TC2047

Bit

Timer Current Value

TN0000-TN2047

Word

Counter Contact

CS0000-CS1023

Bit

Counter Coil

CC0000-CC1023

Bit

Counter Current Value

CN0000-CN1023

Word

Data Register

D0000-D8191

Word

Link Register

W0000-W1FFF

Word

Above memory table is based on the AnA CPUs. Actual boundaries of each device memory are dependent on
the type of CPU connected.

568

CIMON-Xpanel

Wiring Diagram

[ RS232C ]
Use the standard programming tool cable supplied by PLC manufacturer or their partner company. Please
refer to the GX Developer operating manual for more information about cable/converter. This driver cannot
communicate with a commonly used RS232C or RS422/485 cable.

XPANEL COM/
CPM2
RS232C

XPANEL COM1
RS422/485

27.29 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series
This driver supports the communication with MELSEC FX series PLCs through RS232C/422A port.
The implemented protocol in this driver is the ‘
dedicated protocol’of FX and uses the ‘
control
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Communication Driver

569

protocol format 1’
.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or
tool-bar. Following picture
shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG
configuration window of database
accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.

Select a device
type

I/O Device Type : ' MITSUBISHI Melsec FX '
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication
Configuration’dialog box will be
popped up as shown in following picture.

icon in

570

CIMON-Xpanel

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
MITSUBISHI Melsec FX’and configure
the proper serial
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC
configuration.

Create a station

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box. In this
dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel.
Each field can be configured with following rules.

Communication Driver

Station Name

571

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database
window accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the type of connected PLC among the “FX”.

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

0
Specify a decimal number between 0 and 15. This number must be
matched with the number in the special data register D8121 of FX
PLC.

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using

This field has no effect. This communication driver always checks the

Checksum

check-sum.

Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error

Message

notification message at every Rx and Tx error. Otherwise

Pop Up

(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the

572

CIMON-Xpanel

station) error, the notification message is popped up. This message
box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Communication Setup : MELSEC FX PLC

Typically, the configuration of PLC side is performed by the ‘
GX Developer’
.
For normal communication with Xpanel, following parameters must be set as noted.

Protocol

Dedicated Protocol

Format

Protocol Format 1

Sum Check

Enable

Supported PLC Memories

Memory

CPU Format
FX0n

FX,FX2c

FX2n

Bit/Word

Input

X0000-X0177

X0000-X0337

X0000-X0267

Octal

Bit

Output

Y0000-Y0177

Y0000-Y0337

Y0000-Y0267

Octal

Bit
Bit

Aux Relay

M0000-M0511

M0000-M1535

M0000-M3071

Decimal

Special Relay

M8000-M8254

M8000-M8255

Decimal

Bit

Status Relay

S0000-S0127

S0000-S0999

Decimal

Bit

Data Register

D0000-D8255

Decimal

Word

Timer

TN000-TN063

TN000-TN255

Decimal

Word

Counter

CN000-CN254

CN000-CN255

Decimal

Word

Wiring Diagram

Communication Driver

RS-232C

RS-422

RS-485

27.30 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series (Programming Port)
This driver supports the communication with MELSEC FX series PLCs through the programming port
(loader port).

573

574

CIMON-Xpanel

Create
a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture
shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window
of database
accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.

Select
a
device
type

I/O Device type : ' MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Loader '
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box will
be popped up as shown in following picture.

Communication Driver

575

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX Loader ’and configure the
proper serial
communication parameters. The programming port of FX PLC uses fixed communication
parameters.
Ensure that communication parameters are configured as followings.

576

CIMON-Xpanel

Baud rate

9,600 bps

Parity

None

Data bits

8 Bits

Stop bits

1 Bits

RS422A

RS422A Channel( COM1)

Channel
Create
a
station

Communication Driver

Station Name

577

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Select the “FX Loader”type. No other items can be chosen.

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

This field has no effect in this communication driver. Only one PLC can be
connected through the programming port driver. Therefore, there is no need
to use station number.

Socket Port No.

2005
The exclusive use of GLOFA Enet supporting socket number is TCP 2004, UDP
2005.

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using

These fields have no effect. And this communication driver always checks the

Checksum

check-sum.

Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message Pop

message at every Rx and Tx error.

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically about 5 seconds after.

Supported PLC Memories

Memory

Sym

CPU
FX0n

FX,FX2c

FX2n

Format

Data

Input

X0000-X0177

X0000-X0337

X0000-X0267

Octal

Bit

Output

Y0000-Y0177

Y0000-Y0337

Y0000-Y0267

Octal

Bit

Aux Relay

M0000-M0511

M0000-M1535

M0000-M3071

Decimal

Bit

578

CIMON-Xpanel

Special Relay

M8000-M8254

M8000-M8255

Decimal

Bit

Timer (Contact)

T000-T063

T000-T255

Decimal

Bit

Counter (Contact)

C000-C254

C000-C255

Decimal

Bit

Status Relay

S0000-S0127

S0000-S0999

Decimal

Bit

Data Register

D0000-D8255

Decimal

Word

Timer (Cur-value)

TN000-TN063

TN000-TN255

Decimal

Word

Counter (Cur-value)

CN000-CN254

CN000-CN255

Decimal

Word

Wiring Diagram

RS
42
2A

27.31 MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Series (Programming Port)
This driver supports the communication with MELSEC Q series PLCs through the programming port (loader
port).

Communication Setup : PLC (GX Developer)

Following configuration is needed in PLC side.
This can be done at the "PLC Parameter-Serial" setup window of GX Developer as shown in the following
picture.

Communication Driver

579

1) Check and made enable the "Use serial communication" Option.

2) Configure the communication speed. This configuration must be matched with the one of Xpanel's
configuration.

3) Configure the "Sum check" option. This option must be matched with the one of Xpanel's configuration.

4) Set "Transmission wait Time" as appropriate value. Typically this item is set as "No waiting Time".

5) Check and make enable the "RUN while setting : Permit" option which makes it possible for the
operator to control the value of PLC with Xpanel.

6) Aware that PLC parameters are applied only after the cold restart of PLC system.

This Communication driver was tested with Q00 CPU.

Q2(H) / Q6H / Q12H / Q25H CPU
These CPUs do not have special configuration items for loader port communication.
This Communication driver was tested with Q12H CPU.

580

CIMON-Xpanel

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create
a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture
shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window
of database
accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.

Select
a
device
type

I/O Device Type : ' MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Loader(Q00/01), MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Loader
(Q02/06/12/25)'

After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog
box will be popped up. Proceed the further configuration according to the type of PLC CPU. Please
notice that the communication parameter combination shown in the following box is the only one
allowed in Q series CPU programming port. (Regardless of the type of CPU, no other configuration
is allowed.)

Communication Driver

581

· Parity : Odd
· Data Bits : 8 Bits
· Stop Bit : 1 Bit

Q00CPU / Q01CPU
If the connecting CPU type is Q00 or Q01, then select the 'MITSUBISHI MELSEC Q Loader
(Q00/Q01)' device type.

Q2(H) / Q6H / Q12H / Q25H
If the connecting CPU type is Q02(H), Q06H, Q12H or Q25H,

582

CIMON-Xpanel

then select the 'MITSUBISHI MELSEC Q Loader (Q02/Q06/Q12/Q25)' device type.

Create
a
station

Communication Driver

Station Name

583

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the type of connected PLC CPU.

[Note]
If the connecting CPU is Q01CPU, then choose "Q00CPU". These two CPUs
have no difference in Xpanel communication driver.
Network ID

This field has no effect.

584

CIMON-Xpanel

Station No.

Specify the station number in decimal form (0..254). This number has no
meaning in peer to peer communication. Usually, this station number is
configured as zero(0).

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using

This configuration should be matched with the same configuration item of

Checksum

PLC CPU. Ensure that this option is checked with the same status in both
side. (Verify the check status of "Sum Check" item of GX Developer.

Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message Pop

message at every Rx and Tx error.

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically about 5 seconds after.

Supported PLC Memories

Q00CPU / Q01CPU
Memory Area
Input Relay
Output Relay
Internal Relay
Latch Relay
Link Relay
Edge Relay
Annunciator
Timer Contact
Timer Clear
Timer Current Value
Counter Contact
Counter Coil
Counter Current Value
Data Register
Lin Register

Symbol
X
Y
M
SM
L
B
SB
V
F
TS
TC
TN
CS
CC
CN
D
SD
W
SW

Range
X0000-X07FF
Y0000-Y07FF
M0000-M8191
SM0000-SM1023
L0000-L2047
B0000-B07FF
SB0000-SB07FF
V0000-V1023
F0000-F1023
TS0000-TS0511
TC0000-TC0511
TN0000-TN0511
CS0000-CS0511
CC0000-CC0511
CN0000-CN0511
D00000-D11135
SD0000-SD1023
W0000-W07FF
SW0000-SW03FF

Notation
16
16
10
10
10
16
16
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
16
16

Bit / Word
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Word
Bit
Bit
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word

Communication Driver

585

Q02(H) / Q06H / Q12H / Q25H
Memory Area

Symbol

Range

Notation

Bit / Word

Input Relay

X0000-X1FFF

Bit

Output Relay

Y0000-Y1FFF

Bit

Internal Relay

M0000-M8191

Bit

SM0000-SM1023

Bit

Latch Relay

L0000-L8191

Bit

Link Relay

B0000-B1FFF

Bit

Edge Relay

V0000-V2047

Bit

Annunciator

F0000-F2047

Bit

Timer Clear

TC0000-TC2047

Bit

Timer Current Value

TN0000-TN2047

Word

Counter Coil

CC0000-CC1023

Bit

Counter Current Value

CN0000-CN1023

Word

D00000-D12287

Word

SD0000-SD2047

Word

W0000-W1FFF

Word

SW0000-SW07FF

Word

Data Register

Lin Register

Wiring Diapram

RS
23
2C

586

CIMON-Xpanel

27.32 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX2N-10/20GM(Programming Port)
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and Melsec FX2N10/20GM PLCs.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
Setup

‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’
For creating a new device activate the menu
or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name.
This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the
‘Station Name’.

Communication Driver

Select a
network type

587

I/O Device Name : MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX2N-10/20GM Loader

Serial
After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step,
‘ Communication Configuration ’dialog
box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

MITSUBISHI MELSEC
In this window, select the ‘Device Type’as ‘

FX2N-10/20GM
’ and

appropriate
communication parameters. Those parameters must be matched with the PLC.
Communication parameters should be configuredas shown in the following table.
Baud Rate
Parity

9600
Even

588

CIMON-Xpanel

Data Bits

8 Bits

Stop Bits

1Bits

Comm.Type

RS422

Communication Driver

Create a station

589

Station’tab of ‘Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box. In this dialog box,
Move to the ‘
all the connected
PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be configured with
following rules.

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the
‘Device Name’.

Station Type

Choose the ‘FX2N-10/20GM’(No
.
other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no meaning in this driver. (ignored in runtime)

Station No.

This number must be matched with the one of PLC.

16Bit Data Swap This field has no meaning in this driver.

590

CIMON-Xpanel

32Bit Data Swap This field has no meaning in this driver.
Using

This field has no meaning in this driver.

Checksum
Comm. Error

If this item is

checked, XPanel displays a

Message Pop

notification message

at every Rx and Tx error.

communication error

Otherwise(unchecked),XPanel does not display the message at data
receive error.
Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
error, the
notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically
about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation

Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in XPanel database.
.

Sym
bol

Memory

Analog Tag

Digital Tag

Format

10GM

20GM

10GM

20GM

Data

Aux Relay

M000-M511

Dec

Bit

Special
Relay

SM0000SM0175

Dec

Bit

Input

X000-X003
X375-X377

X000-X067
X372-X377

Oct

Bit

Output

Y000-Y005

Y000-Y067

Oct

Bit

Data
Register

Dec

Word

Special data
register

SD000SD0313

SD000SD0599

Dec

Word

V000-V007

Dec

Word

Z000-Z007

Dec

Dword

D000-D1999 D000-D3999

* SM address matches originally to M address based on M9000 at PLC, also SD matches D
address based on D9000.

Communication Driver

591

Communication Cable Wiring

27.33 MODBUS RTU protocl
This document describes the MODBUS communication driver for Xpanel. This driver supports the RTU mode
of the MODBUS protocol.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in tool-bar.

592

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration
window of database
accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.

Select a device
type

I/O Device Type : MODBUS RTU Protocol
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’
dialog box will be popped
up as shown in following picture.

Communication Driver

593

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
MODBUS RTU Protocol’and configure the
proper serial communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the
device’
s configuration.

Create a station

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box.
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the
Xpanel.
Each field can be configured with following rules.

594

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the type of connected PLC among the “Modbus RTU”.

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

Specify a decimal number between 1 and 247.

16Bit Data

This option swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data. Following

Swap

diagram shows an example of byte swapping.

Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except
INT8 / UINT8 / BCD8 / UBCD8.
32Bit Data
Swap

This option swaps words of all double word sized data. Following diagram
shows an example of word swapping.

Communication Driver

595

NT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be
influenced by this option.
Using

This field has no effect. This MODBUS driver always checking the BCC.

Checksum
Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error

Message Pop

notification message at every Rx and Tx error. Otherwise(unchecked),

Xpanel does not display the message at data receive error. Only when
there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the
notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically about 5 seconds after.

Address & Function Codes

Following table shows the list of valid address range and used MODBUS function codes for each address
area.
The symbol character has to be placed in the first position of address string. The address number follows
the symbol character.

Area

Symbol

Coil

Analog TAG

Digital TAG

Read

Write

000001 -029999 (1)

Input

100001 -129999

Holding Register

400001 -429999

Input Register

300001 -329999

6, 16 (2)

The memory areas listed above are provided for general purposes. The actual available memory area and
range of each area should be
checked with the manual of connecting device. The ‘
Read’
/’
Write’columns show the used MODBUS function
codes in this communication driver.
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

596

CIMON-Xpanel

Communication Cable Wiring

XPANEL COM/
CPM2
RS232C

XPANEL COM1
RS422/485

Above picture shows the RS232C and RS422/485 ports of Xpanel. Refer to the manual of your device for
signal description.
In case of the RS232C ports, Xpanel provides the standard DB9 RS232C pin assignment. Typically RD, TD
and SG pins are enough to
communicate with general MODBUS device.

27.34 MODBUS TCP protocl
This document describes the MODBUS communication driver for Xpanel. This driver supports the TCP mode
of the MODBUS protocol.

Communication Driver

597

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create
a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window
of database
accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.

Select
a
device
type

I/O Device Type : MODBUS TCP Protocol
‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog
After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step,
box will be
popped up as shown in following picture.

598

CIMON-Xpanel

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
MODBUS TCP’and configure the proper ehternet
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the device’
s
configuration.

Create
a
station

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Ethernet Communication Configuration’dialog box.
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the
Xpanel.
Each field can be configured with following rules.

Communication Driver

Station Name

599

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘Device Name’.

Station Type
Network ID
Socket Port No

Choose the type of connected PLC among the “Modbus TCP”.
Sum of MODBUS/TCP devices here its own station number.
The socket number should be configured as 502. This port number is
dedicated for MODBUS/TCP.

16Bit Data
Swap

This option swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data. Following
diagram shows an example of byte swapping.

Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 /
UINT8 / BCD8 / UBCD8.
32Bit Data
Swap

This option swaps words of all double word sized data. Following diagram
shows an example of word swapping.

NT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be
influenced by this option.
Using

This field has no effect.This MODBUS driver always checking the BCC.

Checksum
Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

600

CIMON-Xpanel

Message Pop

message at every Rx and Tx error. Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does

not display the message at data receive error. Only when there is data
transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message
is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5
seconds after.

Address & Function Codes

Area

Symbol

Coil

Analog TAG

Digital TAG

Read

Write

000001 -029999 (1)

Input

100001 -129999

Holding Register

400001 -429999

Input Register

300001 -329999

6, 16 (2)

1) The symbol character does not have the number property. For example, 400100 and 4100 designate the
same memory area (Holding register 100).
2) The code 16 is issued when a double word write or the recipe write function is activated. A single word
write uses the code 6.
The memory areas listed above are provided for general purposes. The actual available memory area and
range of each area should be
checked with the manual of connecting device. The ‘Read’/ ’Write’columns show the used MODBUS
function codes in this communication driver.

Communication Cable Wiring

This interface is satisfied with standard IEEE802.3 about the 10BaseT/100BaseTX.
You can make cable and allocation pin number of RJ45 as the following figure.

RJ45 Connector

RJ45 Jack

Communication Driver

Direct Cable: Host <-> HUB
Cable

Color

Orange/W

Orange

Green/W

Blue

Blue/W

Green

Brown/W

Brown

Cable

Crossover Cable: Host <-> Host
Cable

Color

Orange/W

Green/W

Orange

Green

Green/W

Orange/W

Blue

Blue/W

Green

Orange

Brown/W

Brown

Cable

27.35 NAIS PLC FP Series (MEWTOCOL-COM)
This driver provides communication interface between Xpanel and NAIS FP Series PLC with their
MEWTOCOL-COM protocol.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

601

602

CIMON-Xpanel

Create
a new
Device

Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or
For creating a new device activate the menu ‘

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window
of database
accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.

Select
a
device
type

I/O Device type : NAIS FPO MEWTOCOL-COM
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog
box will be popped up as shown in following picture.
Select the ‘
NAIS FPO MEWTOCOL-COM’in ‘
Device Type’combo-box of following dialog box. And
then, configure the communication parameters appropriately. Ensure that parameters are matched
with those of PLC side.

Communication Driver

Create
a
station

603

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box. The PLCs to
communicate with must be registered in the ‘
Station’Tab. ‘
Add Station’button pops up a station
configuring dialog box. A station can be defined with its station number on this dialog box. Each
field can be configured with following guideline.

604

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
NAIS FPO’
. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No

Assign a station number. It can be a decimal number between 1 and 32.

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using

This field has no effect.

Checksum
Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message Pop

message at every Rx and Tx error.

Communication Driver

605

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be
closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format.

Format Type

Format

Example

Dec.

[Symbol][Decimal Address]

DT0010 / T0100

Dec_Hex.

[Symbol][Decimal Address][Hex Bit Number]

X012F

Symbol

Area

Digital
TAG

Address
Format

Decimal
Address

Access

External Input

Dec_Hex

00-12

External Output

Dec_Hex

00-12

R/W

Internal Relay

Dec_Hex

000-903

R/W

Link Relay

Dec_Hex

000-999

R/W

Counter

Dec

000-143

Timer

Dec

000-143

External Input Word

Dec

00-12

External Output Word

Dec

00-12

R/W

Internal Relay Word

Dec

000-903

R/W

Data Register

Dec

0-9121

R/W

File Register

Dec

0-9999

R/W

Link Data Register

Dec

0-9999

R/W

Communication Cable Wiring

Analog
TAG

606

CIMON-Xpanel

27.36 OMRON HostLink
This version of driver uses C-mode command in OMRON HostLink protocol.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create
a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
->’
I/O Devices’or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

Communication Driver

607

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database
accompanied by the ‘
Station Name’
.

Select
a
device
type

I/O Device type : ' OMRON PLC(HostKink) '
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box will be
popped
up as shown in following picture.

608

CIMON-Xpanel

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
OMRON PLC (HostLink)’and configure the proper serial
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC configuration.

Create
a
station

Communication Driver

Station Name

609

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
HostLink’
. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

Specify a decimal number between 0 and 31.

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using

This field has no effect.

Checksum
Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message pop

message at every Rx and Tx error.

610

CIMON-Xpanel

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically about 5 seconds after.

PLC Mode

Omron PLC can be written when its mode is monitor. So you must change the mode to monitor.
Please set the value of DM6600 to 0101h. Even though the PLC power goes out, it remains to monitor
mode.
You can only change the DM6600 by program mode.

Supported PLC Memories

Area

Symbol Analog TAG

Digital TAG

DM area

D0000

D9999

D0000.00
D9999.00

D0000.15
D9999.15

CIO area

IR0000

IR6143

IR0000.00
IR6143.00

IR0000.15
IR6143.15

AR area

A0000

A0959

A0000.00
A0959.00

A0000.15
A0959.15

HR area

H0000

H0511

H0000.00
H0511.00

H0000.15
H0511.15

T/C status

not supported

TC0000

T/C p. value

PV0000

not supported

LR area

L0000

EM area

E0_0000
EC_0000

PV4095
L0199
E0_9999
EC_9999

Remark

TC4095

L0000.00
L0199.00
E0_0000.00
EC_9999.00

(1)

(1), (2)

(3)
(3)

L0000.15
L0199.15
E0_0000.15
EC_9999.15

(1), (4)

(1) If the address of this area was used in digital tag, control functionalities are not supported. Xpanel
cannot set/reset these points.

(2) A0000

A0447 address area cannot be modified by Xpanel. (Read only area)

(3) Timer : T0000
Counter : C0000

T2143 area was mapped to TC0000 - TC2143 (PV0000 - PV2143)
C2143 area was mapped to TC2148 - TC4095 (PV2148 - PV4095)

Communication Driver

611

(4) Bank of EM area must be denoted by one hexadecimal character (‘
0’ ‘
C’
) as following example.
· Digital Tag : E[bank]_[word no].[2 digit bit no] (EA_1000.05 : bit5 of E1000 in bank ‘
A’
)
· Analog Tag : E[bank]_[word no] (EC_32 : E0032 of bank ‘
C’
)

(5) Bit location of digital Tag must be denoted by 2 digits decimal number (‘
00’ ‘
15’
) with dot (’
.’
)
separator.
(exception : Timer/Counter area is digital point by itself).

Wiring Diagram

RS232C

C Series RS422A

612

CIMON-Xpanel

CS/CJ Series
RS422A

27.37 OMRON FINS Ethernet
OMRON FINS Protocol is used to communicate with OMRON PLC through FINS Ethernet..

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create
a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
->’
I/O Devices’or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

Communication Driver

613

I/O Device Name : This device name is used when you set up Station and Database to register tags.
Write I/O Device Name and select Ethernet Device and then click ‘
OK’
.

Select
a
device
type

I/O Device type : ' OMRON CS/CJ Series Enet '
After writing device name, 'Ethernet Communication Configuration' window is shown as below.

614

CIMON-Xpanel

Select 'OMRON CS/CJ Series Enet' at Device type and click 'TCP'.
If UDP is setup at PLC Communication configuration, 'UDP' can be used.
- Set "Network ID" and "Node ID". Xpanel "Unit ID" of Xpanel is fixed at '0'.
- Set "Time out" and "Retry No" according to network condition.

Create
a
station

Click 'Station' at 'Ethernet Communication Configuration' window. You can register device to communicate with
Xpanel.

Communication Driver

Station Name

615

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window accompanied
with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
HostLink’
. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Node ID

Set "Node ID" of PLC. Some PLC use 4th digit number of IP address as "Node ID"

Unit ID

Set "Unit ID" of PLC. Generally it is '0'

IP Address

Write IP address of PLC.

Socket Port

Default is 9600. If you change this value in PLC, write that number.

number
16 Bit Data Swap

Not used

32Bit Data Swap

Not used

String Data

It exchanges front and back word of string tag.

616

CIMON-Xpanel

Swap
Comm. Error

It is used to show Comm. Error message on the screen when Xpanel detects

Message Pop up

sending/receiving error. 'Comm. Error Message' will be disappeared in 5 sec.

Fixed XPANEL

Not used

Socket Port

PLC Mode
1.CS/CJ

Series Communication setting. (Example. CJ2M CPU35 )

1) External Rotary Switch setting

(1) Node number shows hexadecimal on screen.
(2) Set UNIT number
(3) Set NODE number

2) Built-in EtherNet/IP Port setting
(1) Select IO Table/ Unit setting.

Communication Driver

617

(2) Select [1500] CJ2M-EIP21(Built In EtherNet/IP Port for CJ2M)(Unit : 0) at Inner Port/Inner Board

618

CIMON-Xpanel

Select “TCP/IP”and write IP number of PLC EtherNet/IP at “IP Address”

(3) l Select “FINS/TCP”and “Service Port”and check “Node ID”.

Communication Driver

(4) Click red box as above picture.

619

620

CIMON-Xpanel

(5) Check Net , Node, and Unit.

Communication Driver

(6) Select Start Routing table.

(7) Select “유 니 트 00(이 더 넷 /IP)”and insert CPU SIOU as above picture.

621

622

CIMON-Xpanel

2. NJ5xx

Series ( Built-in EtherNet/IP Port )

1) Built-in EtherNet/IP Port setting
(1) Select Controller Setup -> Operation Settings.
(2) Refer to above picture and add setting Local
Network Table .
to

Communication Driver

623

(3) Select Controller Setup -> Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings. Select TCP/IP Settings and set IP
address of PLC EtherNet/IP port.

(4) Select FINS Settings and set Service Port and check out Node ID. The 4th digit number of IP
Address(55) is used Node ID.

624

CIMON-Xpanel

2) FINS Data Block Registration
(1) Select Data

Global Variables.

(2) Click the right button of mouse and select ‘Create New’.
(3) Register Name, Data Type and AT in Item.

Communication Driver

625

Name : It is variable name which is used in PLC program.
Data Type : Register data type of variable. In order to make easy Communication setting, "Array
Type" is recommended.
AT : Register Device format through FINS communication. Refer to Device format as following.

Area

Foramt

CIO Area

%0 , %10...

Work Area

%W0, %W100...

Holding Area

%H0, %H50...

DM Area

%D0, %D150...

EM Area

%E0_0, %E1_10...

(4) After finishing setting, click "Controller" -> "Synchronization" to download it to PLC. Reset PLC
power just in case downloaded setting does not work properly

Supported PLC Memories

Area

Symbol

Digital TAG

Analog TAG

626

CIMON-Xpanel

CIO Area

CIO

CIO0.0 ~ CIO6143.15

CIO0 ~ CIO6143

Work Area

W0.0 ~ W511.15

W0 ~ W511

Holding Area

H0.0 ~ H511.15

H0 ~ H511

AR Area

A0.0 ~ A959.15

A0 ~ A959

T/C Status

TC0 ~ TC4095

T/C PValue

PV0 ~ PV4095

DM Area

D0.0 ~ D9999.15

D0 ~ D9999

EM Area

EX_
(x:0~F)

E0_0.0 ~ EF_32767.15

E0_0 ~ EF_32767

Communication Cable Wiring

This interface is satisfied with standard IEEE802.3 about the 10BaseT/100BaseTX.
You can make cable and allocation pin number of RJ45 as the following figure.

RJ45 Connector

RJ45 Jack

Direct Cable: Host <-> HUB
Cable

Color

Orange/W

Orange

Green/W

Blue

Blue/W

Green

Brown/W

Brown

Color

Cable

Crossover Cable: Host <-> Host
Cable

Color

Cable

Communication Driver

Orange/W

Green/W

Orange

Green

Green/W

Orange/W

Blue

Blue/W

Green

Orange

Brown/W

Brown

627

27.38 PGuard(Serial)
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and Pguard
Gateway.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
device

To configure the communication device of LSIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in the
menu or icon

tool-bar , and then “I/O device configuration”dialog box will be shown up. And then click
[new device] button.
“I/O device selection”dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a device type as
the following figure.

628

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name :

Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database accompanied
by the ‘Station Name’
.
Select a device
type

Select a device type : 'PGuard gateway’'

Serial Communication
After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘
Configuration ’dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

Communication Driver

629

PGuard gateway’and
In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘
appropriate communication parameters. Those parameters must be
matched with the PLC.
Create a station

Move to [Station] tab at the “Serial Communication Configuration”Dialog Box and click [Add
Station] button then you can see “Station”Dialog Box popped up. Please configuration as
the following contents then click “OK” button.

630

CIMON-Xpanel

* Register only 1 station in driver ‘PGuard gateway’to use.

Station Name

Give a name to thr PLC. This name will be used in the database
window
accompanied with the 'Deviec Name' .

Station Type

Choose the 'SGW'.(No other type can be slected)

Communication Driver

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

Write designated station No. in PLC

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

631

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using

This field has no effect.

checksum
Comm.Error

If this is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification

Message Pop

message at every RX and Tx Error.

Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the message at data
receive error. Only When there is data transmit (writing a TAG value
to the station) error, the notification message is poped up. This
message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Address Notifiation

Command Device
l
Notation : C00
l
It can be registered as Analog tag only.
l
It is used to command Device Scan to Xpanel. Only Writing is available
Read Buffer Device
l
Notation : Bnn.mm.xx
i.
nn : It means Received order, (0 15)
ii.
mm : It means nth time amount received data, (0 5)
iii.
Received data per device is 6Byte and it is fixed.
iv.
xx : Location of Bit, Only digital tag is available to use, (0 7)
ex)
Analog, Word : B0.3 , B12.5 , B15.0
Digital : B0.4.0 , B1.3.7 , B14.2.5
It is used to word tag, word length should be less than 6.
Read only. Not support Writing.

•
•

27.39 SAIA S-BUS
This document described the SAIA S-BUS communication driver for Xpanel. This driver support the data mode
S-BUS protocol.
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and SAIA PCD families
via data mode S-BUS protocol.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

632

CIMON-Xpanel

Create
a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/ODevices’or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database
accompanied by the ‘Station Name’.

Select
a
device
type

I/O Device type : " SAIA S-BUS "

After selecting the 'OK' button of previous step, ‘
Serial communication Configuration’dialog box will
be popped
up as shown in following picture.

Communication Driver

633

In this window, select the 'Device Type' as ‘
SAIA S-BUS’and configure the proper serial
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the device's configuration.

Create
a
station

Station’tab of ‘Ethernet Communication Configuration’dialog box.
Move to the ‘
In this dialog box, all the connectedPLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel.
Each field can be configured with following rules.

634

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘Device Name’.

Station Type

Choose the type of connected device. "PCD Family" type is the only supported.

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

Specify a decimal number between 0 and 254.

16Bit Data Swap

This field has no effect in SAIA S-BUS driver.

32Bit Data Swap

This field has no effect in SAIA S-BUS driver.

Using Checksum

This field has no effect in SAIA S-BUS driver.

Comm.Error
Message Pop Up

If this item is checked, XPanel displays a

communication error notification

message at every Rx and Tx error.
Otherwise(unchecked),XPanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error,

Communication Driver

the

635

notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed

automatically about 5 seconds after.

Communication Setup : SAIA PCD Family

Following picture shows the configuration with PG5 tool from SAIA.
Open the "Hardware Settings" dialog box and give the S-BUS station number to use in the "S-Bus" tab.

Move to the "Serial" tab and configure the communication parameters.
These parameters should be matched with those of Xpanle's. Note that the "S-Bus" combo box must be
configured as "Data".

636

CIMON-Xpanel

The communication parameters can be set in IL program of SAIA PCD. Following program is a sample IL
codes for communication port setup.
This sample codes are programmed for PCD2.M150 CPU with PCD7 F120 module.

$SASI
TEXT 100 "UART:19200,,,50;"
"MODE:SS1;"

; When PCD is a slave in network

"DIAG:F100,R998;"
$ENDSASI

XOB

SASI

; When using the channel #1

100
EXOB

COB

0
0

ECOB

Address & Function Codes

Communication Driver

637

Following table shows the list of valid address range for each memory area.
The symbol character has to be placed in the first position of address string.

Area

Symbol

Input

Bit Notation

Read

Write

I0000 - I8191

Output

O0000 - O8191

Flag

F0000 - F8191

Timer

T0000 - T1599

Counter

C0000 - C1599

R0000 - R4095

Communication Cable Wiring

XPANEL COM/
CPM2
RS232C

XPANEL COM1
RS422/485

Word Notation

638

CIMON-Xpanel

Connection
example RS232C :
PCD2.M150
with PCD7
F120

Above picture shows the RS232C and RS422/485 ports of Xpanel. Refer to the manual of your device for
signal description. In case of the
RS232C ports, Xpanel provides the standard DB9 RS232C pin assignment.

Support Function Table

Following table shows the list of functions that are supported by 'SIEMENS S7-200 PPI Direct'
communication driver.

Function

Support

Block Data Read

Block Data Write

String Real Tag

Word Swap

Dword Swap

Block Data
Read

Remark

This function makes it possible that is bulk data reading at a time.
It will be applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the Xpanel.

Communication Driver

Block Data
Write
String Real
Tag
Word Swap

639

This function makes it possible that is bulk data writing at a time.
It will be applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the Xpanel.
It makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicate string data
of Xpanel with PLC.
This function swaps bytes of all word or double work sized data. It depends upon
16Bit Data Swap configuration.

Dword Swap

This function swaps word of all double word sized data. It depends upon 32Bit Data
Swap configuration.

27.40 SICK RFID Reader Enet
This driver provides the function of ethernet communication with SICK RFID Reader(RFH620
model).

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/ODevices’or
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in tool-bar.

640

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name : Write device name. This name will be used with Station name

when you register tags in Database.
Select a device
type

I/O Device type : " SICK RFID Reader Enet "

After selecting the ‘OK’button of previous step,

Select “SICK RFID Reader Enet”and set up as following.

Set up configuration as below

•
•
•

Device Type : SICK RFID Reader Enet
Protocol : TCP
Time Out : 15 ~ 30 (Delay time of response frame. You can select it
from 15 to 30)
Retry No. : 1 (To avoid sending the same frame, it must be 1.)
Create a station

Station’tab of ‘Ethernet Communication Configuration’dialog box.
Move to the ‘
In this dialog box, all the connectedPLC stations can be configured and registered to the
XPanel.
Each field can be configured with following rules.

Communication Driver

Station Name

641

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database
window accompanied with the ‘Device Name’.

Station Type

Select the “RFH620”.

Network ID

No effect

IP Address

Write IP address of RFID Reader.

Socket Port No

2112 is default value. (It is subject to change according to
Reader’
s type.)

16Bit
Swap

Data

No effect

32Bit
Swap

Data

No effect

Using
Checksum

No effect

Comm.Error
Message Pop
Up

No effect

Address & Function Codes

Memory address is as following.

642

CIMON-Xpanel

Device
name

Tag type

W/R

Address

Description

Analog
String

W/R

D0 ~ D255

- It is used to indicate value of
RFID Tag.
- The Block size is 4Byte and it
can save 4words or 4Byte data.
- If you write value to D device
tag, It will
read and display
data as tag size.

Analog
String

W0 ~ W255

- It is used to change the value
of RFID Tag.
- Only writing is possible and
there is no status value.
- Size must be setup by 4Byte
Ex) Analog Tag
UINT32, INT32, Float and
etc.
String Tag
Length of String: 4, 8, 12,
16..
- If you write value to ‘
W’ device
tag, it change value of RFID Tag
as tag data size.

Analog

W/R

- It is used to indicate final
communication status.
40 : Time out (No response)
Otherwise is error of Reader
(Refer to Reader’
s manual)
- UIN8 is used as Data type.

D : It is used to read code which is saved in RFID Tag. It can save by block and 4Byte is saved
in a Block. writing tag value runs,
it read RFID Tag and update tag value.
Refer to below String.
- String starting with “I”
: Initialize connected TCP Socket.
- String starting with “D”: Initialize communication status and received Tag data.
W : It is used to change code value which is saved in RFID Tag. It can be used by 4Byte and
only writing is possible.
S : It is used to check final communication status. Data type is UINT8.
Ex 1) In case that you want to read the saved 16 words starting from Block 0 of RFID Tag
1. Register 16 length string real tag to Database.
A. String Real Tag
B. IO address : D00
C. Length Of String: 16

Communication Driver

643

Write tag value to String Real tag that you just registered above as you read
value.
A. In case that the tag name is “STR_00”that you registered as String Real Tag
B. STR_00 = “”
;
C. Assign estimated value because there is no writing value at Step B.
D. Communication result will display if “S00”tag is registered in IO address.
Ex 2) In case that you want to re-write 16 length string from Block 0 to 3 of RFID Tag.
1. Register 16 length string real tag to Database.
A. String Real Tag
B. IO address : W00
C. Length Of String : 16
2. Write tag value to String Real tag as you write value.
A. In case that the tag name is “WSTR_00” that you registered as String Real
Tag
B. WSTR_00 = “ABCDER1234567890”;
C. Input String will be saved by 4 from Block 0.
Block 0 : “ABCD”
Block 1 : “ER12”
Block 2 : “3456”
Block 3 : “7890”
D. If string is over 16, only 16 string is saved.
E. If string is less than 16, least number is initialized to 0.

Reader Setup

(1) Install “SOPAS engineering Tool”
Download “SOPAS engineering Tool”from SICK homepage and install it.
(2) Run “SOPAS Single Device”
Open “SOPAS Single Device” program.
(3) Connect device
Connect Reader by nell modem cable and then click “Search connected devices”

644

CIMON-Xpanel

Select “RFH620”and click the “Next”in Connection Wizard window.

Select ‘
Standard Protocol’and click ‘
Configure interface’

Communication Driver

Select COM port and use standard setup of ‘
Advanced Tab’

645

646

CIMON-Xpanel

Click ‘
OK’to finish Configure interface setup and then click ‘
Next’to move next step.
It starts to find out Com port and display result on ‘
Found Device’

Select found device and click ‘
Next’to upload.

Communication Driver

Device setup is displayed after uploading.

647

648

CIMON-Xpanel

Move to ‘
Ethernet’tap and setup IP Address and Subnet Mask.
Reboot button is activated after setup. The changed setup is affected if you reboot.
Protocol/Output Format : Output Format #1
Server/Client : Server
IP-Port : 2112 (In case that you change port number, go to Xpanel Designer IO Device
and change Socket Port No. in Station.)
Communication Cable Wiring

27.41 SIEMENS RK512/3964R
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and Siemens
Simatic PLC (S5 and S7).
It supports the following families of Siemens Simatic S5 system.
· S5 : CPU 115U, 135U or 150U via communication card CP524 or CP525.

Communication Driver

649

· S7 : CPU 315-2 via the communication card CP341-1
· S7 : CPU 412-1 via the communication card CP441-2

Communication Setup : PLC

This section describes how to set up the Siemens Simatic hardware. Use the information in this section in
conjunction with the Siemens publications associated with your PLC system.
The physical communication layer is performed via a serial RS232C link connected to a Siemens CP524 or
CP525 communication card.
S5-115u,
The Siemens Simatic S5 system must contain a S5 unit of one of the following types
:

S5-135u,

S5-150u.
The communication protocol 3964R must be loaded into the CP525 module, and the CPU must be loaded
with the following Siemens
Send, Receive.
Function Blocks (FB) Synchron,
:
These system function blocks are used to establish the communication between the CPU and the CP525.
Depending on which type of CPU you use, different function blocks are required.

115U

135U

150U

Synchron

FB249

FB125

FB185

Send

FB244

FB120

FB180

Receive

FB245

FB121

FB181

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create
a new
Device

Tools’
For creating a new device activate the menu
‘
->’I/O Devices’or
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in tool-bar.

650

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database
accompanied by the ‘Station Name’.

Select
a
device
type

I/O Device type : ' SIEMENS RK512/3964R '
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box
will be popped up as shown in following picture.
In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
SIEMENS RK512/3964R’and configure the proper serial
communication parameters.

Communication Driver

Create
a
station

651

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box.
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each
field can be configured with following rules.

652

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
SIEMENS’
. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

This field has no effect.
RK512/3964(R) protocol has no station number. It is based on 1:1
communication environment.

16Bit Data

This option swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data. Following

Swap

diagram shows an example of byte swapping.

Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 /

Communication Driver

653

UINT8 / BCD8 / UBCD8.
32Bit Data

This option swaps words of all double word sized data. Following diagram shows

Swap

an example of word swapping.

INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be
influenced by this option.
Using

When the 3964R procedure was used, this option must be checked. Otherwise,

Checksum

Xpanel uses 3964 procedure.

Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

Message pop

message at every Rx and Tx error.

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format

TAG Type

Format

Example

Analog

[Symbol][DB Number]:[DW number]

D10:1

Digital

[Symbol][DB Number]:[DW number].[Bit Number]

I:12.7

· DB Number : decimal number (0..255)
· DW number : decimal number (0..255)
· Bit Number :hexa-decimal number (0..F)

Symbol

Area

Example

Type

Access

Data Block

D1:120, D1:12.F

0-255

Word

R/W

Ext. Data Block

X2:003, X2:3.F

0-255

Word

R/W

Flags

F:12, F:12.7

0-255

BYTE

Inputs

I:008, I:008.7

0-127

BYTE

Outputs

Q:004, Q:004.7

0-127

BYTE

654

CIMON-Xpanel

27.42 SIEMENS S7 Ethernet
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and Siemens
Simatic S7 PLCs.
It supports the following families of Siemens Simatic S7 system.
· S7-300 CPU via the communication card CP343-1 IT
· S7-400 CPU via the communication card CP443-1 IT

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create
a new
Device

Tools’
I/O Devices’or
For creating a new device activate the menu
‘ - >’

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of databa
accompanied by the ‘Station Name’.

Select
a

I/O Device type : ' SIEMENS S7 Ethernet '

Communication Driver

device
type

655

After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Ethernet Communication Configuration’dialog box will be
popped up as shown in following picture.

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
SIEMENS S7 Ethernet’and ‘
TCP’protocol.
This driver supports only TCP/IP protocol stack.

Create
a
station

656

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type
Network ID

Choose the ‘
S7’
. (No other type can be selected.)
This network ID is a combination of CPU’s rack and
number.

This ID must be given by decimal number with follow
format.
(000..714)
IP Address

Give the IP address of PLC with dotted decimal format.

Socket Port

Don’
t change the default number (102).

Number

This number is a TCP/IP port which is opened by PLC for communication service.

16Bit Data

This option swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data.

Swap

Following diagram shows an example of byte swapping.

Communication Driver

657

Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 / UINT8 / BCD8 /
UBCD8.
32Bit Data
Swap

This option swaps words of all double word sized data.
Following diagram shows an example of word swapping.

INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be influenced by this
option.
Fixed Xpanel

If this option was checked, Xpanel will use only one port defined in "Xpanel Socket Port

Socket Port /

field for connection with PLC. Otherwise, Xpanelwill change the port at every TCP connec

Xpanel Socket

or communication error.

Port No.

This option is provided for Xpanel to deal with various TCP port management ways of PLC

Some PLC has a limit on the number of TCP services. In that case, this option can be a he

The actual effect of this option on PLC cannot be described here. Because, there are too m

kinds of PLC and the response in PLC is entirely dependant on the specification of PLC and
engineer’
s experience. The default setting of this option is unchecked state.
Comm. Error

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification message at ever

Message pop

and Tx error.

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive error. Only wh

there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message is
popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format.

TAG Type

Format

Example

Analog

[Symbol][DB

Digital

[Symbol][DB Number,][Address].[Bit Number]

Number,][Address]

DB1,1
DB1,2.7

· DB Number, : decimal number (0..65535) followed by comma (,). It is used in data block (DB) addressing
only.
For other types of memory, this field must be omitted.

658

CIMON-Xpanel

· Address : decimal number (0..65535)
· Bit Number : decimal number (0..7)
Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in Xpanel database.

Symbol

Description

Word Notation

Bit Notation

Type

Access

Peripheral Input

PI001

PI001.7

Analog/Digital

R/W

Input

I002

I002.7

Analog/Digital

R/W

Output

Q003

Q003.7

Analog/Digital

R/W

Memory

M004

M004.7

Analog/Digital

R/W

Data Block

DB01,01

DB01,01.7

Analog/Digital

R/W

Timer

T005

Analog

Counter

C006

Analog

The device T and C (timer and counter) must be defined as UBCD16 typed TAG for normal data
manipulation.
Following picture shows the data type configuration window of Xpanel database.

Communication Cable Wiring

Communication Driver

659

Connect
through the
Ethernet
HUB

Direct
connection

27.43 SIEMENS S7 MPI
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and Siemens
Simatic S7 PLCs via MPI protocol.
It supports the following families of Siemens Simatic S7 system.
· S7-200/300/400

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create
a new

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or

icon in tool-bar.

660

CIMON-Xpanel

Device

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database
accompanied by the ‘Station Name’.

Select
a
device
type

I/O Device type : ' SIEMENS S7 MPI '

After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box
will be popped up as
shown in following picture.

Communication Driver

661

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as ‘
SIEMENS S7 MPI’and appropriate communication
parameters.
Those parameters must be matched with the PLC.

Loca
l

Give a station (node) number of Xpanel. This number does not duplicated with the one of
PLC. The node number can be the integer value between 0 and 126.

ID
Net

Designate the maximum station (node) number of connected network. This can be one of

following numbers. If the Xpanel is the unique master in network, the integer value of

(1,000+maximum

station

number) should be designated.

662

CIMON-Xpanel

Create
a
station

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box. In this dialog box, all the
connected PLC
stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each field can be configured with following
rules.

Communication Driver

Station Name

663

Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the ‘
Device
Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
S7 MPI’
. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no meaning in this driver. (ignored in runtime)

Station No

Specify a decimal number between 0 and 126.

16Bit Data

This option swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data.

Swap

Following diagram shows an example of byte swapping.

Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 / UINT8 /
BCD8 / UBCD8.
32Bit Data
Swap

This option swaps words of all double word sized data.
Following diagram shows an example of word swapping.

INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be influenced
by this option.
Using

This field has no effect.
Checksu
m

Comm. Error
Message pop

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

message at every Rx and Tx error.Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not
display the message at data receive error. Only when there is data transmit
(writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message is popped up.
This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format.

664

CIMON-Xpanel

TAG Type

Format

Example

Analog

[Symbol][DB

Digital

[Symbol][DB Number,][Address].[Bit Number]

Number,][Address]

DB1,1
DB1,2.7

· DB Number, : decimal number (0..65535) followed by comma (,). It is used in data block (DB)
addressing only.
For other types of memory, this field must be omitted.
· Address : decimal number (0..65535)
· Bit Number : decimal number (0..7)

Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in Xpanel database.

Symbol

Description

Word Notation

Bit Notation

Type

Access

Peripheral Input

PI001

PI001.7

Analog/Digital

R/W

Input

I002

I002.7

Analog/Digital

R/W

Output

Q003

Q003.7

Analog/Digital

R/W

Memory

M004

M004.7

Analog/Digital

R/W

Data Block

DB01,01

DB01,01.7

Analog/Digital

R/W

Timer

T005

Analog

Counter

C006

Analog

The device T and C (timer and counter) must be defined as UBCD16 typed TAG for normal data
manipulation.
Following picture shows the data type configuration window of Xpanel database.

Communication Driver

665

Communication Cable Wiring

SSW7 Adapter
The cable supplied with the adapter can be directly connected to the Xpanel
without any change.
If there is some need to make the cable by yourself, refer to the following picture..

27.44 SIEMENS S7 PPI Direct
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7-200 PLCs via PPI protocol.

666

CIMON-Xpanel

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create
a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of datab
accompanied by the ‘Station Name’.

Select
a
device
type

I/O Device type : ' SIEMENS S7 PPI DirectI '

After selecting the 'OK' button of previous step, ‘
Serial communication Configuration’dialog box will be
popped up as
shown in following picture.

Communication Driver

667

In this window, select the 'Device Type' as ‘
SIEMENS S7 PPI Direct’and appropriate communication
parameters.
Those parameters must be matched with the PLC. Communication parameters should be configured as
shown
in the following table.

Baud Rate

9600 or 19200 (must be matched with the one of PLC)

Parity

Even

Data Bits

8 Bits

668

CIMON-Xpanel

Stop Bits

1 Bit

Comm.Type

RS485

Local ID

The Xpanel occupies the station ID '0' (zero) for its network address.
This Xpanel's address is fixed and cannot be changed.

Create
a
station

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of 'Serial Communication Configuration' dialog box. In this dialog box, all the connecte
PLC
stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each field can be configured with following rules.

Communication Driver

Station Name

669

Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
S7’
. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no meaning in this driver. (ignored in runtime)

Station No

Specify a decimal number between 0 and 126.

16Bit Data Swap This option swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data.
Following diagram shows an example of byte swapping.

Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 / UINT8 / BCD8 /
UBCD8.
32Bit Data Swap This option swaps words of all double word sized data.
Following diagram shows an example of word swapping.

INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be influenced by this
option.
Using Checksum

This field has no effect.

Comm. Error
Message pop Up

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification message at
every Rx and Tx error.Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at
data receive error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically about 5 seconds after.

Communication Setup : S7-200

Following picture shows the screen shot of STEP 7-Micro/Win.
The network address and communication speed (Baud rate) of PLC are configured in this dialog box.

670

CIMON-Xpanel

Please note that those set data should be matched with the device configuration of Xpanel.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format

TAG Type

Format

Example

Analog

[Symbol][Address]

VW064

Digital

[Symbol][Address].[Bit Number] or
[Symbol][Address][Bit Number]

M012.3 or
M0123

· Address : decimal number (0..65535)
· Bit Number : decimal number (0..7)
Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in Xpanel database.

Symbol

Description

Word Notation

Bit Notation

Type

Access

Input

I7.7

Digital

Output

Q7.7

Digital

R/W

Internal Memory

M31.7

Digital

R/W

Special Memory

SM85.7

Digital

R/W

Timer

T127

Digital

Counter

C127

Digital

Communication Driver

671

Input

IW7

Analog

Output

QW7

Analog

R/W

Internal Memory

MW31

Analog

R/W

SMW

Special Memory

SMW85

Analog

R/W

Variable Memory

VW4095

Analog

R/W

Timer SV

TW127

Analog

Counter SV

CW127

Analog

Communication Cable Wiring

Support Function Table

Following table shows the list of functions that are supported by 'SIEMENS S7-200 PPI Direct'
communication driver.

Block Data
Read

Function

Support

Block Data Read

Block Data Write

String Real Tag

Word Swap

Dword Swap

Remark

This function makes it possible that is bulk data reading at a time.
It will be applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the Xpanel.

672

CIMON-Xpanel

Block Data

This function makes it possible that is bulk data writing at a time.

Write

It will be applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the Xpanel.

String Real Tag

It makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicate string data of Xpanel
with PLC.

Word Swap

This function swaps bytes of all word or double work sized data. It depends upon 16Bit Data
Swap configuration.

Dword Swap

This function swaps word of all double word sized data. It depends upon 32Bit Data Swap
configuration.

27.45 YOKOGAWA Personal Computer Link
This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with YOKOGAWA PLC using
RS232C or RS422/485.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create
a new
Device

'Tools' - 'I/O device'in
To configure the communication device of YOKOGAWA PLC, Select
the menu or icon

tool-bar, and then “I/O device configuration” dialog box will be shown up. And then click [new
device]

button.

“I/O device selection” dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a device type as the
following figure.

Communication Driver

673

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration
window of database
accompanied by the ‘Station Name’.

Select
a
device
type

I/O Device type : ' YOKOGAWA Computer Link Protocol '

You can select communication device which is connected to Xpanel.

674

CIMON-Xpanel

Comm.Port

COM1
Select communication port to communicate. If you use RS-422/485, you
must select “COM1”.
When RS-232 communication type of COM1 port is used, 9P DSUB
connector is used.
And When RS-422/485 communication type of COM1 port is used, 5P plug
connector is used.
If you use COM1 port, you cannot use RS-232 and RS-422/485 together,
but you can use only one type.

Communication Driver

Baud rate

675

Parity bit

None

Data bits

8 bits

Stop bits

1 bit

RTS/CTS

OFF
RTS/CTS control is used for HALF-DUPLEX communication. When you
ordinary modem of two-wire circuit, you can control the modem by this
implement. Because of RS-485 communication port of the Xpanel supports
Auto Toggle function so Xpanel doesn’t use this function. This example
doesn’t use RTS-CTS control.

Retry No.

3
If communication failed with the kind of field equipments, it will retry as the
number of this.

Time Out

30
If you input as the number of 30 then it’s time out count will be 30 seconds.

Using Dial Up Not Select
Modem
Create
a
station

This item can be chosen only when you use Dial Up modem.

Move to [Station] tab at the “Serial Communication Configuration” Dialog Box and click [Add
Station] button then you can see “Station” Dialog Box popped up. Please configuration as the
following contents then click “OK” button.

676

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Station Type

DirectNet

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No

1
When field equipments number exceed over than 2, it assigned different
Station No. to divide. Station number must be same configured in field
equipments. It will not be communicated if the Station No. different each
other.

16Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
32Bit Data

This field has no effect.

Swap
Using

This field has no effect.
Checks
um

Comm. Error
Message pop

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

message at every Rx and Tx error.Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does
not display the message at data receive error. Only when there is data
transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification
message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically
about 5 seconds after.

Module Configuration

Tra
ns
mi
ssi
on
Sp

Remove side tab of Personal Computer Link Module and then configure Baud Rate with SW1.
The baud rate must be same as the speed which was configured in “Serial Communication
Configuration”.

Communication Driver

ee
d
Sw
itc
h:
SW
1

mode

Baud rate (bps)

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

677

The baud rate is set as 9600 bps by selecting Mode 5 in configuration in this example.
Dat You can configure about the communication in this switch.
a
This configuration must be same which was configured in “Serial Communication Configuration”.
For
ma
No.
Function
OFF
ON
t
1
Data Length
7 bits
8 bits
Sw
2
Parity
None
Yes
itc
h
3
Odd parity
Even Parity
:
4
Stop Bit
1 bit
2 bits
SW
2
5
Check Sum
None
Yes
6

Termination Char

None

Yes

Protection

None

Yes

Data Length

8 bits

Parity

None

Stop Bit

1bit

Check Sum

Yes
Check sum will be used to protect communication data safely from the
transmission error.

Termination Char

Yes (Attach at the end of the frame.)

Protection

None

Wiring Diagram

You can wire communication cable as the following figures.

678

CIMON-Xpanel

RS-232C
: Null Modem

Xpanel connects three lines to PLC. PLC connects lines such as above figure. If you
don’t connect lines
to PLC as the showing figure, it can’t transmit data to other field equipments but can
receive data so that
not to be accomplished communication.

RS-422

On wiring as the above figure terminal resistance must be 330Ω.
To improve stability of communication it should connect SG and use STP cable.
But shielded cables must be earthed.
RS-485

On wiring as above the figure terminal resistance must be 120Ω.

Communication Driver

679

When Xpanel is using RS-485, it connected with SDA and SDB but disconnect with
RDA and RDB.
To improve stability of communication it should connect SG and use STP cable.
But shielded cables must be earthed.

Device Memory range

You can use device memories as following range.

Device

Sym

F3SP20 /
F3SA20

F3SP30 /
F3SA30

F3SP21

F3SP25

F3SP35

Input

X00201 X61364

X00201 X71364

Output

Y00201 Y61364

Y00201 Y71364

Internal

I00001 I04096

I00001 I08192

I00001 I04096

I00001 I08192

I00001 I16384

common

E00001 E02048

E00001 E04096

Link

L00001 L01024

L00001 L11024

L00001 L71024

Special

M00001 M00512

M00001 M02048

M00001 M09984

Data

D00001 D05120

D00001 D08192

D00001 D05120

D00001 D08192

File

B00001 B32768

Link

W00001
W01024

W00001
W11024

W00001 W71024

W00001
W71024

Special

Z00001 Z00256

Z00001 Z00512

Index

V00001 V00016

V00001 V00032

Common

R00001 R01024

R00001 R04096

Timer

TU0001 TU0256

TU0001 TU1024

TU0001 TU0256

TU0001 TU1024

TU0001 TU2048

TP0001 TP0256

TP0001 TP1024

TP0001 TP0256

TP0001 TP1024

TP0001 TP2048

TI0001 TI0256

TI0001 TI1024

TI0001 TI0256

TI0001 TI1024

TI0001 TI2048

TS0001 TS0256

TS0001 TS1024

TS0001 TS0256

TS0001 TS1024

TS0001 TS2048

CU0001
CU0256

CU0001 CU1024

CU0001 CU0256

CU0001 CU1024

CP0001 CP0256

CP0001 CP1024

CP0001 CP0256

CP0001 CP1024

CI0001 CI0256

CI0001 CI1024

CI0001 CI0256

CI0001 CI1024

CS0001 CS0256

CS0001 CS1024

CS0001 CS0256

CS0001 CS1024

Counter

Error Code

When Xpanel communicates with PLC it can receive NAK including error code.
Reference Error code contents as following table.

680

CIMON-Xpanel

Error Code
(EC1)

Semantics

Probable causes

CPU number Error

CPU number is out of allowable value which range is 1~4.

Command Error

No command. It can’t execute command

Device Specification Error

No device. It doesn’t adequate use of WORD in the bit device.

Value outside the setting range

When you write a Bit Value, you must use only 0 or 1.
While you write Word, it is out of 0000~FFFF.

Data count out of range

The number of Bit/Word exceeded permitted range.
The number of data or device parameter is not same.

Monitor Error

Monitor operates without BRS/WRS.

CPU Type Error

It is not Basic CPU.

Parameter Error

If it is not specified parameter by this time, it will be invalidated.

Communication Error

Error occurred while it communicated.

Checksum Error

Checksum dislike each other.

Internal Buffer Overflow

Receiving data is over than allowable number.

Timeout while receiving characters

ETX data receiving fail. Timeout is 5 seconds.

27.46 Fuji Micrex SX Ethernet
This document describes the Micrex SX Ethernet (Fuji Electric) communication driver for XPanel. This driver
supports the TCP/IP.
Supported communication modules of SX PLC are NP1L-ET1 and NP1L-ET2.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create
a new
Device

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/ODevices’or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

Communication Driver

681

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration
window of database
accompanied by the ‘Station Name’.

Select
a
device
type

I/O Device type : " FUJI Micrex SX "

After selecting the ‘OK’button of previous step,
Ethernet Communication Configuration ’dialog box will be popped up as shown in following
‘
picture.

682

CIMON-Xpanel

FUJI Micrex SX’and configure the proper Ethernet
In this window, select the ‘Device Type’as ‘
communication parameters.
Take note that the FUJI Micrex SX driver supportsTCP/IP protocol stack only.
Since XPanel communicates with the PLC in ‘loader command communication mode’
.

• Initialize the Tx Frame When Timeout Occurs
This option provides a safety solution for communication troubled situation. If this option was
checked
and there was a communicationerror, the system would delete the remaining control frames
(data transmit frames from XPanel to PLC)
which were not transmitted but queued in communication buffer of XPanel.

Create
a
station

Station’tab of ‘Ethernet Communication Configuration’dialog box.
Move to the ‘
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the
XPanel.
Each field can be configured with following rules.

Communication Driver

683

Sta
tio
n
Na
me

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window accompanied

Sta
tio
n
Ty
pe

Choose the type of connectedPLC among the “NP1L-ETn”.

Net
wo
rk
ID

Be ignored in runtime.

So
ck
et
Por
t
No

The socket port number should be matched with the [reference number of local port

with the ‘Device Name’.

+251] or [reference number of local port+253]. The reference number of local port is
configured in DWin300 as shown in the following figure.

684

CIMON-Xpanel

In this example, the socket port number should be 507(256+251) or 509(256+253)
16
Bit
Dat
a
Sw
ap

No effect

32
Bit
Dat
a
Sw
ap

No effect

Usi
ng
Ch
ec
ks
um

No effect

Co
m
m.
Err
or
Me
ss
ag

If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification message at
every Rx and Tx error.
Otherwise(unchecked),XPanel does not display the message at data receive error. Only
when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification
message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds
after.

Communication Driver

685

e
Po
p
Up

Address & Function Codes

Following table shows the list of valid address symbols and its usage examples. The symbol character has
to be placed in the first position of address string.

Ad
dre
ss
For
ma
t

TAG Type

Format

Example

Analog

[Symbol][WordNo]

%MW1.6 or %MD1.6

Digital

[Symbol][WordNo][.][BitNo]

%MW1.6.12 or %MX1.6.12

The ‘WordNo’and ‘BitNo’are represented by decimal number. (BitNo : 0..15)
Su
pp
ort
ed
Sy
mb
ols

Symbol

WordNo Range

Description

%IX %IW %ID

512

Input

%QX %QW %QD

512

Output

%MX1. %MW1. %MD1.

131071

Standard Memory

%MX3. %MW3. %MD3.

32767

Retain Memory

511

System Memory

%MX10. %MW10. %MD10.

The memory areas listed above are provided for general purposes.
The actual range of each area should be checked with the manual of connectedCPU type.
XPanel treats the word address (%?W_) and double word address (%?D_) as same.
addresses represent a single word memory.
The actual data type should be declared in the ‘Advance’ configurationtab in TAG database as shown in
the following picture.

686

CIMON-Xpanel

Communication Cable Wiring

This interface is satisfied with standard IEEE802.3 about the 10BaseT/100BaseTX.
You can make cable and allocation pin number of RJ45 as the following figure.

RJ45 Connector

RJ45 Jack

Direct Cable: Host <-> HUB
Cable

Color

Orange/W

Orange

Green/W

Blue

Blue/W

Green

Brown/W

Cable

Communication Driver

Brown

687

Crossover Cable: Host <-> Host
Cable

Color

Orange/W

Green/W

Orange

Green

Green/W

Orange/W

Blue

Blue/W

Green

Orange

Brown/W

Brown

Cable

Support Function Table

Following table shows the list of functions that are supported by 'SIEMENS S7-200 PPI Direct'
communication driver.

Function

Support

Block Data Read

Block Data Write

String Real Tag

Word Swap

Dword Swap

Block Data
Read
Block Data
Write
String Real
Tag
Word Swap

Remark

This function makes it possible that is bulk data reading at a time.
It will be applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the Xpanel.
This function makes it possible that is bulk data writing at a time.
It will be applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the Xpanel.
It makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicate string data
of Xpanel with PLC.
This function swaps bytes of all word or double work sized data. It depends upon
16Bit Data Swap configuration.

Dword Swap

This function swaps word of all double word sized data. It depends upon 32Bit Data
Swap configuration.

688

CIMON-Xpanel

27.47 ALLENBRADLEY DF1
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocao between XPanel and MicroLogix
PLCs.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
Setup

‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’
For creating a new device activate the menu
or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name.
This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the
‘Station Name’.

Communication Driver

Select a
network type

689

I/O Device Name : ‘Allen Bradley DF1’
Serial
After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step,
‘ Communication Configuration ’dialog
box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

Allen Bradley DF1’and appropriate communication
In this window, select the ‘Device Type’as ‘
parameters.
Those parameters must be matched with the PLC.
Communication parameters should be configuredas shown in the following table.
Baud Rate

must be matched with the one of PLC

Parity

None

Data Bits

8 Bits

690

CIMON-Xpanel

Stop Bits
Comm.Type

1Bits
RS232

Communication Driver

Create a station

691

Station’tab of ‘Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box. In this dialog box, all
Move to the ‘
the connected
PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be configured with
following rules.

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the
‘Device Name’.

Station Type

Choose the ‘SLC500/MicroLogix’.(No other type can be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no meaning in this driver. (ignored in runtime)

Station No.

This number must be matched with the one of PLC.

692

CIMON-Xpanel

16Bit Data Swap This field has no meaning in this driver.
32Bit Data Swap This field has no meaning in this driver.
Using

This field has no meaning in this driver.

Checksum
Comm. Error

If this item is checked,XPanel displays a communicationerror notification

Message Pop

message

at every Rx and Tx error.
Otherwise(unchecked),XPanel does not display the message at data
receive error.
Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error,
the
notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically
about 5 seconds after.

Communication Setup : RSLogix

Following picture shows the screen shot of RSLogix. The network address and communication speed
(Baud Rate) of PLC are configuredin this
dialog box. Error Detection must be selected to BCC and Driver is selected to Full Duplex.
Please note that those set data should be matched with the device configurationof XPanel.

Communication Driver

693

Address Notation

Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in XPanel database.

Symbol

Description

Input File

I:00.000-I:08.255

Output File

O:00.000-O:08.255

Status File

S:0-S163

M31.7

R/W

Bit File

B3:0-B3:255

SM85.7

R/W

Timer File

T4:0-T4:255

T127

R/W

Counter File

C5:0-C5:255

C127

R/W

Integer File

N7:0-N7:255

R/W

Float File

F8:0-F8:255

R/W

Word Notation

Bit Notation
I:00.000/00I:08.255/15

Access
R/W
R/W

694

CIMON-Xpanel

Communication Cable Wiring

27.48 METRONIX APD
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and METRONIX
APD.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘
Tools’
- >’
I/O Devices’or

icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

Communication Driver

695

I/O Device Name
Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by
the ‘
Station Name’
.

Sel Select a device type : Metronix APD
ect
a
After selecting the ‘
OK’button of previous step, ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box will be
de
vic
popped up as shown in following picture.
e
typ
e

696

CIMON-Xpanel

In this window, select the ‘
Device Type’as 'Metronix APD' and appropriate communication parameters.
Ensure that those parameters are matched with the device’
s configuration.

Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n

Move to the ‘
Station’tab of ‘
Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box. In this dialog box, all the
connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be configured with
following rules.

Communication Driver

Station Name

697

Give a name to the Device. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the ‘
Device Name’
.

Station Type

Choose the ‘
APD-VS Series’
. (Another type can’
t be selected.)

Network ID

This field has no meaning in this driver. (Ignored in runtime)

Station No.

This number must be matched with the one of Device.

16Bit Data Swap

This field has no meaning in this driver.

698

CIMON-Xpanel

32Bit Data Swap

This field has no meaning in this driver.

CheckSum

This field has no meaning in this driver.
If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification message at
every Rx and Tx error.

Comm. Error
Message Pop Up

Address Notation

Device

Word

Description
UINT32

Bit

Access

INT32

%MD

Menu Data

%MD000 ~ %MD999

%MD000.0~%MD000.31
~
%MD999.0~%MD999.31

R/W

Servo State

AI000 ~ AI012

AI000.0~AI000.31
~
AI012.0~AI012.31

DO000~DO011

R/W

AO000 ~ AO012

R/W

Operation

●Menu data address configuration
[Ex]

Current Sate Pd-001 ->

%MD000

Current Speed Pd-002-> %MD001
Command Speed Pd--> %MD002

●Servo State Check address configuration
Address

Description

AI0

Current Speed

AI1

Command Speed

AI2

Current Pulse

AI3

Command Pulse

AI4

Current Load

AI5

Peak Load

Communication Driver

AI6

I/O State

AI7

DC Volt

AI8

Speed Refer

AI9

Speed Feedback

AI10

Torque Refer

AI11

Torque Feedback

AI12

Servo State

699

●Servo State Set address configuration : Digital
Address

Description

DO0

Alarm Reset

DO1

Alarm History Clear

DO2

Menu Initialize

DO3

Current offset store

DO4

I/O State initialization

●Speed Driving
Address

Description

Tag Type

DO5

Direction

Digital

DO6

Write : Speed, Acc & Dec time, Time

Digital

AO000

Speed

Analog

AO001

Current offset store

Analog

AO002

I/O State initialization

Analog

AO003

Time

Analog

Note 1.
Direction : Configure rotation direction of motor. (0 : CCW, 1: CW)
Speed : Configure driving speed. (unit : 9999.9 r/min)
Acceleration time : Configure reaching time to regular speed by acceleration. (unit : 99.99)
Deceleration time : Configure reaching time to regular speed by deceleration. (unit : 99.99)
Time : Configure driving time from start to stop. (unit : 9999)

Note 2.
n After you configure Direction, Speed, Acc, Dec and Time, write digital value to D06 address
then Speed Driving Command will be executed.
n To show floating point data, configure data scale at database.

700

CIMON-Xpanel

●Position Driving
Address

Description

Tag Type

DO7

Write : Position, Speed, Acc & Dec Time

Digital

AO004

Position

Digital

AO005

Speed

Analog

AO006

Acceleration

Analog

Ao007

Time

Analog

Note 2.
n After you configure Direction, Speed, Acc, Dec and Time, write digital value to D06 address
then Speed Driving Command will be executed.

Communication Driver

701

n To show floating point data, configure data scale at database.

●Gain tuning
Address

Description

Tag Type

DO011

Write : Speed, Distance, Tuning range

Digital

AO010

Speed

Analog

AO011

Distance

Analog

AO012

Tuning range

Analog

n After you configure Speed, Distance and Tuning range write digital value to D06 address
then Position Driving Command will be executed.

Command

Address

Description

Remark

Menu Data

%MD000~%MD999

Menu Data

R/W

DO0

Alarm Reset

DO1

Alarm History Clear

DO2

Menu Initialize

DO3

Current offset Save

DO4

I/O State Initialize

AI0

Current Speed

AI1

Command Speed

AI2

Current Pulse

AI3

Command Pulse

AI4

Current Load

AI5

Peak Load

AI6

I/O State

AI7

DC Voltage

AI8

Speed Refer

AI9

Speed Feedback

AI10

Torque Refer

AI11

Torque Feedback

AI12

Servo State

DO5

Direction

DO6

Write:Speed,Acc,Dec,Time

AO000

Speed

AO001

Acceleration Time

AO002

Deceleration Time

State Setting

Servo State
Check

Speed

702

CIMON-Xpanel

AO003

Driving Time

DO7

Write:Pos,Speed,Acc,Dec

AO004

Position

AO005

Speed

AO006

Acceleration Time

AO007

Deceleration Time

Auto Driving

DO8

Auto Driving

Stop

AO008

After stop, program information reset

Emergency
Stop

DO9

Emergency Stop

Time

AO009

When driving start after stop, it makes
continuous driving

Starting
Point
Driving

DO10

Starting Point Driving by configured mode
at parameter.

DO11

Write : Speed, Distance, Tuning range

AO010

Speed

AO011

Distance

AO012

Tuning range

Position

Gain Tuning

Communication Cable Wiring

Communication Driver

703

27.49 FARA N70/700 PLUS
Overview

This ducument describes the FARA N70 / 700 PLUS communication driver for Xpanel.
Communication available PLC is : NX7, N70 PLUS, N700 PLUS

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
Setup

‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’
For creating a new device activate the menu
or

icon in

tool-bar.
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name.
This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by
the ‘Station Name’.

704

CIMON-Xpanel

Select a
network type

I/O Device Name : ‘FARA N70/700 PLUS’
Serial
After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step,
‘ Communication
Configuration ’dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

In this window, select the ‘Device Type’as ‘FARA N70/700 PLUS’and configure the
proper serial communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched
with the device's configuration.
Create a station

Station’tab of ‘Serial Communication Configuration’dialog box. In this
Move to the ‘
dialog box, all the connected
PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be
configured with following rules.

Communication Driver

705

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied
with the ‘Device Name’.

Station Type

Choose the type of connected PLC among the 'FARA N70/
N700 PULS."

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

Specify a decimal number between 1 and 190.

16Bit Data Swap This field has no meaning in this driver.
32Bit Data Swap This field has no meaning in this driver.
Using
Checksum

This field has no effect. This driver is always checking the
BCC.

Comm. Error

If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communicationerror

Message Pop

notification message

at every Rx and Tx error.

706

CIMON-Xpanel

Otherwise(unchecked),XPanel does not display the message
at data receive error.
Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the
station) error, the
notification message is popped up. This message box will be
closed automatically
about 5 seconds after.

Address & Function Codes

Following table shows the list of valid address range used FARA PLC for each address area. The
symbol character has to be placed in the first positon of address string. The address number follows
the symbol character.

Area

Symbol

Analog TAG

Digital TAG

Ext. Input/Output

R000 - R127

R000.0 - R127.15

LINK

L000 - L063

L000.0 - L063.15

Internal Relay

M000 - M127

M000.0 - M127.15

KEEP Relay

K000 - K127

K000.0 - K127.15

Special internal
Output

F000 - F015

F000.0 - F015.15

W000 - W3071

Word Register
Timer/Counter

Remark

Switch Configuration

PIN No

Switch

1
2

Content

OFF

Run by stored internal RAM

Run by stored at FLASH ROM

OFF

RS-232C

RS-485 Communication(For Programmer)

Dip Switch 1

Communication(IBM-PC)

OFF

9600 bps Board rate

OFF

38400 bps Board rate

OFF

19200 bps Board rate

4800 bps Board rate

Communication Driver

707

Communication Cable Wiring

[XPANEL COM1 / COM2 RS232C]

27.50 Samsung BRAIN SPC Series
Overview

This document describes the Samsung BRAIN SPC Series communication driver for Xpanel.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
device

‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’
For creating a new device activate the menu
or
tool-bar.
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

icon in

708

CIMON-Xpanel

I/O Device Name : Give a device name.
This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by
the ‘Station Name’.

Communication Driver

Select a
network type

709

I/O Device Name : ‘SAMSUNG BRAIN Series’
Serial
After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step,
‘ Communication
Configuration ’dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

In this window, select the ‘Device Type’SAMSUNG BRAIN Series’and configure the
proper serial communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched
with the device's configuration.
Create a station

710

CIMON-Xpanel

Station Name

Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied
with the ‘Device Name’.

Station Type

Choose the type of connectedPLC among the 'SPC Series."

Network ID

This field has no effect.

Station No.

Specify a decimal number between 1 and 190.

16Bit Data Swap This field has no meaning in this driver.
32Bit Data Swap This field has no meaning in this driver.
Using
Checksum

This field has no effect. This driver is always checking the
BCC.

Comm. Error

If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communicationerror

Message Pop

notification message

at every Rx and Tx error.
Otherwise(unchecked),XPanel does not display the message

Communication Driver

711

at data receive error.
Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the
station) error, the
notification message is popped up. This message box will be
closed automatically
about 5 seconds after.

Address & Function Codes

Following table shows the list of valid address range used FARA PLC for each address area. The
symbol character has to be placed in the first position of address string. The address number follows
the symbol character.

Area

Symbol

Analog TAG

Digital TAG

Ext. Input / Output

R000 - R127

R000.0 - R127.15

LINK

L000 - L063

L000.0 - L063.15

Internal Relay

M000 - M127

M000.0 - M127.15

KEEP Relay

K000 - K127

K000.0 - K127.15

F000 - F015

F000.0 - F015.15

W000 - W3071

Special internal
Output
Word Register
Timer / Counter

Communication Cable Wiring

[XPANEL COM1 / COM2 RS232C]

Remark

712

CIMON-Xpanel

Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts

Part

XXVIII

714

CIMON-Xpanel

FAQ
Is there any question about CIMON - Xpanel ? See our FAQs.
See :
· Xpanel Page Update and Speed
· Xpanel IP Setting
· How to use Xpanel Printer
· How can I connect Xpanel and XpanelDesigner via USB port under Windows Vista?
· How can I display the engineering value from the raw value in my device?
· How can I export/import the Xpanel's TAG DB to/from Microsoft Excel or other 3rd vender program?
· Corrective Actions when font file delete is failed during download
· When Ethernet Loader is not operated

28.1

Xpanel Page Update and Speed
IN THIS TOPIC :
To quickly update a page(Fixed Background)
To quickly update a page(Draw Changed Object Only)
Reduce Page Size(Using 256 Bitmap)

To quickly update a page (Fixed Background)

If it arranges a lot of objects on the page in the work, update would be slower.
Considering the specificity, "Fixed Background" function makes the speed of update higher.
The "Fixed Background" function is registered to each page, and the page setting up the function of the
"Fixed Background" is handled as
the 'Object appointed with change’and the 'Object not appointed with change’are divided.

‘Object appointed with change’is as follows.
· Object for which Visible, Blink, V-Size, H-Size, V-Move, H-Move, Color and Rotate are specified.
· When the change is specified for Group Object, All Object are handled as ‘Group object appointed
with change’
· Touch and Entry Data are nothandled by the change.
· Tag Value, Date Time, String Value, Multi String, Trend Graph, Data Log and Alarm Summary
are
handled as ‘Object appointed with change’
.

FAQ

"Fi

Select - Page for setting "Fixed Background" function in XpanelDesigner

Click - [Tools] -> [Page Setup]

d
Ba
ck
gro
un
d"
Fu
nct
ion
Set
up

Select - "Fixed Background" of Page Properties and click - [Ok] button

715

716

CIMON-Xpanel

The upper page arranges the 'Tag Value Object' on Group object with the shape of a toothed wheel.
In case of the object not to set the
"Fixed Background", it has picture renewal cycle for about 0.5sec
because all objects are drawn again when data updates. However, in case to set "Fixed
the
Background",
the picture renewal cycle is shorten because only the 'Tag Value Object' is drawn without drawing all
Objects with the shape of a toothed wheel.

To quickly update a page (Draw Changed Object Only)

Reduce the number of Objects to
Quickly update a Page.Generally, if ‘Object appointed with change’are
piled up by using ‘Draw Changed Object Only’,
the last changed Object is displayed normally.

The number difference between the general case and the case of using ‘Draw Changed Object Only’

FAQ

717

For example, if three objects designated with change like upper page are changed at the same time, all
objects inside the yellow circle are drawn again.
In this case, 12 Object will be drawn. However, if ‘Draw Changed Object Only’is used, three objects will be
drawn again and the drawn time will be shorten to 1/4 time.

Caution when

Avoid the piled-up the objects designated with change when using
‘Draw Changed

using

Object Only’

'Draw
Changed
Object Only'

718

CIMON-Xpanel

For instance, there are three quadrilaterals designated with color change.
In case not to use‘Draw Changed Object Only’
, the color of three quadrilaterals
are changed each other.
However, in case to use‘Draw Changed Object Only’
, the lastly changed object
is on the top of them.

'Draw

Select - Page for setting "Draw Changed Object Only" function in XpanelDesigner

Changed

Click - [Tools] -> [Page Setup]

Object Only'
Setup

Select - "Draw Changed Object Only" of Page Properties and click - [Ok] button

When using ‘Draw Changed Object Only’, Caution is as follows.
· When there are Objects designated with V-Move, H-Move and Rotate, "Draw
Changed Object Only" function doesn't operate.
· If objects that its Visible is decided by same tag are overlap, the under object is
always removed or covered due to the upper object.
· In case to use 'Fixed Background'
, it is filled with the background picture of the
area first value. If not, page background color would be filled.

Reduce Page Size (Using 256 Bitmap)

If the size of page file is big, there will be lots of errors at download and it will take much time to read the
page file.
Generally the page composed with basic objects doesn’t take big size. However, if the page is using many

FAQ

719

images, the size of the page file will be bigger.
In the case of it, if you check the "Using 256 bitmap" in the Page Properties, it would change 24 bit image
of page to the 8 bit image at download and also
it would contract the size about 1/2~1/3.
Instead of it, pixel data is changed, so the shapes of editing and Xpanel could be different slightly.

"Using 256

Select - Page for setting "Using 256 Bitmap" function in XpanelDesigner

Bitmap"

Click - [Tools] -> [Page Setup]

Function Setup

Select - "Using 256 Bitmap" of Page Properties and click - [Ok] button

28.2

Xpanel IP Setting
IN THIS TOPIC :
When the project that Ethernet I/O Device is registered is operating
Using Network Setting Window of Windows CE
Using Ethernet Loader

When the project that the Ethernet I/O Device is registered in Xpanel is operating

When the project that the Ethernet I/O Device is registered in Xpanel is operating, refer to the following
pictures.
"Xpanel Config" can be displayed by pressing three corners of touch area as follows.

720

CIMON-Xpanel

Push the" SW Keyboard " button. For removing the ‘SW Keyboard’from screen, push the ‘SW
Keyboard’ button again.

Push the " Comm. Config " button. ->Select -[Ethernet]in the I/O Device selection box

FAQ

721

IP Setting Window is displayed.
Change the IP Setting usingSW
' Keyboard' and click the[OK] button of Communication Setup
window.

Click the [OK] button

Click the [OK] button to close the system

Using Network Setting Window of Windows CE

Close -Xpanel Program
When it is connected with ActiveSync, close - Xpanel Program by "Online ->Xpanel Program Stop”
When it is not connected with ActiveSync, close - Xpanel Program[Exit]
by button of“Xpanel Config”
window

Xpanel wallpaper is displayed.

722

CIMON-Xpanel

Touch the screen under to appearTaskbar . Execute the software keyboard by touching the

icon at

the right corner of the task bar.

FAQ

Change the content of Settings window using software keyboard, and
Click the [OK] button.
Ethernet Driver] Settings window by
Close [LAN91C111
Close -[Network and Dial-up Connections]window by

button.
button.

Close the system by selecting'Start -> Suspend'for storing the network settings permanently.

Using Ethernet Loader

* Ethernet Loader supports OS version 2.00 or late.
If the project is running, click the [Exit] button in the “Xpanel config” window.

Change -"IP" by using IP Input Keyboard

723

724

CIMON-Xpanel

* If "DHCP" is not checked,IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway can be changed.
For application the changed configurations, select the [Apply this new setting] button.

Click the [OK] button then it will go on.

28.3

How to use Xpanel Printer
This manual explains "Printer Setup" and "Print Out Setup".
Xpanel can connect USB Printer that is support PCL. (USB Host support model)

IN THIS TOPIC :
Xpanel Printer Setup

Print Out Setup

Xpanel Printer Setup

"Xpanel Config" can be displayed by pressing three corners of touch area as follows.

FAQ

725

Push the " SW Keyboard " button. For removing the ‘SW Keyboard’from screen, push the ‘SW
Keyboard’ button again.

Push the " Printer " button.

726

CIMON-Xpanel

Printer

Select the printer type. Xpanel supportsPCL
‘ Inkjet ’and P
‘CL Laser ’printer
supporting PCL.

Port

Select a port that the printer is connected.
· USB Printer : If a printer is connected to the Xpanel via the USB host port,
select the LPT1:"
"
The LPT1 port is automatically detected and displayed
when the printer is connected.
· Network Printer : If a printer is connected with the network,
select the Network
"
". In this case, the ‘Net Path’field must be configured as
following example.
Format

Example :

\\PC_name\Printer_name
\\kim40\canonir2

Paper Size

Select - Paper size of printer.

Draft Mode

If this mode is not selected, the size of the output image decreases though the
image is clearly output

Color

If you select“PCL Inkjet”, enable Print out with Color.

Print Range

Select - All

Orientation

Select - Print orientation

Margins

Adjust - Print margins.

If setting is finished, push[OK]
button.
If the ‘Port’is chosen asNetwork
‘
’, the Xpanel tries to connect the PC through network and pops-up
following logon dialog box.

FAQ

727

Enter the user name and password to the logon dialog box above, and then push the button.
Following dialog box is displayed to Xpanel.

If [Yes] is chosen, the password entered will be stored in disk permanently.
Otherwise (in case of[No]), the Xpanel will ask the password whenever try to use the network printer.
Touch - [System Shutdown] o f "Xpanel Config" window to save the setup data
(If the ‘System Shutdown’was not executed, the setup data will be canceled and the previous one will
be restored when the system is restarted.)
To continue, push [OK] button. Xpanel will be shutdown.

Print Out Setup

Xpanel provides the HardCopy()’
‘
function for printing the screen image.

728

CIMON-Xpanel

Ma 1. Select - Object to use print button from screen
ke
a. Select - [Touch] in 'Object Config' and [Command Expression] in 'Action'
a
b. Input - HardCopy(); in Command. Click[ O-K ]
Pri
nt
HardCopy() functionoutputs a present screen to the selected printer.
But
ton

2. Download the project to Xpanel
3. Push "Print Screen " area.

FAQ

729

4. After a while, print completion message box is displayed.

28.4

How can I connect Xpanel and XpanelDesigner via USB port
under Windows Vista?
V1.19 or later version of Xpanel operating system supports Microsoft Windows Vista.

The most recent Xpanel operating system image is provided with XpanelDesigner.
If your current XpanelDesigner does not include V1.19 or later version of OS image, you need to upgrade
your XpanelDesigner first.
Please check the web-page (http://kdtsys.com/kor) for the new version of XpanelDesigner.

And "Windows Mobile Device Center" is needed for PC instead of "ActiveSync" which is used under previous
Windows version.
"Mobile Device Center" is abailable at http://www.microsoft.com/.

730

28.5

CIMON-Xpanel

How can I display the engineering value from the raw value in my
device?
Xpanel provides two different method to calculate a scaled engineering data.
System designer can choose one of there two methods with the "Scale" option in TAG database.
If this option is checked, Xpanel performs 'Scale/Offset' method.

IN THIS TOPIC :
Scale / Offset Method

Proportional Method

Scale / Offset Method

The 'Scale/Offset' method uses following formula for calculating the engineering value.

Veng = Vraw X Scale + Offset

Vraw

Read data from device. Not processed, raw value from device.

Veng

Engineering data. (The data which will be displayed in Xpanel's screen)

( Example 1 ) If an analog TAG was configured as following picture, and the
rawVfrom device is
32768,

FAQ

731

Veng = (32768 X 0.1) - 3276.8 = 3276.8 -3276.80 =

As shown in above example, the engineering data configurations (Min Value and Max Value) do not
affect the raw value processing.
But, in case of proportional method (if the 'Scale' option was not checked), the engineering data Min/
Max value configurations are important factors.
See the next following page.

Proportional Method

The 'Proportional Method' process the law value twice by using following formulas.

Scale = (Veng_max - Veng_min ) / (Vraw_max - Vraw_min )
Offset = Vraw_min - Vraw_min
Veng = Vraw X Scale + Offset

Vraw

Read data from device. Not processed, raw value from device.

Veng

Engineering data. (The data which will be displayed in Xpanel's screen)

Vraw_max , Vraw_min
Veng_max , Veng_min

Raw data rage configurations

Engineering data range configurations

First, it calculates the scale and offset values from min/max configurations.
The calculated scale and offset values are applied to the same formula as 'Scale/Offset Method' for
acquiring the final engineering value.
E
( xample 2) If an analog TAG was configured as following picture, and the
rawVfrom device is
32768,

732

CIMON-Xpanel

Scale = (3276.7 - (-3276.8))/ (65535 - 0) = 0.1
Offset = (-3276.8) -0 = -3276.8
V
eng

= (32768 X 0.1) - 3276.8 = 3276.8 -3276.80 =

Note that above two examples gave the same result.

28.6

How can I export/import the Xpanel's TAG DB to/from Microsoft
Excel or other 3rd vender program?
The XpanelDesigner does not have a special menu for TAG DB exporting and importing.
However, the clipboard function of Windows can be used for the same purpose.
Use the "Copy" function of "Edit" menu while the TAG DB window is opened and some of TAGs in
DB are under selected state.
And next, activate the Microsoft Excel, and use "Paste" function of "Edit" menu. Following table can
be helpful to edit each TAG data in Excel worksheed.

Cell

TAG Type
Group

A
B
C
D

Digital

Analog

String

Remark

TAG name (including the group name)
0

TAG type code

TAG Description
Real/Virtual TAG Flag

0 = Virtual TAG
1 = Real TAG

FAQ

I/O Device Name

I/O Point Address

Initial Value

733

H
Data Type
Code

(See note 1)
J

Length of
string

0 (Reserved)

K
L

0 (Reserved)

Scale factor
flag

Eng. data Min.

Eng. data
Max.

Raw data Min.

Scale factor when the scale
factor flag (M cell) was set

Raw data
Max.

Offset value when the scale
factor flag (M cell) was set

Last value latch flag

0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved)

0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved)

Note 1) Data type code of analog TAG
Code

Type

Code

Type

INT8

BCD16

INT16

BCD32

INT32

UBCD8

UINT8

UBCD16

UINT16

UBCD32

UINT32

FLOAT

BCD8

0 = Normal
1 = Use the scale factor

0 = Do not latch
1 = Do latch

734

28.7

CIMON-Xpanel

Corrective Actions when font file delete is failed during download

It is possible if error font file is downloaded to Xpanel.

Corrective Action 1

1. Click - [Online] -> [Setup Link]. Select the link type of Xpanel.
2. Click - [Online] -> [Download to Xpanel(PC->Xpanel)
]
3. Uncheck - [Download The Font File] of "Download to Xpanel(PC->Xpanel)"

4. Click - [Ok]

Corrective Action 2

1. Close - Xpanel Program by [Exit] button of “Xpanel Config” window

FAQ

2. Two touch the [My Device] of this screen.

3. Two touch the [Xpanel]

735

736

CIMON-Xpanel

4. Select the [Bin]folder. Delete the folder by touching [File] -> [Delete].

5. Select - [Ok]in the error window while deleting it.
6. When it is completed, reset the Xpanel.

FAQ

737

7. Close the warning massage by pressing [OK] button as follows.

8. Download project after connectingPC and Xpanel.

28.8

When Ethernet Loader is not operated
When Xpanel is not displayed in the Xpanel Found Window

1. It is possible to have a problem in the wire connection of communication cable. Please check the
communication cable like following pictures.
Cable

Color

Orange/W

Orange

Green/W

Blue

Blue/W

Green

Brown/W

Brown

Cable

738

CIMON-Xpanel

HUB : When Xpanel is connected with PC via the hub>

Cable

Color

Orange/W

Green/W

Orange

Green

Green/W

Orange/W

Blue

Blue/W

Green

Orange

Brown/W

Brown

Cable

Host : When Xpanel is connected with PC via the cable>

2. In case of the connection with another PC of network, Xpanel doesn’t send its own IP information any
more.
After the end of Xpanel of another PC for 15~20 seconds, rebut Xpanel Designer and check its
condition of the connection.

3. In the condition of 1:1 connection with Xpanel, check the “Obtain an IP address automatically” in the IP
settings.
If it is set, its IP is assigned from DHCP server. if not, normal IP to PC would not be assigned and
Ethernet communication can’t work.
The network setting of PC can be confirmed by the under method.

Click -Control
[
Panel] -> Network
[
Connections]

FAQ

Select - [L ocal Area Connection] -> [Properties]by using the right button of mouse.

739

740

CIMON-Xpanel

Click - [Internet Protocol(TCP/IP)] -> [Properties]

FAQ

741

In case of the direct connection with the equipment via the cross cable, IP address is not sent
automatically.
So, certainly, select “Use the following IP address”and input IP address, Subnet mask and Default
gateway.
Input the value of Subnet mask and gateway same with address registered to Xpanel, and input
different value referring the value of Subnet mask met to the network.

Ex) When Ethernet setting of Xpanel is as follows,
IP address : 100.100.100.10

Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0

100.100.100.1
Register -PC as follows.
IP address : 100.100.100.xxx ->xxx is less than 255 except 0, 1, and 10.
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
Default gateway : 100.100.100.1
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Default gateway :

742

CIMON-Xpanel

4. If Ethernet Loader program of Xpanel is closed, It will be not displayed in the item.
Do not close Ethernet Loader window when Xpanel is running.

If you close unfortunately,it can be restarted automatically by On/Off the power of Xpanel.

5. The Xpanel information frame can be interceptedby the firewall program set up in PC.
After closing a real time monitoring function and firewall program, restart Xpanel Designer and check its
action.

6. Ethernet Loader is supported in the Xpanel OS v2.00 or late.
After butting, you can check OS version at the System Log window of Xpanel Config.

FAQ

743

When program run fail or create fail message happens continually during project download

1. The connection of the cable is normal but the network setup could not be matched.
Referring 3.clauses described at the upper picture, check IP setup between PC and Xpanel.
2. It is possible to close Ethernet Loader program of Xpanel by mistake.
Click the [Exit] button at the “Xpanel config”for closing Xpanel project and check the Ethernet Loader
program described at the 4.clauses.
Ethernet connection test of PC and Xpanel

1. The network connection with Xpanel can be confirmed by an easy operation in PC.
2. Confirm the IP of the PC via IPCONFIG.
2.1 Select - [Start] -> [Run]on the PC.

2.2 Input “cmd”in the open of 'Run' window and click the [OK] button.
2.3 Command window is displayed.

744

CIMON-Xpanel

in the Command window and push the ‘Enter' key.
2.4 Input “ipconfig”
2.5 If the cable is connected,IP information setting to the PC is displayed on the monitor.
If not, "Media disconnected"message is displayed.
3. Ethernet communication connection test (Ping test)
3.1 Input "ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" in Command window and push the ‘Enter' key. "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is a
IP of Xpanel.
Ex) Ping 172.16.106.52

3.2 If the network is connected normally, Request time is displayed on the monitor.
If not,"Request timed out" messageis displayed.

Corrective Actions when Font File delete is failed during download

1. It is possible if error font file is downloaded to Xpanel.
2. Please take measures in the following order.
2.1 Close - Xpanel Program by [Exit] button of “Xpanel Config” window

FAQ

2.2 Two touch the [My Device] of this screen.

2.3 [Xpanel]folder is displayed.

2.4 Two touch the [Xpanel]

745

746

CIMON-Xpanel

2.5 Select the "Bin" folder and remove folder by pressing

button. Select - [Ok]in the error

massages while deleting it.
2.6 When it is completed, reset the Xpanel.
2.7 There will be the background picture and the warming massage not to find program.

2.8 Close the warning massage by pressing [OK] button and download project after connectingPC
and Xpanel.

Index

date/time
68
DELTA TAU
406
Developing Environment Setup
digital tag
104
DirectNet
464
DO-WHILE
322

Index
- A Access Privilege
308
AddMessage
358
AlarmCsvWr
356
AlarmPrint
355
ALLENBRADLEY DF1
688
Analog TAG
104
Apply from alarms
370
Apply scroll message using script
ASIC Protocol
383

370

389

Edit Data Bridge Model
200
Editing recipe data using system memory
230
EntryData
171
Essential Safety Precautions
32
Ethernet loader
737
Ethernet 통 신 설 정
114
Example of using system memory about opened
page log.
223
exit
74

- F FAQ
714
FAQ_CorrectiveActions
FC300
394
FOR Statement
323
Frame Editor
139
FrameOpen
331
FR-E500
533
Fuji
639, 680

- C CIMON SCADA 설 정
300
ClearAlarmLog
358
ClosePort
346
Color
167
comm. monitor
61
comm.config
62
Command Script
319
Communication Driver
382
Conditional Expression
319
Configuration Items
369
configuration tool
60
CONTINUE
324

734

- G General Safety Precautions
34
GetSecurity
353
GetSysMem
361
GetTime
332
GLOFA
412, 419, 469, 477, 484, 627
GOTO
324
Graphic Page Editor
134
Group TAG
103

- D Danfoss
394
Data Bridge
200
Data Logger
193
Data Logging Configuration
database
97
Database Edit using EXCEL
Database Window
98
DataLog
336

- E -

- B Barcode Scanner
Blink
162

747

193
108

- H HardCopy
345
HITACHI Inverter SJ300/L300P
H-Move
165

428

748

CIMON-Xpanel

How can I export/import the Xpanel's TAG DB
to/from Microsoft Excel or other 3rd vender
program
732
How to use Database
99
H-Size
163

- I I/O 디 바 이 스 설 정
113
I/O디 바 이 스
113
IF-ELSE
322
Installation / Dimensions
Interfaces
41
Internal Functions
326
IP설 정
719

Melsec 1C
536
MELSEC 1E
551
Melsec 3E
546
Melsec 3E ASCII
557
Melsec A Series
563
Melsec FX Series
568, 573
Melsec Q Series
578
MELSEC_FX2N-1020GM
586
METRONIXAPD 694
MEWTOCOL-COM
601
misc,config
66
MITSUBISHI
533, 536, 546, 551, 557, 563,
568, 573, 578
MODBUS
591, 596
ModelConfiguration
213

- K -

- N -

KDT SYSTEM
437, 445
KDT Systems Xpanel Master
Keyence KV
459
keypad page
185
KOYO
464

NAIS
601
network
54
NumToStr
350

453

- L LcdBacklight
364
LcdBrightDown
363
LcdBrightUp
363
Library
143
LOG Trend
265
LogOff
352
LogOn
351
LogOnWin
352
LSIS
412, 419, 469, 484, 497, 529, 627
LS산 전
477, 489
LS산 전 Master-K S 시 리 즈 PLC Enet
521
LS산 전 Master-K S 시 리 즈 PLC 로 더
504
LS산 전 Master-K S 시 리 즈 PLCCnet
509
LS산 전 Master-KH시 리 즈 PLCCnet
515

- M MakeCsv
334
MakeCsvUsb
335
MakeLogCsv
335

- O Object Properties
158
OMRON
606, 612
OpenConfigWin
353
OpenPort
345
Operator
317
Overview
97

- P Package
36
Page Properties
135
PageOpenS
331
Peripherals
53
PMAC
406
Printer
730
printer : printer setup
69
Printer 사 용 방 법
724
Project setup and download

- R RcpConfig()

342

Index

RcpCsvRd
340
RcpCsvWr
341
RcpDownload
337
RcpFileRead
339
RcpFileStore
338
RcpGetSysMem
359
RcpMemDown
339
RcpMemUp
339
RcpSetSysMem
360
RcpStop
338
RcpUpload
337
ReceiveByte
348
Recipe
212
Recipe Operator Interface
RemoveMessage
359
RETURN
325
RK512/3964R
648
Rotate
167
RunApp
333
RUNSCRIPT 326

217

- S SAIA S-BUS
631
Scope Trend
245
ScrCapture
344
screen captrure
68
Script
313
Scroll Message Setup
369
Scroll_Message
368
Security
306
SendByte
347
SendString
347
Serial 통 신 설 정
117
SetDate(R1,R2,R3)
365
SetSpeed(R1)
365
SetTime(R1)
365
SIEMENS
648
SIEMENS S7 Ethernet
654
SIEMENS S7 MPI
659, 665
Sleep
345
SoftKeyboard
354
SPC Trend
251
Specification
37
ST Trend
258
Statements
321
StaticBeepCtrl(R1)
364
© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

String Construction
280
String Editor
280
String TAG
107
StringTable
332
StrToNum
349
Structure of Program
313
Style
160
sw keyboard
69
SWITCH-CASE
323
SysMemFill
363
SysMemMove
362
system log
60
System Memory
221
System Overview
53
system shutdown
73

- T tag
97
TimeStr
333
Touch
169
touch calibrate
67
TouchCalib
357
Trend
238
TrendCsvWr
343

- U User Library
155
User LogOff
310
User LogOn
310
User Registration
306
Using Data Logging
197
Using Multiple Language
287
Using System Memory Tag
221

- V Visible
161
Vista
729
V-Move
164
V-Size
162

- W WHILE

322

749

750
Wiring

CIMON-Xpanel
44

- X XGT
489, 497
Xpanel
13
xpanel Designer
55, 76, 86, 87, 97
Xpanel Project download
76
Xpanel unit
56
XpanelDesigner
13
Xpanel의 데 이 터 정 의
299
XY Trend
271

- Y YOKOGAWA
672
YT Trend
238

- Z 경보
122
경보그룹
122
경보설정
123
경보요약
128
다국어
287
다국어 테이블 사용하여 운전중 표시문자 변경하기
292
데이터서버
299
데이터업데이트
714
마법사 오브젝트
144
설치안내
32
속도개선
714
입력기 등록
287
키 입력 설정
189
키 입력창
189
키패드
185
페이지전환
714
한 페이지에서 다국어 문자열 표시하기
290

751

Endnotes 2... (after index)

Back Cover

Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.2 Linearized : No Page Count : 752 XMP Toolkit : 3.1-701 Creator Tool : http://www.helpandmanual.com Creation Date : 2012:08:24 15:04:10Z Version ID : 1 Document ID : 4246414c4d4d5a564b48454653424155 Format : application/pdf Creator : Producer : wPDF3 by WPCubed GmbH Page Mode : UseOutlines Author : Title : Subject : Create Date : 2012:08:24 15:04:10 Modify Date : 2012:08:24 15:04:10
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

L010987 XPanel Designer Users Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation